


O *0 ,^* ^ ". 5 > 

♦ 1 • O^ *0^ * L^'4. 





o 

u 'y ^ *’ 



: v\^ • 


<•. 'o’,;* ,0 




,0 ^ ♦/TvT* /V 

.o^ .<>’•. "^o 



/ # ^ O cO^ % • ^ t • o 

^ ^ ^ ^ jki^ % ^iNOrw^A -. ^ ^ ^ ^ #1^ ^ 

• « >^ii^ _ ^ ♦ANWA*’. c^ 


,* y ^ » 


\:*V • 


" 'V, - 


'V ^'•"••* xO , 'o','*'* 0 

o Ay •'■'*♦ tv . o » • ^ 






■v *..o’ v«- O iO -v '..o'* 

^ v' .’•«- cv 4,0^ <?* v' 

• 'mi£\ \ *’ 

, * .G^ ^ A *o^t* ^(y ^ 

jsr^Nxiis« ^ Jem //yd-. « ^ > % 




'b V 



^ 4 ^ *'•#'•'* ^ ♦•n*’ ^ 

o 0^ fc ^ ^ ^ "a. Ky^ f O ♦ * 

'• •#>. A-^ ■tr a"^ .' 






• A *• 

A. 

. ^o t » jy ^ ^' • • • ^ A 

^ fv ^ ® ** ® 4 A.^ * ^ • 

^ % t® °o »* 





N i® ” 

. A % 

*•.,,* AP 


o ^ 

•' Ci, 

. ..’ Oj. '.-’• A" .. «>. 

a'' .*^’i'. y ''j(i^' « 

^ ^ * ¥^mk/^ • av ♦ 

o cy o 


^ ***^ 
, •* Ct^ A .*'...* .0 '%'" 

(P^ .‘J^*o ®0 ‘.^O C.° ®v? 

.« .'j^ltSk'. .'«^ia' •»; 





5^ '^VT, 


'>t 


b V 




O *'0 ,^• aO ^ 

>0^ ^ aO^ ^LltL^* '^> 


^ ' 

A^-^- * 

* <y % 

•' y 

.-ip .’‘JJ,’. *#> 

A ♦Jf//^^^^ - -5^, 




• A'' ’ 


O ^ ^ 

V t'JL •®'» ^ oiP ^*1 

^ \ 

o o 

« ' 


o o 


* "' ^«m:^ 

6^ .»"•. -J^ .•‘"o 

0 . ^ ^♦-.yr^^ f 7: 


• « 


K 

•7*. 






4 q 


v^-/ 

• f. V i» ♦ • ®.» a 9 Vlf irO rf/'*’ ^ 


-p 

% 

4 



: : 
O* /•% '. 

^ r % 


■s 


0 K • ^ ^ 

6 ♦ O 

L 



The Pacific Series 


Number III 

In Captivity in the Pacific 





I 



The two lads stood almost entranced by 
the beauty of the panorama ” 

Page 52 


In Captivity in the 
Pacific 

OR, IN THE LAND OF THE BREAD- 
FRUIT TREE 


Edwin J. Houston, Ph. D. (Princeton) 

Author of ‘‘Five Months on a Derelict,” ‘‘Wrecked on a Coral 
Island,” ‘‘ The Boy Electrician,” ‘‘ The North Pole Series,” 

‘‘The Yonng Prospector,” ‘‘The Wonder 
Books of Science,” etc. 



Philadelphia 

The Griffith & Rowland Press 

Boston Chicago Atlanta 

New York St. Louis Dallas 


C'5>- Sy 2 2- 





LIBRARY cf CONGRESS 
T HO Copies Received 

fEB 20 ia09 

A CopyriKiil tntry 

“Sa-i^-5, 

CLASS O. XXc. No. 
Cf ,Vy y. 


Copyright 1908 by 
A. J. ROWLAND, Secretary 


Published January, 1909 


PREFACE 


In Captivity in the Pacific/" the third volume of 
‘‘ The Pacific Series,” relates the adventures of two 
boys who were taken prisoners by savages and carried, 
in war canoes, to one of the Marquesas Islands. 

In this volume an account will be found, not only of 
the great breadfruit tree, which may justly be regarded 
as the most valuable vegetable product of the tropical 
islands of the South Pacific, but also of other curious 
and valuable products. 

In addition to the above there is given a description 
of the daily life of the Polynesians, together with a 
short account of their customs, religious habits, and 
occupations. 

It is the author’s hope that, carried along by the in- 
teresting account of the wonderful experiences of these 
boys, his readers may learn much of the life, alike vege- 
table, animal, and human, of this part of the world. 


Philadelphia, September, 1908. 


E. J H. 


-1 




CONTENTS 


Chapter Page 

I. Carried Away by a War Canoe 1 1 

II. Mahinee, Chief of the War Party, and King of 

THE Island of Captivity 23 

III. Completion of the Journey to the Island of 

Captivity 36 

IV. Mahinee’ s House in the Valley 46 

V. Kooloo and Marbonna 60 

VI. An Apparently New Kind of Tattooing 72 

VII. The Grove of Breadfruit Trees 83 

VIII. Exploration of the River Valley and Mountain 

Peak 97 

IX. A New Way of Starting a Fire no 

X. Kaloro Makes Trouble 120 

XI. Charley and Acharto 13 1 

XII. The Great Taboo. Charley Turns the Tables on 

Kaloro 145 

XIII. Everyday Life on the Island of Captivity. The 

Burning-glass 157 

XIV. Taken Captives by the Natives of the Western 

Valley 170 

XV. What WAS Done ON Harding Island . . . • ... 182 

XVI. Preparations for the Rescue of Charley and 

Harold 194 


CONTENTS 


XVII. A Long Voyage in an Open Boat 203 

XVIII. What Boat Number Twenty-three Picked up 

AT Sea 216 

XIX. Boat Number Twenty-three Reaches Wahea- 

toua’s Island 226 

XX. A Few Days on Waheatoua’s Island 237 

XXI. Boat Number Twenty-three Blown Away. 

Marooned on a Small Island 250 

XXII. A Chance Visitor to the Island Greatly Sur- 
prises THE Captain 264 

XXIII. Captives in the Western Valley . 276 

XXIV. Charley and Miconareo 289 

XXV. The Decision in the House of the Idols . . . 301 

XXVI. The Escape from the Western Valley . . . .318 

XXVII. Boat Number Twenty-three Reaches Mahi- 

nee’s Island 329 

XXVIII. The Fight at the Lava Cave 346 

XXIX. How the Doctor’s Medicine Chest was Em- 
ployed 362 

XXX. The Return to Harding Island 374 

XXXI. Conclusion 


Appendix 


409 


LIST OF FULL-PAGED ILLUSTRATIONS 


" The two lads stood almost entranced by the . 

beauty of the panorama ” {Frontispiece ) . . 52 

' They now began carefully to search the edge of 
the crater'' 112 

' He would be unable to keep up much longer " . . 220^ 

^ He held the piece of glass between the sun and 

the wood which . . . burst into dame " . . . . 315^ 

''A splendid place where we can make a stand 

against our enemies ' " 348 y 


CHARACTERS 


Captain Arthur Harding, of Harding Island. 

Charles Young Pleasanton, taken into captivity 
from Harding Island. 

Harold Arthur Harding, taken into captivity from 
Harding Island. 

Hiram Higgenbotham, left with Captain Harding on 
Harding Island. 

John Parker Jackson, left with Captain Harding on 
Harding Island. 

Captain William M. Parker, former commander of 
the Ketrel. 

Mr. and Mrs. Pleasanton, Charley’s parents. 

Mr. and Mrs. Harding, Harold’s parents. 

Doctor Charles B. Parsons, or Miconareo.” 

Mahinee, king of the Island of Captivity. 

Aharo, one of Mahinee’s chiefs. 

Kooloo, son of Mahinee. 

Marbonna, interpreter of Mahinee. 

Kaloro, chief tattooer. 

Acharto, chief priest. 

Waheatoua, a Polynesian rescued from drowning by 
boat Number Twenty-three. 

Kapiau, a Polynesian, friend of Waheatoua. 

Otoa, king of Waheatoua’s island. 

Arahu, king of the Western Valley. 


In Captivity in the Pacific 


CHAPTER I 

Carried Away by a War Canoe 

“ Look back toward the island, Harold, but don’t let 
the men see you are looking. Our friends are running 
along the beach toward the southeastern end of the 
island. Rompey is with them.” 

“ I see them, Charley,” was the reply; '' and though 
they are indistinct, I can recognize Uncle Arthur, 
Hiram, and Jack, as well as Rompey.” 

I’m glad they know in what direction we have 
been carried off,” continued the first speaker. Rom- 
pey has delivered our note all right.” 

The speakers were two young boys about fourteen 
years old. They were seated in a Polynesian war canoe 
that was being rapidly paddled toward the northeast, 
through a portion of the South Pacific nearly midway 
between South America and Australia. Besides the 
boys, the canoe contained twelve dark-skinned savages, 
who were nearly nude except for a small breech-cloth 
that covered their loins. 

There were men enough in the canoe to permit 
their paddling night and day. The twelve men, there- 
fore, made shifts of six paddlers every six hours, the 
chief not failing to take his turn at the work. On 

II 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


the whole, they were good-natured men, and shortly 
after leaving the island, began singing what was evi- 
dently a war song describing some of the things that 
had happened during the late expedition. As well as 
Charley could gather from their gestures, it appeared 
that this canoe was but one of others that had suddenly 
fallen on an unprotected island, had killed some of its 
inhabitants, and carried away others captives. On their 
return home, seeing Harding Island in the distance, 
the great chief, or the chief who commanded the expe- 
dition, had sent this boat to examine the island and, if 
possible, bring with them a quantity of food and water ; 
for, their supplies had been rendered insufficient by 
reason of the number of prisoners they had brought 
with them. 

The song the men were singing, though devoid of 
either true melody or harmony, appeared to give them 
no little pleasure. 

'' Harold,” said Charley, I wonder if it wouldn’t 
be a good idea to give the men one of our songs. What 
do you think ? ” 

“ It won’t hurt to try,” said Harold. ‘‘ What shall 
we sing ? ” 

‘'Let’s give them the rollicking boat song that so 
pleased the captain and Hiram. I mean the one in 
which the music tries to imitate the strokes of the 
oars.” 

Looking at the chief, and making signs intended 
to ask whether he would like to hear them sing, the 
boys gave them the boat song. It was a beautiful 
12 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


song. Savages as they were, they could appreciate the 
harmony produced by the clear soprano and the alto 
of the lads. But what was more to the point, they 
could understand that the music was intended to rep- 
resent the successive strokes of the paddles as they 
were dipped into and drawn out of the water; for the 
boys were clever enough to time the music with their 
motion. 

The savages were so much pleased with the singing, 
that when the song was completed they indicated that 
they wished it repeated, and this time they joined in 
the chorus, much to their satisfaction, if not altogether 
to the betterment of the singing. 

The chief now made signs to the boys to give them 
another song. This they did, selecting a song in which 
an attempt is made to imitate an echo. This being 
something the savages were better able to understand, 
appeared to please them even more than had the boat 
song. 

When the boys ceased singing the chief, leaning 
over, tapped them good-naturedly on the shoulders, 
and turning to the men said something clearly indica- 
ting that he was much pleased with his young captives. 

There was no doubt that the singing together with 
the general good nature of the boys, and their ap- 
parent freedom from anything resembling fear, had 
thoroughly won the good-will of the men. The chief 
was evidently delighted, and tried to make them under- 
stand that they would be treated kindly and need have 
no fear. 


13 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


Both boys carried silver watches. These naturally 
attracted considerable attention. Seeing this, Charley 
opened his watch and showed it to the chief, who was 
evidently asking him what it was. Charley then pre- 
tended that the watch was a species of fetish, pointed 
to the sky and then to the watch, pretending to look 
with great fear on it. He then pointed to his lips and, 
holding his watch to the ear of the chief, intimated to 
him that the watch spoke to him and told him things. 

The chief apparently understood that the watch was 
a fetish, and was afraid it might work him some 
damage; he therefore motioned to Charley to put it 
back in his pocket. He then said something to the 
men that evidently meant they were not to take the 
watches from the boys ; for, although before that time 
there had been some efforts to appropriate them when 
the chief was not looking, no attempt was made to do 
this afterward. 

The songs completed, the boys sat silently watching 
the vigorous strokes of the six paddlers for some little 
time when, looking toward the island, Charley thought 
he could see the three dim figures he believed he could 
still recognize as their friends standing together at the 
edge of the cliffs, pointing as he thought toward the 
distant boat. 

“ They can see us better than we can them,” re- 
marked Charley to his companion ; ‘‘ for the captain 
of course will have his powerful field-glasses with 
him.” 

“ Yes,” said Harold, ‘‘ and seeing the direction the 

14 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


boat has taken, will be able to know what direction to 
come in order to reach us.” 

The speakers were our old friends, Charles Young 
Pleasanton and Harold Arthur Harding, whose ex- 
citing adventures we have already described in the 
books called Five Months on a Derelict ” and 
“ Wrecked on a Coral Island.” It will be remembered, 
in the last-named book, that one day while the two boys 
were seated in the cabin of the coral-encrusted wreck of 
the brigantine, they had been surprised and taken 
prisoners by the men in the war canoe in which they 
were then seated. 

When first made captives, the arms of both boys had 
been bound back of them by means of strong ropes 
formed of the fibers of the cocoanut palm. Charley, 
who was by far quicker in planning than Harold, de- 
termined to try to win the confidence of their captors 
by pretending to look on the adventure as a joke, and 
readily persuaded Harold to do the same thing. See- 
ing that the chief was asking questions, he made signs 
with his eyes, that if his hands were untied he might 
be able to show the chief what he wished to know. The 
savage chief appearing to understand Charley readily, 
smiled and ordered his men to unbind the hands of both 
of the boys. He then made signs that he was looking 
for drinking-water, and wished to know where such 
could be found. Charley not only showed him where 
they could get water, but also where they could get 
ripe cocoanuts. He and Harold even offered to climb 
the trees and throw the nuts down to them. 

15 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


The savages spent several hours on the island, but 
did not wander far from the part on which they had 
landed. They were, therefore, unaware of the fact 
that the island was inhabited by any others than the 
boys they had captured, nor had the friends of the boys . 
any idea until afterward of the great misfortune that* 
had befallen them. 

Taking the first opportunity that presented itself, the 
boys had succeeded in sending a note, tied to the neck 
of their pet collie, Rompey, and had thus acquainted 
their friends as to their capture by men in a war canoe. 

The circumstances referred to in the beginning of 
this chapter occurred only a comparatively short time 
after the canoe had left the island with the two boys. 
In the meanwhile, Rompey had delivered the note to 
the companions of the boys who, accompanied by the 
dog, had gone in one of their boats to the extreme 
southeastern part of the island, only however to see 
in the dim distance the war canoe moving rapidly 
toward the northeast. With their field-glasses they 
could not only see the boat and the people in it, but 
could even see, as had been suggested in the note, 
that Charley had evidently determined to gain the 
confidence of his captors by pretending not to be 
afraid. 

In order to understand thoroughly who these peo- 
ple were, and their relation to the lads in the boat, it 
will be necessary to give a brief review of the two 
books already referred to ; i. e., Five Months on a 
Derelict ” and Wrecked on a Coral Island.’’ 

i6 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


In Five Months on a Derelict,” are given the ad- 
ventures of two men and three boys on an abandoned 
brig, or derelict, in the great Pacific Ocean. The 
men were Capt. Arthur Harding and Hiram Higgen- 
botham. The boys were the two already mentioned, 
and another slightly older lad named John Parker 
Jackson. With the exception of Charley, who had 
afterward been taken on the derelict, these people had 
left Liverpool on the full-rigged ship, the Ketrel, bound 
for Yokohama, Japan. While ofY the southwestern 
coast of Australia, the Ketrel had picked up, adrift 
at sea, an open boat, without oar-locks or oars, and 
containing only a full-bred collie dog, named Rompey. 
This dog had belonged to the boy Charley, who was 
afterward picked up by the people on the derelict in 
a nearly dying condition in another open boat con- 
taining, besides himself, the dead bodies of four men. 

Everything went well with the Ketrel until she 
reached the China Sea. Here she was completely 
wrecked by a powerful whirling storm, common in 
those waters, and known as the typhoon. All her crew 
were safely transferred to the ship’s boats, one of 
which, under the command of Harding, who was 
then her first lieutenant, or first mate, contained, be- 
sides the lieutenant, Hiram Higgenbotham, boatswain 
of the Ketrel, the two boys, Harold and Jack, and two 
of the ship’s crew. 

During a succession of storms that followed in the 
wake of the great typhoon their boat became separated 
from the other boats, and two of the crew were swept 

17 


B 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


overboard. The two remaining men, the captain and 
Hiram, were obliged, throughout five days of great 
suffering, almost continually to keep at the oars, and 
the two boys to keep at constant work in bailing the 
water out of the boat. On the night of the fifth day, 
when the storm had nearly blown itself out, while the 
boys were taking a brief rest in the bottom of the 
boat and the men were resting on their oars, they 
were startled by a sudden blow that nearly sunk their 
boat. It was a blow from a derelict brig that, owing to 
its cargo of cork and lumber, had long remained afloat. 
They found on the brig a good supply of fresh water, 
canned goods, and other food materials in fairly good 
condition. 

The derelict brig, despite its appearance, afforded 
them a safe refuge. Either because of the character 
of its cargo, or its water-tight compartments, it was 
floating fairly high in the water. A charthouse on 
deck and a cabin partly below the deck, after being 
thoroughly cleansed afforded them comfortable quar- 
ters. The groceries and other food products that 
formed a part of the cargo were in fairly good con- 
dition, and the water supply, stored in large sheet-iron 
tanks, was abundant in quantity. So too was a large 
supply of household goods that had been intended for 
the use of the mining settlements in Southern Africa. 

For five months they lived on that derelict brig. 
During this time they were carried by the ocean cur- 
rents and the winds to different parts of the great 
Pacific Ocean, and were thus able to see much of the 

i8 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


wonders of the deep. At the request of his compan- 
ions, Lieutenant Harding had taken command of the 
derelict brig, thus becoming its captain. As the brig 
was carried to different parts of the ocean by the waves 
and winds, they were able to get considerable informa- 
tion, and met with many interesting and often excit- 
ing adventures. 

Although apparently ready to sink at any moment, 
the derelict brig proved seaworthy, safely weather- 
ing many storms while they were on it. During one 
of these the brig was nearly run down by a huge ocean 
steamer that, as they learned from one of its passen- 
gers, Charley, a lad they had picked up in the open 
boat already referred to, was afterward completely 
wrecked. 

It curiously happened that Charley was the former 
master of Rompey, who instantly recognized him as 
he was taken aboard. Charley thus became one of 
the party on the derelict brig. A warm friendship 
sprang up between Charley and Harold, and it was 
agreed between them that Rompey was to belong 
equally to both. 

But at last the derelict brig was wrecked. One 
day, toward the end of a severe storm, the little crew 
of five people, saw breakers ahead, and the brig was 
shortly afterward wrecked on a coral reef that was high 
and dry at low tide, but covered with dangerous break- 
ers at high tide. As the brig was about to be dashed 
on the reef, they saw, fully a mile ahead of them, the 
dazzling white sands of the beach of a coral island, 

19 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


immediately behind which the green plumes of cocoa- 
nut trees were visible. 

While it had been a pleasant experience to be car- 
ried over the Pacific from place to place, almost as if 
they were on a pleasure yacht, yet there was this dis- 
advantage: They were unable to guide or steer the 
vessel ; for not only had the brig’s rudder and rudder- 
post been swept away, but even a jury mast and jury 
rudder that they had set up as make-shifts had been 
lost during the first severe storm which struck the brig 
after they had been constructed. 

When, therefore, they saw the brig drifting toward 
the breakers, being unable to change its direction, just 
as it was about being dashed on the reef, they dove 
from the deck into the deep water on the side farthest 
from the sunken rocks, and struck out for the distant 
island. With the exception of Hiram who, like many 
sailors, was better acquainted with the means of pass- 
ing over the surface of water in a vessel or boat, 
than of making his way through it by swimming, they 
were all good swimmers. Rompey, together with 
Satan, a pet poll-parrot they had found on the dere- 
lict brig, accompanied them. 

Finally reaching the distant coral island, as related 
in the second volume, Wrecked on a Coral Island,” 
they had many strange and exciting adventures, but on 
the whole passed a happy life. 

But the brig had not been completely wrecked by 
striking the reef. One half, firmly wedged in between 
projections in the rocks, had remained in a compara- 
20 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


tively unbroken condition. By means of a rude raft, 
fashioned from the floating timbers of the rest of the 
wreck, they were able to reach the remaining half of 
the derelict brig. In this way they transferred to the 
island a large portion of her valuable cargo, both in 
the way of canned and dried goods, as well as in 
various household furniture, mattresses, hardware, etc. 

A part of the brig’s cargo consisted of portable 
wooden houses, the timbers and joists for the frames, 
sides, floors, doors, windows, stairs, etc., of which, 
had been shipped separately. These safely reached the 
shore, so that they were soon able to erect a comfort- 
able dwelling-house. 

They named the coral island Harding Island, and 
lived on it in comfort for more than half a year. 

The lagoon, or body of water surrounded by the 
coral reef of Harding Island, contained four smaller 
islands. On one of these they discovered a large clear- 
ing that had originally been cultivated as a kitchen 
garden by a shipwrecked sailor, named John Maddox, 
who had been cast on the island in 1733. Maddox had 
lived alone on the island for about fifty years, and at 
last had died without any one to bury him. They found 
his skeleton in a wooden hut, with its bony fingers 
grasping a box containing a description of a valuable 
treasure, in the shape of pearls, he had collected during 
his lifetime. By means of this description they after- 
ward recovered the pearls from the cabin of a wrecked 
brigantine that was found lying in comparatively shal- 
low waters off the eastern coast of the island. 


21 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


It will not be necessary to describe, except very 
briefly, the great times the boys had on Harding 
Island in a wonderful swimming-pool provided with 
a natural sliding-board formed of polished marble. 
When wet, this great inclined plane permitted them to 
slide down into the magnificent waters of the lagoon. 
Nor will we describe either the great earthquake that 
broke down a part of the high limestone cliffs that had 
been honeycombed by the water, thus establishing, prob- 
ably for the first time for many hundreds of thousands 
of years, a passageway for vessels between the lagoon 
and the ocean; or the sudden storm that carried the 
captain and Hiram out to sea and wrecked them on a 
tiny islet at a time when Jack was confined to his bed 
by a sprained ankle, nor how Harold and Charley, 
after several days’ journey in their boat, rescued the 
captain and Hiram, and brought them back in triumph 
to Harding Island. 

Such was the condition of affairs when our story 
opens. The earthquake and a high wave following it 
had, as already mentioned, washed the wreck of the 
brigantine on dry land. It was here the boys had been 
captured by the twelve savages in the war canoe and 
carried away captives toward the northeast. 


22 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


CHAPTER II 

Mahinee^ Chief of the War Party and King of 
THE Island of Captivity 

The vigorous strokes of the six paddlers continued to 
carry the war canoe rapidly toward the northeast, so 
that the faint streaks on the southwest horizon, that 
represented Harding Island, became dimmer and dim- 
mer, and finally completely disappeared. 

It required no little determination on the part of 
the boys, who, it must be remembered, were quite 
young, to refrain from completely breaking down. 
They were leaving the island on which they had spent 
many happy days. They had been torn from friends to 
whom they were bound by affection almost as strong as 
if they were a single family connected by ties of blood. 

It is no wonder that a sad expression came into the 
face of the boy addressed by his companion as Harold. 
While they felt sure their companions would make an 
endeavor to rescue them, yet they noted the speed with 
which the canoe was moving, a speed that could be 
kept up day and night, so that the chances of their 
friends ever being able to overtake them seemed to 
grow more and more remote. 

When the other boy, the one called Charley, saw the 
sad expression increasing in the face of his companion, 
he said in a low tone : 


23 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


‘‘ Try not to look so blue, Harold. If the men notice 
it they will not continue to be friendly. There is no 
possibility of our escaping now. It may be different 
afterward. We must first win the confidence of our 
captors. So try to smile and look cheerful as I do,” 
and saying this he put on an assumed look of indiffer- 
ence and cheerfulness, that was so poorly done that 
Harold was unable to refrain from smiling. 

You’re right, Charley,” was the reply, “ I’ll try 
my best to smile and look cheerful.” A bright smile 
then broke out over the lad’s face, from which it was 
evident that his face was more accustomed to assuming 
a smiling expression than the sad one to which Charley 
had objected. 

This effort was so successful that it not only satis- 
fied Charley, but was also noticed by the men in the 
boat, who appeared greatly pleased by it. 

“ That’s much better,” said Charley. “ Let’s try to 
keep up at least the appearance of happiness.” 

Everything had taken place so quickly that it hardly 
seemed possible so great a calamity had befallen them. 
They wondered, every now and then, whether they 
would not suddenly awake and find it only a horrid 
dream. But na, there they were in a frail canoe, far 
out on the great body of water, with twelve savage 
men as their captors. Where were they being taken ? 
Could they hope ever to see their friends again ? These 
were the questions that repeatedly came into their 
minds. But it would never do to permit the savages 
to see they were mourning, so again they made a deter- 
24 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


minded effort and put off from their faces all appear- 
ances of sorrow. 

Harold/’ said Charley in a low tone, “ I know it 
is sad to be carried off in this manner, but don’t let 
us play cry-baby. Our friends on the island know we 
have been carried off. They also know the direction 
taken by the canoe. They will certainly follow us. 
Of that I am sure you can have no doubt.' Have you ? ” 
he said, wishing to force Harold to speak. 

“ I have no doubt whatever, Charley,” was the re- 
ply. “ I am sure Uncle Arthur, Jack, and Hiram will 
load up one of the boats with food and water and will 
come after us. And they’ll bring Rompey with them, 
and he will help find us. But I don’t see how they can 
find us, do you, Charley? ” he inquired. 

No, I do not,” said Charley. It will be very 
difficult to know at what island to stop. It will be 
difficult to find us even if they reach the right island; 
although, in this case, Rompey will be of great help. 
But you know the kind of man the captain is. I am 
sure he will manage somehow or other to find us and, 
what is more, to take us away from these men and 
return with us to Harding Island.” 

While talking, the boys had been sitting in the stern 
of the boat and had turned their heads around so as to 
see the island. Thinking it would be better to face 
their captors, Charley turned his head in the oppo- 
site direction and saw four other war canoes ahead 
of them. Three of them were of the same size as the 
one in which they were seated, and contained the same 

25 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


number of men. The other was twice as large, and 
was manned by a crew of twenty-four men. 

Look, Harold,” said Charley in a loud tone. 
“ There are four other war canoes.” 

“ I see them, Charley,” said Harold. I wonder 
whether they are friends or enemies of these men?” 
he inquired. 

‘‘ I think they belong to the same party,” said 
Charley. “ The canoes appear to be of the same build 
and, as far as I can see, the men have the same kind of 
head ornaments, breech-cloths, and paddles. I’ll ask 
the chief,” he continued, turning to that individual and 
looking him straight in the face, thus indicating that 
he wished to ask a question, he pointed to the distant 
boats. He then made signs, first of fighting with them 
and fearing their presence, and then of being pleased 
to meet them. When he had completed these signs he 
stopped a moment, and again raising his eyebrows, 
clearly asked the chief which. 

These signs were clearly understood not only by 
the chief but by the other men in the boat, who set up 
a loud laughter, and calling out the word “ tayos.” 

‘‘ I guess, Charley,” said Harold, the word ' tayos ’ 
means friends.” And then as if to test it, Charley 
pointed to Harold and to himself and then to the men, 
said : 

Tayos?” 

The chief was much pleased to think that Charley 
was trying to speak his language, and he cried out : 

Aa, Aa,” which Charley understood to mean yes, 
26 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


yes.” And then, pointing successively to Charley and 
Harold called out: Tayos.” 

The chief seems to like my talking to him, Har- 
old,” said Charley. ‘‘ I think I’ll keep it up,” so point- 
ing to himself he said: Charley.” 

The chief instantly understood and endeavored to re- 
peat the word, but the nearest he could come to it was 
Charleyo, Charleyoo, and several similar sounds. 

“ Charley,” repeated the lad. 

The chief replied, and at last settled down on the 
word Charleyo, by which name Charley was known 
during his continuance on the Island of Captivity. 
This point being settled, the chief, pointing to Harold, 
made signs to Charley that he wished to know his name 
also. 

“ Harold,” replied Charley. 

“ Haraldeo, Haraldo, Harealdo,” replied the chief, 
and finally settled on the word Harealdo, by which 
name Harold was afterward known. 

“ You’ll have to let it go at that, Harold. I am 
Charleyo and you are Harealdo. And now,” he con- 
tinued, I’m going to ask him to give us his name.” 
So again looking at the chief he pointed to him, and 
again raised his eyebrows, as if saying : What is; 
your name ? ” 

The chief again laughing, said : 

“ Aharo.” 

Charley then greatly delighted the chief by repeat- 
ing his name, Aharo.” 

There was nothing very astonishing in what Charley 
27 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


had done. Almost any sensible person, especially of 
the white race, could have done as much, and would 
not have thought that what had been done was at all 
wonderful, but to the savage Aharo and the other dark- 
skinned men in the boat it seemed very wonderful. 
They were pleased with what they thought was the 
astonishing manner in which the white lad was learn- 
ing to speak their language. The shook their heads 
as if again saying, “ yes, yes,” and again Charley heard 
the sounds, “ Aa, Aa.” And then the men commenced 
talking rapidly with each other, and for some time, and 
although Charley could not understand what was said, 
yet he did occasionally hear the words, ‘‘ tayos, mi- 
conarie.” 

“ Harold,” he said, turning to his friend, ‘‘ I’m go- 
ing to try to talk to them.” And turning to the chief, 
he said : “ Aharo tayos Charleyo ? ” Meaning, '' Is 
Aharo Charley’s friend? ” 

That Charley should be able to speak in succession 
three words of their language, so that they could un- 
derstand, was to these men a great marvel. They 
shouted with delight, repeating the ‘‘ Aa, Aa,” and add- 
ing: “Charleyo tayos Aharo,” which Charley under- 
stood to mean that Charley was Aharo’s friend. 

“ This seems to go pretty well, Harold,” said 
Charley; “ I’ll keep on talking.” So pointing to Har- 
old, Charley again said to the chief: “Aharo tayos 
Harealdo ? ” And again the men replied : “ Aa, Aa,” 
and added, “ Harealdo tayos Aharo.” 

Aharo then began a long conversation with Charley, 
28 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


of which, of course, Charley could understand little or 
nothing, but by means of many signs he indicated that 
they would soon join the other canoes, especially the 
largest of these canoes. That the man who com- 
manded the large canoe was a much bigger man than 
Aharo. That he especially wished the boys to gain this 
man's good-will. He kept on this way fully three 
minutes, and seemed so anxious that Charley turning 
to Harold said : 

I think he means we are going to see the great 
chief, and that it is very important he shall like us. 
That our safety depends on this.” 

‘‘ Suppose we sing for the great chief that rollicking 
boat song they all seemed to like so much,” suggested 
Harold. 

“ I will ask Aharo if he would like this,” said 
Charley. 

Charley had no difficulty in doing this by means of 
signs. Aharo was greatly pleased with the suggestion, 
and said : “ Aa, Aa.” 

The boys, therefore, began the boat song in which 
the chorus makes a clever imitation of the paddles 
striking the water as the boat is urged along. It was 
very beautiful indeed. So much was it so that the dis- 
tant boats, at a motion from the chief in the large 
canoe, stopped and waited until the boys’ boat came 
alongside of them. Aharo, who was evidently much 
pleased at the effect produced on the great chief by 
the beautiful song, motioned to the boys to sing 
another verse. This was done, when, as the chorus 
29 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


was reached, not only the men in Aharo’s boat but in 
the other boats made efiForts to join in it. 

When the voices died away, Aharo making an 
obeisance to the great chief, said something to him, and 
pointing successively to Charley and Harold, employed 
the words, Charleyo and Harealdo several times. He 
then rapidly recited the story of their capture on the 
island, the manner in which the boys had shown them 
where to get fresh water, had gathered cocoanuts for 
them, and other things that had taken place during 
their journey in the boat. It was evident too, from 
watching Aharo’s face, that he was relating to the chief 
the fact that although carried away from the island, 
neither of the boys showed any fear, but acted as 
though it was a great piece of fun. 

The great chief listened attentively and appeared 
greatly interested in what he heard. When Aharo 
told him of the manner in which Charley had requested 
him to untie his hands he appeared greatly tickled, and 
on several occasions repeated in a low tone something 
about Kooloo, Charleyo, and Harealdo. At last he 
said something to Aharo, who motioned to the two 
boys that they should get into the canoe of the great 
chief, pointing to the chief, saying : 

Mahinee,’' and then bowing his head as if to indi- 
cate to the boys that it was a great chief they were 
going to visit. 

‘‘ Come on, Harold,” said Charley, ‘‘ let's try to 
make as good an impression on these people as we 
can.” So getting up promptly the boys stepped confi- 

30 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


dently into the boat of the great chief. Going toward 
him they made a slight obeisance as indicating that 
they recognized his authority, when Charley turning to 
the chief said, to his great delight and astonishment as 
well as that of the men in the canoe with him : 

“ Mahinee tayos Charleyo ? Mahinee tayos Har- 
ealdo ? ” using an inflection in his voice as if he was 
asking the question. Astonishment as well as pleasure 
appeared on the face of the chief who nodded his 
head, repeating the words, ‘‘ Aa, Aa,’’ and then mo- 
tioning the boys to sit down near him. Again the 
chief repeated the word Kooloo, joined with the names 
of Charleyo and Harealdo, and then appeared to be 
asking the opinion of the chief man in each of the other 
four boats. The opinion of these men appeared to 
agree with that of the great chief, and all had some- 
thing to say that was sufficiently long to keep them 
talking for at least five minutes. 

Mahinee, who, as Charley afterward discovered, was 
not only the chief of all the war canoes, but was also 
the king of a portion of the island to which they were 
being carried captives, an island which for want of a 
better name, they agreed to call the “ Island of Cap- 
tivity.’^ 

Mahinee was a magnificent specimen of a man. He 
was apparently about thirty-five years of age, and was 
fully six feet six inches in height. He possessed 
a splendid muscular development, which could be 
readily seen, since, like all the other savages in the 
boat, his dress was quite scanty, and although some- 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


what fuller than that of the other men, consisted mainly 
of a girdle and breech-cloth that passing around the 
hips extended downward and covered the loins. This 
material consisted of a cloth formed of woven vege- 
table fibers of different colors. 

Mahinee held in his right hand a richly carved 
paddle spear. Both arms and ankles were ornamented 
with bracelets and anklets of plaited human hair. 

But what was most striking about the king was the 
wonderful tattooing that not only covered nearly all 
parts of his body, but especially ornamented his face. 

It is difficult, without actual observation, to under- 
stand the horrible effects that are capable of being pro- 
duced by variously arranged groupings of tattooings 
extending in different directions over the human face. 
In the case of Mahinee these tattooings consisted of 
two broad stripes of color, extending from the crown of 
his head obliquely to the two eyes, outside the lids, and 
to some distance below each ear. Then, as if to make 
the appearance still more awful, an additional strip of 
tattooing extended in the form of a straight line along 
each side of the lips until it reached the other two lines, 
thus marking the face with a readily distinguishable 
triangle. 

Notwithstanding the horrible appearance thus pro- 
duced in Mahinee’s face, it was, in the main, when the 
chief was not angry, a kindly face. Mahinee had evi- 
dently been favorably impressed with the tw^o boys, 
especially with Charley, and gave the lad occasionally 
a look as if to say that neither he nor his companion 

32 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


need have any fear while with them; that they would 
be treated kindly. 

Both Charley and Harold were in the habit of 
carrying in their pockets mouth-organs of a better type 
of manufacture than the common organ. The boys 
were accustomed to playing together on these instru- 
ments and, since they were tuned in different keys, they 
produced pleasing harmonious effects. 

“ Harold,” said Charley, “ suppose we see if Mahi- 
nee would like to hear us play a tune on our mouth- 
organs.” So taking the instruments out of their 
pockets, Charley inquired by means of signs, whether 
Mahinee would wish to hear them play. 

The chief pleasantly said, ‘‘ Aa, Aa,” when the boys 
began playing an air suitable for a lively dance. 

If there is anything that especially pleases the sav- 
ages of the South Sea Islands it is music, especially 
dance music. The two instruments played the tune in 
such excellent time that, although the boat was far 
from being suited for a dance, yet the men began to 
move their bodies to and fro, and especially their arms 
so as to keep time. 

Mahinee, pleased at this new evidence of the won- 
derful things the white boys could do, turning to 
Charley when the music was finished, said : 

“ Mahinee Charleyo tayos mortakee,” meaning that 
Mahinee was Charley’s good friend, to which Charley 
replied : Aa, Aa,” and then inquired : Mahinee 

Harealdo tayos mortakee ? ” as if asking whether Har- 
old was not also Mahinee’s good friend. 

33 


c 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


Not only the chief but all the men in the boat burst 
out into laughter at this question of Charley’s, when 
Mahinee replied, “ Aa, Aa.” 

The weather continued good, the stars came out, and 
the full moon rose in the skies, but all that night and 
for several days and nights the canoes kept moving 
through the waters. Every one in the crew, even 
Mahinee, took part in paddling, each set of men con- 
tinuing working for four hours when they were re- 
lieved by the others. 

Several hours after the setting of the sun on their 
first night from the island, Mahinee turning good- 
naturedly to the two boys, and pointing to a mat that 
had been spread on the bottom of the canoe, motioned 
them to lie down and go to sleep. They did this, and 
were soon in a sound, refreshing slumber. 

Awaking the next morning Charley saw that Mahi- 
nee was examining the watches that he and Harold 
wore. Taking the watch out of his pocket he placed it 
to his ear and listened as if it were telling him some- 
thing, and at the same time he pretended that he stood 
in great awe of its magic properties. Like all savage 
races, especially those who inhabit the islands of the 
South Seas, Mahinee was superstitious. He therefore 
motioned Charley to put the watch back in his pocket, 
and said something to his men which was apparently of 
an import similar to what Aharo had said to his men 
when Charley had in a similar manner exhibited the 
watch to him. 

But the pocket compass that Charley carried with 

34 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


him especially attracted the attention of Mahinee. 
Wishing to get as accurately as possible the general 
direction of Harding Island, Charley frequently looked 
at his compass needle when he thought that none of the 
men were observing him. This action, however, did 
not escape the sharp glances of Mahinee. Motioning 
to Charley that he wished to examine the compass, 
Charley explained to him, as well as he was able by 
means of signs, that it was a spirit that was able to tell 
him the direction in which they were traveling. This 
greatly astonished Mahinee, who began to regard 
Charley as a very unusual specimen of a boy, in which 
conclusion he was by no means mistaken. But what 
was more to the point, as far as the future of the two 
boys was concerned, he began to believe that Charley 
might be dangerous to any who gained his ill-will. He 
therefore concluded to treat both boys kindly, not only 
because he was getting to like them, but also because 
he thought it might be to his advantage to do so. 


35 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


CHAPTER III 

Completion of the Journey to the Island 
OF Captivity 

The war canoes continued moving rapidly toward the 
northeast for nearly three days and nights. During 
this time, Mahinee not only had the two boys remain 
in his canoe, but also kept them near him. It was 
evident they were rapidly becoming great favorites 
with the king as well as with all the men in the royal 
canoe. 

The warriors in all the canoes were well-developed 
men, but the twenty-four men in the king’s canoe were 
evidently picked men. Not one of them was under 
six feet in height, while, as already mentioned, the 
king’s height was fully six and a half feet. Like the 
king all the men were highly tattooed with figures that 
nearly covered all portions of their bodies, but it was 
on the face that these markings were especially placed. 
Nor, indeed, were they entirely absent from the head, 
from portions of which, as well as of the cheeks, the 
hair had been carefully removed in order to permit 
the markings on these parts to be more readily seen. 

While perhaps to a great extent, the markings on 
the bodies were intended to take the place of orna- 
ments, and thus increase the personal beauty, those on 

36 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


the face were apparently employed solely for the pur- 
pose of making the face as cruel and appalling as 
possible. In this way they believed they could best 
strike fear into the hearts of their enemies. A common 
form of the markings on the face consisted of heavy 
curved lines extending from the base of the nostrils 
downward toward the mouth. These lines gave an 
especially savage, ferocious appearance to the face. My 
readers can convince themselves of this fact by making 
two rough drawings of faces exactly like each other, 
but giving to the mouth a downward curve on one face, 
but an upward curve on the other. The first face will 
take on an angry, ferocious appearance, and the sec- 
ond face a smiling, pleasant look. It is needless to 
state that none of the warriors were adorned with the 
upward curve, since this would prevent the purpose for 
which the facial tattooings were employed. 

In some cases the lines of tattooing consisted of a 
number of circles drawn around each eye as a center, 
the circles being repeated until they covered the entire 
half of the face above the mouth. This method of 
tattooing was apparently quite popular, since it gave 
the face a peculiarly ferocious appearance. 

Another method, which was also fairly common, 
consisted of a number of straight radial lines extend- 
ing outward from the eyes as centers in all directions 
above the forehead, on the cheek, and toward the nose. 

In some cases, the lines of tattooing had been so ar- 
ranged around the mouth as to give it the appearance 
of extending across the entire face; and, since some 
37 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


of the tattooings represented huge teeth, these also 
produced particularly horrible effects and were there- 
fore greatly esteemed. 

But on none of the faces except Mahinee’s did 
they see the triangle before referred to. This was evi- 
dently employed only on the king and members of the 
royal family, and as Charley afterward learned, was 
under the power of the mysterious and dreaded taboo 
to which frequent reference will be made in this book. 

Now that the boys had an opportunity of examining 
the savages closely, they discovered that the color of 
their skin, which they at first believed was black, was 
of a brownish tinge. It was the tattooing, requiring 
as it did the piercing or perforating of the skin, that 
had caused it to appear to be a black color. As the boys 
afterward discovered, especially in the cases of the 
women and the young children, who were tattooed to a 
much smaller extent than the men, the natural color of 
the skin was a light brown. 

Most of the men kept the hair of the head closely 
cut, except a bunch or tuft on each side of the center of 
the crown. Here they generally permitted the hair to 
grow, so as to give it an appearance not unlike that of 
two horns springing out of the top of their head, mid- 
way between the crown and each ear. Although nearly 
all the men had beards, yet they generally kept them 
closely cropped, since otherwise they would have lost 
the peculiar beauty that each firmly believed was im- 
parted to the face by the tattooings covering the cheeks. 
Some of the men, however, wore long beards under the 

38 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


chin. These, which were generally plaited, were long 
enough to extend considerably down each side. 

As already stated, the men, like Mahinee, were 
nearly naked, the breech-cloth being practically the 
only article of dress. This consisted of a short strip 
or girdle of cloth worn around the hips and then 
passed in between the legs. None of the men, how- 
ever, wore bracelets of human hair around their arms 
and legs as did Mahinee, although most of them 
wore necklaces consisting of shells or of the teeth of 
sharks. Although their ears were perforated, yet none 
of them wore earrings. As the boys afterward learned, 
these ornaments were seldom worn while on the war- 
path, but were reserved for state occasions only. 

Their ordinary canoes were from sixteen to twenty 
feet in length and about fifteen inches in width, while 
the king’s canoe was larger. Both bow and stern con- 
sisted of solid wood. The bow approached the water 
horizontally, and was carved so as crudely to repre- 
sent a human face. The stern rose sharply upward 
in an irregularly curved shape. What especially in- 
terested the boys was a variety of light lateen sail, 
made of matting, that was raised during a favorable 
wind in order to increase the speed. In no case, how- 
ever, did the men cease to keep their paddles in motion 
during the day or night, whether the sail was raised 
or not. 

It may interest my readers to know that a lateen sail 
is triangular in shape and is supported on a short mast 
by means of a long tapering yard. The yard is slung 
39 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


by halyards at a point below its center, the lower and 
heavier end being made fast so that the yard forms an 
angle of about 45° with the mast, the sheet being se- 
cured at the after lower corner. 

The plan adopted by Charley and thoroughly carried 
out by Harold, of taking the matter of their captivity 
continued most fortunate. By its 
means the boys were already great 
favorites with all in the canoe, es- 
pecially with the king himself. Nor 
is this astonishing, for both boys 
were unusually attractive-looking 
youngsters, and had a way of look- 
ing into the faces of the men with a 
smile in their eyes that made them 
pleasant companions. This was es- 
pecially the case with Charley, for 
when he set about being agreeable 
he never failed to make a success of 
it, and this was especially the case when he had come 
to the conclusion that the safety of Harold and himself 
depended on how he did this. 

During the second day of their captivity, Aharo, 
who had been summoned by Mahinee to bring his 
canoe alongside the royal canoe for the purpose of 
asking some of the many things he wished to know 
concerning the island from which he had taken the 
boys, inquired whether there were any signs of other 
people on the island and other questions of a similar 
character. Aharo, who had seen nothing of their 
40 


as a huge joke. 



The Lateen Rig 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


friends on the island, assured him that the boys were 
the only people he saw ; that the boys had a dog with 
them that, however, ran away and deserted them. 

Then Aharo told the king of the pictures Charley 
had made of his canoe. Now Charley, who possessed 
remarkable talents for sketching, was in the habit of 
carrying in one of his pockets, a number of pads of 
drawing-paper and lead pencils. Indeed, he had been 
sketching in the cabin of the coral-encrusted brigantine 
when the war canoe approached, and on leaving the 
cabin had stuffed a number of these pads and pencils 
in his pockets. He was now, therefore, well supplied 
with the drawing materials. 

Aharo had kept a sketch Charley had made of his 
canoe when he had been taken captive, which he now 
showed to Mahinee. 

As the king examined the sketch the men near him 
crowded around expressing their astonishment that a 
mere boy or tammaree ” should be able to do so won- 
derful a thing, as to make a boat show out on a piece 
of white stuff. Mahinee then motioned to Charley 
that he would like to see him make a sketch. 

Charley at once took some sketch paper and a lead 
pencil from his pocket and began rapidly making an 
excellent sketch of the great war canoe with the men in 
their places. He then handed the sketch to Mahinee, 
who expressed both surprise and satisfaction at re- 
ceiving it. Charley then took out another piece of 
paper and indicated by signs that he wished to make 
a drawing of the chief himself, inquiring whether he 

41 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


would prefer to be represented sitting down or stand- 
ing up. The king, who understood Charley’s signs, 
immediately stood up in a graceful position, holding 
his spear in his right hand as if in the act of striking. 
Charley rapidly made an excellent sketch, and handed 
it to the king, saying : 

Mahinee tayos Charleyo, Harealdo.” 

The chief laughed, shaking his head, and replied : 

“ Aa, Aa.” 

Charley’s ability to make objects stand out on paper 
was regarded by the king as a piece of magic. He 
again examined the drawing, and turning to Aharo 
began a long conversation in which Charley could hear 
frequent repetition of the word Kooloo. Wishing to 
know who Kooloo was, as soon as the king had finished 
speaking, he repeated the word Kooloo as if he wished 
to know who he was. 

The king appeared much pleased with this question 
and made signs that Charley had no difficulty in un- 
derstanding that Kooloo was a boy like himself, that 
he was his son; that he wished Charley and Harold 
to know him. So that when Charley again made use of 
his limited knowledge of the language, and said : 

Kooloo Charleyo tayos. Kooloo Harealdo tayos.” 

The king replied: 

“ Aa, Aa.” 

At last they could see on the northeast horizon 
several dim streaks that most probably were some of 
the islands to which they were to be taken. As well as 
they could understand, they were correct in this belief. 

42 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


This pleased the two boys, because they felt that the 
sooner the canoe stopped the better would be the 
chances of their friends rescuing them. 

There was no little excitement among the different 
boats as they drew nearer the distant islands. The 
men at the paddles increased their strokes slightly, as 
if they wished to shorten as much as possible the time 
required for reaching their homes. The islands grew 
more and more distinct as the canoes drew near them. 
The warriors now began practising a song of triumph. 
They had been on a long expedition a great, great dis- 
tance from home. They had fallen suddenly on some 
unprotected island and, after slaughtering many of its 
people, were bearing back in triumph a number of the 
captured people. These captives were huddled to- 
gether in a single boat with their hands bound back of 
them by ropes made of cocoanut fibers. 

The canoes at last drew near enough to enable the 
islands to be seen with fair distinctness. On all of 
them there were high mountains. 

The boat passed near one of these islands that 
was much smaller than the others. It made no attempt 
to land, but gave the boys an opportunity of making a 
fairly close examination of its general formation. 

“ The islands are very different from Harding 
Island, Harold, aren’t they?” said Charley. “The 
old islands have not yet sunk out of sight. See how 
suddenly they rise from the waters. It looks as if there 
was very deep water off the shore. I wonder if the 
sinking here takes place so rapidly that coral reefs 
43 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


cannot be formed; for you can see there is very little 
or no coral off those shores.” 

If Uncle Arthur was only here,” said Harold with 
a sigh, “ he would tell us all about it.” 

“ Then,” said Charley, who saw that Harold was 
again beginning to feel sad, “ we’ll ask the captain 
about it as soon as he comes for us.” 

“ Do you think he will ever come, Charley ? ” in- 
quired Harold. 

Of course I do,” was the reply. I am certain 
he will come. At least if he can,” he added. “ Of 
course, it will be difficult for him to find his way 
through all this distance ; but he will, somehow or other. 
If these savages can get here, a man like the captain 
certainly can. Then we’ll manage somehow to leave 
signs that he will recognize we are on the island, so he 
will look for us. I say, Harold,” he continued, “ didn’t 
we have a great time on Harding Island, on the la- 
goons in the boats, and in the swimming-pool ? Then 
you remember the day we got lost in the grottoes on the 
Parker Cliffs.” So the two boys kept talking together 
in a low tone while the savages were practising a great 
war song which they intended to sing on their return, 
and in which they related the wonderful and brave 
things they had done in the wars in which they had 
been engaged. 

“ I wonder if any of these mountains are volcanic, 
Charley,” said Harold. 

'' I don’t know,” was the reply, but I’ll try to ask 
Mahinee,” so taking a sheet of drawing-paper from his 
44 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


pocket, he began sketching one of the nearer mountain- 
peaks. 

As soon as the men had finished singing, Mahinee 
indicated to Charley by signs that he wanted to see 
what he was drawing. 

Taking the drawing to the king, Charley added a 
few lines to it, indicating a volcanic eruption with a 
stream of lava flowing down the side of the mountain 
and stones thrown up into the air. 

Mahinee apparently did not understand Charley’s 
question, for he shook his head, as if to say that the 
mountain at which they were looking never assumed 
the appearance that Charley had given to it by the 
added touches. 

A few hours after sunrise the canoes reached the 
shores of a large island that was mountainous in its 
character. Here they were met by a crowd of savages 
who had assembled to welcome them. 

What shall we call this island, Harold? ” inquired 
Charley. 

I guess we will call it the Island of Captivity as 
already agreed,” replied Harold. 

All right,” said Charley. “ If we wish we can give 
it some other name when we learn what the people here 
call it.” 


45 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


CHAPTER IV 

Mahinee's House in the Valley 

The Island of Captivity was mountainous like the 
islands they saw in the distance. Like the smaller 
island too, near which they had passed, it was entirely 
different from Harding Island; for, while the former 
was wholly of coral formation, this island showed little 
or no signs of coral reefs. Indeed, with the excep- 
tion of a few small fringing reefs near portions of the 
shore, the Island of Captivity was entirely of ordinary 
geological formation. The mountains, they could see 
towering above the coast as they were approaching the 
island, terminated in abrupt precipices facing the ocean, 
that, when they landed, completely shut off the view of 
the mountain summits. Indeed, their lower slopes ter- 
minated so abruptly that the part of the land constitu- 
ting tjie shore proper was so limited that only a narrow 
strip of beach was provided for the savages who were 
waiting to meet their friends. 

Charley,” said Harold, who had been closely 
examining the shore, I wonder why there is so little 
coral rock to be seen.” 

“ I am not certain, Harold,” was the reply, ‘‘ but I 
think it is because the water is too deep. You remem- 
ber the coral polyp from which reefs are mainly formed 
46 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


cannot live in deep water. However, when the captain 
comes we’ll ask him.” 

So you still expect the captain ? ” remarked 
Harold. 

‘‘ Of course I expect him, Harold,” was the reply. 
“ I have already said so. You don’t know your uncle 
if you think he will leave off trying to reach us until he 
succeeds.” 

‘‘ I know he’ll try, all right,” was the reply, but 
what bothers me is to see how he can find the island on 
which we are about landing. Do you see how he can 
do this ? ” 

No, Harold,” was the reply, ‘‘ I don’t; but I know 
what I’d do if I was looking for you or for him.” 

“What’s that?” Harold inquired. 

“ I’d visit one island after another until I found the 
right one.” 

Charley’s reply appeared to give Harold no little 
satisfaction. “ You’re right there,” was the reply, 
“ and that is just what I think Uncle Arthur will do.” 

“ But at the same time, Harold,” continued Charley, 
“ we must do what we can to leave some sign on this 
island that will let the captain know we are here.” 

“ But how ? ” persisted Harold. 

“ I do not know. I’m sure,” was the reply. “ But if 
we think hard and keep on thinking, I would not be 
surprised if some plan would suggest itself that would 
be fairly apt to succeed.” 

“ All right, then,” said Harold, “ I’ll keep on think- 
ing. Indeed, Charley,” he continued, “ I think if I 
47 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


can get a chance, when no one is looking, I will stuff 
my pocket handkerchief in some crevice in the rocks. 
It might be passed over by the natives, but not by our 
friends, especially by Rompey, though I imagine that 
any scent in it would disappear long before our friends 
could possibly reach the island even if they knew ex- 
actly where to come.” 

“ I’m afraid you’re right, Harold,” replied Charley. 
“ Still, if you get a chance, try it. Even if Rompey fails 
to find it, our friends may. Then I’ll try to leave some 
marks on the trees that I am sure Jack and the captain 
will see. I’ll place an arrow alongside of them show- 
ing the direction in which we will have been taken.” 

What do you mean by being taken ? Don’t you 
suppose these people live near the coast of this island ? ” 

‘‘ Look around, Harold,” said Charley, “ and I think 
you can answer that question yourself. As you see, 
there is very little level low ground between the cliffs 
and the ocean on which one could live. And to live on 
the sides of that precipice one would require feet like 
those of a fly. Of course it may be different on the 
other side of the island. I imagine that the houses 
of these people will be found in some of the valleys 
of the mountains. If you are to do anything to mark 
our landing-place here, you will have to do it promptly. 
I think we will soon be taken up some place where we 
can climb to the top of the cliffs. Once there, it may 
be difficult to get an opportunity for reaching the shore 
again.” 

As they afterward learned, this island, as well as the 

48 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


neighboring islands, at one time probably had barrier 
reefs at fairly considerable distances from its coasts. 
These reefs, however, disappeared by reason of the 
rapid sinking of the land, and afterward, when the 
sinking became slower, it was impossible for another 
fringing reef to form, owing to the depth of the water. 
It was this rapid sinking too, that had produced the 
abrupt shores, the deep bays, and the almost inaccessi- 
ble cliffs. As they afterward learned, the sinking of 
the bed of this part of the ocean had taken place so 
rapidly that in one place an island fifty miles in length 
had entirely disappeared. 

Judging from the rate- at which the canoes had been 
forced through the waters, they estimated roughly that 
they were situated between five and six hundred miles 
to the northeast of Harding Island. 

By this time the canoes had landed on the beach of 
the island. The beach here was so narrow that, as 
Charley had supposed, they at once began to climb the 
almost precipitous cliffs. The captives were placed 
in charge of a body of warriors, but Charley and 
Harold were evidently not regarded as captives, since 
Mahinee beckoned them to follow him. Doing this, 
they soon reached a place where huge steps had been 
cut in the steep inclination, up which they began to 
climb slowly. After having ascended several hundred 
feet the inclination became less abrupt, and they 
reached a gradual slope of the mountain, up which 
they climbed until they came to a nearly level plateau 
or plain fully a mile in breadth, which led by gentle 
D 49 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


slopes toward the north to a mountain range whose 
summits terminated in three peaks. Judging from the 
conical form of their peaks, these mountains, that 
extended generally east and west across the island, 
were of volcanic origin. The width of the plateau 
rapidly decreased toward the north. 

It maybe mentioned here that, seizing an opportunity 
when the attention of the party had been attracted 
toward the ocean by an accident to one of the prisoners 
while ascending the precipice, Harold had succeeded in 
stuffing his pocket handkerchief in a crevice in the 
rocks without being detected. 

Leading the way across the plateau toward the west, 
they were soon standing with Mahinee and his war- 
riors on the western edge of the plateau that descended 
precipitously toward the valley, the fertility of which 
greatly surpassed anything they had even dreamed of. 
Through this valley there flowed a fairly large river, 
the headwaters of which rose on the higher slopes of 
the mountains between the central and the eastern- 
most peaks. 

The lower part of the valley, except toward the 
north, was completely surrounded by the remains of a 
broad plateau. This valley extended for twenty-five 
or thirty miles toward the north. From where they 
were standing they could see the headwaters of another 
stream that had its origin between the opposite slopes 
of the central and the westernmost peaks. 

The valley on which they were looking had been 
gradually eroded or eaten through the rock of the 

50 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


plateau by the heavy tropical rains in that part of the 
world. Unlike many other valleys, though fairly 
broad at its lower end, it gradually widened toward the 
north, where it nearly merged with the upper portions 
of the valley in which the river that rose between the 
central and the western cone had its headwaters. 

The rain-water, draining off the top of the plateau, 
had cut deep side-channels or furrows in it which dis- 
charged as waterfalls into the valley below, where they 
formed tributaries of the main stream. 

The rich soil of the valley, together with an abun- 
dant rainfall, and the tropical heat and light had pro- 
duced a luxuriant and varied vegetation that is difficult 
for one who has never lived in the tropics to begin to 
understand. Trees of a great variety of forms, some 
of which were laden with luscious fruits, could be seen, 
especially in the lower valley near the banks of the 
main river. There were numerous groves of cocoanut 
palms laden with fruit. In places, these groves formed 
a large proportion of the vegetation. In other places, 
however, they were replaced by far more conspicuous 
and attractive trees. As they afterward learned, these 
were the wonderful breadfruit trees. In other places, 
the surface of the valley was covered with a wilderness 
of guava bushes, while in still other places dense 
groves of bamboos, towering in height above the tops 
of most of the trees, grew so luxuriantly as to make it 
practically impossible for one to force a passage 
through them. Besides these, there were groves of 
orange, lemon, and lime trees, as well as huge clumps 

51 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


of many kinds of bananas. In other portions there 
were low plants laden with luscious pineapples. 

It must not be understood that they could see all 
these things standing, as they were, at the top of the 
precipice looking down several hundred feet below 
them into a valley many miles in length, and in some 
places nearly a mile in width. It was only the general 
outlines they could distinguish. They afterward had 
abundant opportunity of examining at closer range 
these different kinds of vegetation. 

It was indeed a most beautiful sight. Probably no 
other part of the earth possesses a more peaceful-look- 
ing valley than that on which they were looking down 
with their dark savage captors standing near them. 
Even the miserable captives, who had been torn from 
their distant homes and carried forcibly to that distant 
part of the world, and who knew not what fate awaited 
them, were unable to refrain from exclamations of 
delight at the beautiful sight. 

As the two lads stood almost entranced by the beauty 
of the wonderful panorama that was spread out before 
them, Mahinee, greatly pleased at the effect it had 
produced, stood proudly erect and, turning to the boys, 
said something that they were of course unable to un- 
derstand, except that it appeared that he was informing 
them that he was king and absolute ruler of this beau- 
tiful part of the earth. He then assured them he would 
be their friend ; that they had nothing to fear, and then 
began pointing out to them different parts of the valley. 

It was indeed a wonderful sight. The valley occu- 

52 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


pied the region the waters of the river had, after 
probably hundreds of thousands of years, worn or cut 
in the side of the mountain. This lovely valley, cut off 
from the rest of the world, afforded apparently a safe 
resting-place where one would not be only free from 
predatory neighbors, but also be supplied with an abun- 
dance and diversity of the choicest food products the 
tropical region is able to bring forth. 

All this time Charley had been wondering how he 
could leave something to indicate to his friends, should 
they succeed in reaching this part of the island, the 
point at which they had descended. Seeing near 
them a tree the trunk of which was covered with bark 
sufficiently smooth to permit it to be marked, and be- 
lieving that Mahinee would not be surprised if he at- 
tempted to draw a picture on the bark, Charley took 
a large blunt lead pencil which he used for the heavier 
lines of his sketches, and began to trace on it a crude 
drawing of the war canoe. He then added a picture 
of the valley with its main stream and its tributaries. 

Turning to Mahinee he then intimated that it was 
by means of the canoe they had been brought to the 
island to the beautiful valley below them. He then 
pointed with his finger in different directions as if 
asking where they would descend to the valley. Mahi- 
nee understood and pointed to a path on their right 
leading to some steps which furnished the means of 
reaching the valley below. Hurriedly sketching an 
arrow pointing in this direction, Charley then wrote 
his initials C. Y. P., for Charles Young Pleasanton. 
53 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


Then, fearing Mahinee would suspect that he was en- 
deavoring to leave directions for his friends, he again 
turned to the chief, pointing to him and to the boat, as 
if to indicate that Mahinee had brought them to this 
beautiful place and that he, Charley, had made a pic- 
ture of it to let the world know how great a man 
Mahinee was. 

Fortunately, the chief had no idea of just what the 
youngster had succeeded in doing. He simply smiled, 
and leading the way was soon followed by the two boys 
down steep rough steps into one of the ravines that 
had been formed by the rain draining a part of the 
plateau. This part of the road required great care. A 
single false step would have precipitated them to certain 
death on the rocks below. The path extended generally 
along one side of a stream of water that dashed down 
the precipice. In many places the ravine was so deep 
that its overhanging precipitous walls almost com- 
pletely shut out the sunlight, rendering the place nearly 
as dark as if it had been night. The savages, how- 
ever, were able to follow this route rapidly, knowing 
it so well, so that at last they all safely reached the 
valley below. Here they found fairly level ground, 
over which they passed rapidly for several miles, until 
at last they came to a settlement consisting of a number 
of houses whose frames and roofs were formed of 
large bamboos and the trunks of trees thatched with 
large leaves. 

Mahinee led the way to a house larger than any of 
the others. As they afterward discovered, this was his 
54 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


house. It was like all the other houses in the valley, 
but was built in a somewhat better fashion. It was not 
erected directly on the surface of the ground, but on 
the top of a number of large stones that had been laid 
on one another in layers or courses, to the height of 
perhaps eight feet. The area covered by these stones 
was of the same shape as the foundations of the house 
built on it, except that the house did not completely 
cover it, but left a space in front that, enclosed by a 
low picket of canes, possessed the appearance of a 
porch or veranda. 

As to the house itself, it was formed mainly of large 
bamboos placed in an erect position on the platform of 
stones which, as they afterward learned, was called 
a pi-pi. The roof was formed of bamboos together 
with the boughs of trees that were ingeniously con- 
nected to the bamboos by twisting. The spaces be- 
tween the bamboos and boughs were filled with leaves 
of the cocoanut palm. Since the bamboos forming the 
roof were sloping, the roof when covered with a thatch- 
ing afforded an ample protection against the rain. 

The eaves of the roof extended down to within about 
five feet of the surface of the pi-pi. The house was 
open at the sides. It was not, however, directly open, 
since there extended downward from the edge of the 
roof, curtains or blindlike additions, consisting of an 
open screen formed of light strips of bamboo. These 
were woven into a fabric that permitted the free en- 
trance of the air, and yet, at the same time, served 
thoroughly to keep out the rain. 

55 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


As the boys followed Mahinee they entered the 
house through a narrow opening in the screen. On 
the inside were two well-polished trunks of the cocoa- 
nut palm, as straight as arrows, extending the entire 
length of the house. One of these trunks was placed at 
the back of the room, while the other was placed paral- 
lel to, and at a distance of about two and a half yards 
from it. The space between these trunks was covered 
with a number of mats formed by weaving various 
kinds of dried leaves, straw, and strips of cane to- 
gether. These mats were formed of different colored 
materials. The space so covered was employed as a 
resting-place on which they slept during the night, and 
rested during the warmer hours of the day. The re- 
mainder of the floor was covered with the smooth 
stones of the pi-pi, or the stone platform on which the 
house had been erected. 

On the ridge-pole of the house numerous bundles 
were suspended near the roof by cords formed of 
vegetable fibers. These bundles that had been wrapped 
in a variety of coarse cloth called tapa, could readily 
be lowered to the floor of the house when needed, 
since the ropes to which they were attached at one end, 
passing over the ridge-pole, were attached at the 
other end to the sides. 

Against one of the walls of the house, arranged as 
ornaments, were various implements of war, such as 
spears, clubs, javelins, knives, etc. Outside the house, 
a small shed was employed as a cupboard or place 
where different kinds of food products were stored. 

56 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


The house was extremely pleasant. The outer air 
was uncomfortably hot from a bright tropical sun, 
but a breeze was blowing through the curtainlike 
sides, and kept the room cool and agreeable. More- 
over, the entire interior of the house was kept exceed- 
ingly clean. 

Sitting down on a mat facing the front of the house, 
Mahinee pointed to mats near him, motioning to the 
boys to take seats, then saying something to one of 
the attendants who left the room. Soon afterward 
there came into it a number of other chiefs, but of less 
authority than himself. Among these were Aharo, the 
chief who commanded the war vessel that had taken 
the boys captives. The chiefs took seats on the floor 
at a respectful distance from the king. As soon as 
they were all seated, a number of warriors came into 
the room and sat in silence around Mahinee. 

For five minutes there was a deep silence. Then 
Mahinee arose, and pointing to the front of the house, 
attendants pushed aside the curtain, thus permitting 
several hundred men and women who had assembled 
before the house to see into the room. Mahinee 
then began an impassioned address during which he 
evidently recited the wonderful things he and his war- 
riors had done during the expedition from which they 
had just returned. This was followed by the war 
chant the boys had heard them practising while in 
their canoes. Then came short addresses from the 
other chiefs. The captives were then brought into the 
room and a distribution made of them among the 
57 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


chiefs. As the boys afterward learned, it had been 
decided not to kill any of the prisoners, but to give 
them to the chiefs as slaves. The captives manifested 
great joy on hearing this decision, since they well knew 
that it frequently fell to the lot of captives to be 
killed and eaten by their captors. 

Aharo then related what had occurred on the cap- 
ture of the boys on Harding Island, and began to tell 
some of the wonderful things the young white lads 
were able to do. At the end of this speech he then 
claimed his right to take the two boys as his share 
of the expedition. After some little argument, but 
probably because of an understanding that had already 
been reached between them, Mahinee took the two 
lads by the hands and led them over to Aharo. Im- 
mediately afterward, however, Aharo led the boys back 
to Mahinee, and indicated that he made them a pres- 
ent to his great chief. This act was received with ap- 
plause by all present. Mahinee, then turning to the 
two boys, again motioned to them to sit down near 
him. 

It was evident, however, that the people, especially 
those on the outside, had been told of the wonderful 
things the boys could do, especially in the way of 
singing, so that when the chiefs had gotten through 
with their speeches, Mahinee made signs to the boys to 
sing something. 

“Let’s give them the boat song again, Harold,” 
said Charley. 

The song was received with so great satisfaction by 

58 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


the people that Mahinee motioned to the boys to give 
another song, which was done. Mahinee then mo- 
tioned to Charley to show the wonderful manner in 
which he was able to draw pictures on paper. In 
obedience to this request, Charley made a rapid but 
excellent sketch of the house in which they were seated, 
in which, however, the only figure represented was 
Mahinee as he stood talking to the people. It was so 
good a representation that when the drawing was 
passed around loud murmurs of surprise and admira- 
tion were heard on all sides. It seemed indeed won- 
derful, to these simple-minded savages, that so young 
a lad should be able by merely rubbing a pencil rapidly 
over the surface of a sheet of white stuff to make 
pictures stand out from it in so remarkable a manner. 
To them it was magic, and magic too of a very won- 
derful kind. 


59 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


CHAPTER V 
Kooloo and Marbonna 

When the audience was over, all the men left the 
room but Mahinee and the other chiefs. Some women 
then brought in food. Mahinee not only wished the 
boys to remain with him, but as a special mark of 
favor, pointed to some mats placed alongside him on 
which he wished them to sit and eat, informing the 
boys by means of signs that these mats were where they 
would sleep by night and rest by day. There was 
another mat placed next the king, between the king 
and the mats occupied by the boys. This, he informed 
them, was intended for Kooloo. 

The articles of food brought in consisted of oranges, 
pineapples, cocoanuts, together with several other 
kinds of fruit they had never before seen. In addi- 
tion to this there was a peculiar yellowish-looking 
sticky liquid placed in a calabash. 

When the calabash was handed to Mahinee, he 
dipped the forefinger of his right hand in the sticky 
mass. The boys carefully watched, for the king was 
evidently showing them something, though they were 
uncertain what he intended to do with the yellow- 
colored liquid that closely resembled bookbinder^s 
paste. They believed, however, since it had been 
brought in with the other food it was intended for 
6o 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


eating, and this was correct; for as soon as he had 
plunged his forefinger in the sticky liquid, Mahinee 
gave it a sudden twirl and drew it out evenly covered 
with a thin coating of the material. Still maintaining 
the twirling motion he inserted the forefinger in his 
mouth without permitting any of the sticky material 
to fall from it. Then, sucking his finger, removed it 
from his mouth licked quite clean. 

Motioning to Charley to do the same thing, the lad 
succeeded fairly well in transferring a finger full of 
the material to his mouth. It was rather insipid-tasting 
stuff he thus ate for the first time, and he would have 
greatly preferred to make his meal from the fruit that 
had been brought in with it. While Charley was eating 
it, Mahinee pointing to the material repeated the 
words, “ poee, poee,'’ and then motioned to Charley to 
pass the calabash to Harold. 

‘"You’ll have to eat some of it, Harold,” said 
Charley. 

“ It’s awful-looking stuff,” replied Harold. “ How 
does it taste ? ” 

“ Not so very bad,” was the reply. “ It has a sour 
taste unlike anything I know of, but I imagine that 
bookbinder’s paste if kept long enough would not 
taste unlike it.” 

Harold also succeeded in transferring some of the 
sticky stuff to his mouth, and even went so far as to 
pretend that the taste pleased him. 

As the boys afterward learned, poee, poee was 
one of the many preparations of the fruit of the bread- 
61 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


fruit tree, one of the most important vegetable foods 
of that part of the world. In importance as a food 
product it excels even the cocoanut palm of the low 
coral islands of this part of the Pacific. 

The calabash was passed around a number of times, 
until it was at last nearly emptied of its contents. 
They then began to eat the different kinds of fruit that 
had been brought in. The change from the poee, poee, 
especially considering the manner in which it was 
served, as one after another of the men dipped their 
fingers in the mass, made the fruit portion of the re- 
past all the more pleasant. 

There were, among the different kinds of fruit, a 
number of ripe cocoanuts that had been stripped of 
their husks and opened at the largest of the three dark 
spots that are always found at one end of the nuts. 
The oranges too were especially good, being large and 
juicy. The juice of some of them was of a deep red 
color and very sweet. There were too, luscious ripe 
pineapples. 

Several times during the meal Mahinee repeated the 
name Kooloo, adding to it a new name, Marbonna. He 
seemed especially desirous to see these people, who the 
boys saw by his gestures he expected would soon ap- 
pear before him. About five minutes after the women 
had removed the remains of the feast the sounds of 
approaching footsteps were heard, and two people 
entered the house. One of tlfese was a lad about the 
same age as Charley and Harold, while the other was 
an old man who had shaved off all his beard and mus- 
62 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


tache from his face, as well as all the hair from his 
head except two tufts that were left midway between 
his ears and the crown of his head, this having evi- 
dently been done to display in all their beautiful ugli- 
ness the tattooings on his face. Like the other men on 
the island, his body was almost completely covered 
by tattooings. 

Kooloo had but little or no tattooing except some 
faint traces on the face, that appeared as if they were 
intended for the beginning of the sacred triangle. 
Moreover, there were only a few markings on his 
body. He was a beautiful boy, and bore a strong re- 
semblance to Mahinee, so that the boys would have cor- 
rectly inferred that he was Mahinee’s son had they not 
already been informed of that fact when Charley in- 
quired of the chief who Kooloo was. 

As soon as Kooloo came into the room he gave his 
father a smiling look, said something to him, and then 
turning to Charley and Harold examined them long 
and curiously. As he did this both boys, especially 
Charley, looked smilingly into Kooloo’s face. At last 
Charley extended his hand, and taking hold of Koo- 
loo’s hand warmly shook it, as we do in our parts of 
the world in welcoming a person. 

Kooloo smiled as Charley did this, and seemed at 
first unable to understand it. His father, however, said 
something to him in which evidently he explained that 
this was a method employed by the white people of 
showing that they are pleased to meet a stranger. 

As soon as his father had stopped talking, Kooloo 

63 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


approached first Charley and then Harold, gravely 
rubbed his nose against theirs, at the same time smiling, 
thus indicating that he was pleased to meet them. 

Mahinee then turning to Charley pointed to his son 
and repeated the name ‘‘ Kooloo.” Then pointing al- 
ternately to Charley and Harold, repeated to his son, 
“ Charleyo, Harealdo.” Kooloo repeated these names 
in a musical tone, Charleyo, Harealdo.’^ 

Charley then again tried the few words he had al- 
ready learned, and turning to Kooloo, said : 

“ Kooloo, Charleyo tayos ? ” putting it in the form 
of a question. 

Kooloo smiled, probably as we would do at the in- 
correct pronunciation of English words by one just 
beginning to learn to speak our language. But, smil- 
ing, he shook his head, repeating the word, Aa, Aa 
(‘‘Yes, yes 

Charley also asked the same question regarding 
Harold, and obtained the same reply. 

During this time the man Marbonna was silent, 
for it was not the thing for him to speak in the presence 
of the king until he was spoken to. At last, however, 
Mahinee turning to him said something, when to the 
great surprise and pleasure of the boys the man turned 
to them and said : 

“ How you do ? Kooloo, son of chief your friend. 
Mahinee, chief, your friend. ^ Likes you. Marbonna,” 
pointing to himself, “ also your friend. Speak plenty 
English. Live one, one, one years with English, so 
Marbonna. speak English like white men.” 

64 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


When Marbonna had ceased speaking, both Charley 
and Harold held out their hands to him, shaking his 
hand warmly. Then turning to him, Charley said : 

Please say to Mahinee, the great chief, that 
Charleyo and Harealdo are his friends, and wish to 
thank him for being so kind to them.” 

It was evident that Marbonna was far from being 
able to speak the English language freely ; or, indeed, 
to understand the fine distinctions of most of the words 
that Charley had used. He was able, however, to get 
a fairly correct idea of what Charley wished him to 
say to the chief. As Charley learned afterward, the 
opportunities that Marbonna had had for studying the 
English language were limited to three years, during 
which he had lived on a neighboring island on which 
a runaway drunken sailor lived. From this man he 
had picked up a number of English words. This sailor, 
however, had lived on the island for so long that he 
spoke the language of the islanders more frequently 
than he did his own. However, Marbonna had picked 
up a fairly extended vocabulary of English, and was 
thus able to some extent to act as an interpreter. 

When Mahinee heard what Marbonna had to say he 
appeared pleased, and spoke for more than five minutes 
to the interpreter. He then, turning to the two white 
boys, said : 

Great chief say allee right. He always great friend 
of young white boys. Like young white boys much. 
Want, them be friends with his son Kooloo, and so 
teach him talkee same as young white boys.” 

65 


E 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


Please say to the king that we will gladly do as 
he wishes,” said Charley. “ Say also to Kooloo that 
the young white boys hope that he will also be their 
friend. That they will gladly teach him the language 
of the white men, and hope that Kooloo will teach 
them his language.” 

Kooloo smiled as Marbonna translated this speech, 
and then turning to his father spoke rapidly for a con- 
siderable time. When he was through he turned to 
Marbonna, apparently telling him to let the boys know 
what he had said to his father. 

“ Kooloo says,” replied Marbonna, “ he likes you, 
and will be your friend much. He wants you teach 
him ways of white boys. He has heard of the wonder- 
ful things the white boys do, especially Charleyo, and 
says please show him some of these things.” 

Turning to Marbonna, Charley said: 

Please tell Kooloo that we will show him whatever 
he wishes that I and Harealdo can do.” 

Interpreting this to Kooloo and receiving an answer, 
Marbonna turned and said to Charley : 

Kooloo says please sing song.” 

They again sang the boat song, not only to the great 
delight of Mahinee and Marbonna, but especially to 
that of Kooloo, who had a good ear for music and an 
unusually fine voice, and was able to join in the chorus 
in such a manner as fairly to improve it, and not to 
mar it as had been done where the men had attempted 
to sing. 

When Mahinee saw how quick Kooloo had been to 

66 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


learn the song, he was greatly pleased at this first 
demonstration of the advantages his son would de- 
rive by having the young white lads as teachers. 

Like many other interpreters, Marbonna could un- 
derstand English far better than he could translate it. 
Although, while listening to a statement made in 
English he could understand only the words here and 
there, he was nevertheless able to obtain a fairly clear 
idea of the subject that was being talked about. When 
he had no idea of what the other words meant, he 
treated this lack of knowledge with profound indif- 
ference, calmly supplying the missing words by ap- 
parently whatever words came first into his mind. The 
result was that frequently very ridiculous mistakes 
were made. Nevertheless, by his aid the boys were 
able to communicate with Mahinee and Kooloo to an 
extent that would have been impossible without Mar- 
bonna’s slight knowledge of the language. 

After an audience of about an hour, Kooloo, turning 
to the boys, evidently invited them to take a walk with 
him. 

As they passed out of the house a crowd of men, 
women, and children gathered around them looking 
curiously at the two strangers. It was evident that 
they too had heard of the wonderful things the 
strangers could do, and began at once to speak eagerly 
to Kooloo and to Marbonna. At last, Kooloo, turning 
to the boys, said through Marbonna : 

“ They want to hear you sing with the breath 
music, meaning the mouth-organ. 

67 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


“ Certainly,” said Charley, as soon as Marbonna had 
translated it. 

Taking their mouth-organs out of their pockets the 
two boys began to play a merry dance tune. 

As soon as the people had recovered from their as- 
tonishment that such beautiful sounds could be pro- 
duced by merely breathing into the curious little boxes 
they saw the boys hold to their mouths, they com- 
menced to move first their hands and bodies so as to 
keep time with the music, and finally moving apart 
from one another, so as to obtain sufficient room, be- 
gan dancing. It was a grotesque dance of a type that 
the boys had never before seen, but it was excellent in 
so far as they made their bodies keep almost perfect 
time with the successive notes. 

Both the music and the dance attracted so much at- 
tention that crowds of people were soon seen running 
toward them, until at last probably over one hundred 
men, women, and children were joining in the dance; 
for, seeing the pleasure the music evidently gave them, 
the boys continued playing for nearly fifteen minutes. 

At last Charley looking up was surprised to see that 
Mahinee had also joined the crowd and was looking at 
the dance with a smiling face. 

Mahinee said something to Marbonna who, turning 
to the lads, said : 

The great chief say sing for the people.” 

When this was done the people were pleased with 
the harmonious combination produced by Charley's 
soprano and Harold's alto. 

68 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


Although there were so many houses around Mahi- 
nee’s house that this part of the valley might, perhaps, 
be regarded as the village, yet throughout the entire 
region for a mile or more other houses were situated 
without apparently any particular attempt to assemble 
them in a single village. 

There were no regular roads through the valley, al- 
though along the main river-bank the footpaths had 
been used so much as to almost produce a road. 

When the song was completed, Marbonna led the 
boys to his house. It was built on the same plan as 
Mahinee’s house, although, of course, the construction 
was much simpler and the house much smaller. Like 
Mahinee’s house, however, it had been erected on a 
pi-pi, and had the same clear space like a veranda in 
front of it Inside were two smoothed and well- 
polished logs of cocoanut trees, with mats placed be- 
tween them, just as in Mahinee’s house. Entering the 
house and motioning to the boys to take seats on the 
mats, Marbonna said : 

Now me show you, Charleyo, and you, Harealdo, 
and you, Kooloo, to speak very much to one another.” 

Marbonna's plan of teaching a foreign language was 
simple but effective. This first lesson consisted in hold- 
ing up articles, such as oranges, cocoanuts, leaves, bits 
of bamboo, etc., and then repeating the words used on 
the island for the same. Charley and Harold would 
then repeat them out loud after Marbonna until the old 
man was satisfied with the pronunciation. Of course, 
if Marbonna had been a good English scholar he would 
69 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


then have repeated the English words for these articles. 
But the canny old man pretended it would be more 
interesting if the boys did this, so holding the articles 
up, one after another, he motioned to Charley to give 
the English words, and this Charley did repeatedly, 
having Kooloo to pronounce the words after him. In 
this way, after five or six articles had been named in 
both languages, Marbonna would hold the objects up 
and then, pointing either toward Kooloo or toward 
Charley and Harold, would listen to them repeat the 
proper Polynesian word or the English word. 

Kooloo, who was a bright boy, learned the English 
words with fair readiness. He was excelled in rapidity 
of learning, however, by both Harold and Charley, es- 
pecially by the latter. 

Remembering the drawing-pads he had in his pocket, 
Charley took a lead pencil and pad, and then drawing 
a small but fairly accurate picture of the orange, wrote 
underneath it the Polynesian word for the same as he 
imagined it would be spelled. He did the same thing 
with the other articles the names of which he had 
learned. Both Kooloo and Marbonna were surprised 
at the ease with which Charley could make the paper 
speak. They did not, however, appear to understand 
what the writing meant, and when they were informed 
that it was the name of the thing in the language of 
the island they tried to conceal the evident fact that 
they did not believe the statement, especially when 
Charley wrote underneath the Polynesian word for 
orange the English word orange, and then repeat- 
70 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


ing the word orange, intimated to Kooloo that that’s 
what the writing told him. Kooloo only shook his 
head, as if to say it was too much for him. 

After the first lesson they took a walk along the 
bank of the river, where Kooloo showed the boys 
several kinds of fruit trees they had never seen before. 
At last they came to a place along the bank of the 
river that was not covered with trees, and where the 
water looked very attractive to the two English boys, 
who, as has already been stated in Wrecked on a 
Coral Island,” were excellent swimmers. Kooloo, 
turning to the boys, pointed to the water as if to ask 
them whether they would like to take a swim. 

Now this was an invitation a healthy boy, who is 
able to swim, seldom if ever refuses, so they all began 
to get ready for a good swim in the river. 


71 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


CHAPTER VI 

An Apparently New Kind of Tattooing 

It was a race between the Polynesian boy and the 
English boys as to who would get into the water first, 
with all the chances in favor of the brown-skinned 
lad. All he had to do to get ready was to remove 
the girdle from around his waist and to put off the 
anklets and armlets of human hair. Although Charley 
and Harold had both their over and underclothes to 
remove, as well as their shoes, they were not so far 
behind either Kooloo or Marbonna, who had accom- 
panied them. 

Kooloo had plunged immediately into the stream 
on disrobing; but he had waited for the boys, swim- 
ming around in the water near the bank where they 
were undressing. Marbonna, who was much slower 
in his movements, had not much more than gotten 
ready for the swim when, looking in astonishment 
at the two boys, he said something in a loud tone to 
Kooloo, who instantly swam to the bank and joined 
him, the two, beginning to talk together in excited 
tones. 

We must now refer to a few facts mentioned in the 
book Wrecked on a Coral Island.” The boys, as 
well as their other companions on Harding Island, had 
72 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


been greatly troubled for proper clothing. Their en- 
tire wardrobe was limited to the clothes they had on 
when they stepped into the open boat of the Ketrel. 
The condition of the sinking vessel required hurry, so 
that they were unable to take anything else with them 
in the way of apparel. Now, it must be remembered 
that they had spent five whole months on the derelict, 
and had also been for a long time on the coral island, 
their clothing therefore sadly needed replacing. This 
was especially the case with Charley and Harold who, 
like all young, active boys, were especially hard on 
their clothes. 

The captain, who had given the matter of cloth- 
ing careful thought, after consultation with Hiram, 
had adopted the expedient of employing the cotton 
ticking that was used for the covering of the extra 
mattresses that formed a portion of the cargo the 
brig had carried, for use in the mining towns of South 
Africa. It is true the clothes they thus succeeded in 
making for one another were far from being articles 
of beauty. Like most materials employed for bed- 
ticking the pattern employed was that of alternate 
stripes of blue and white. When, therefore, they put 
on these clothes they presented an appearance not un- 
like that of convicts. 

But it was with their underclothing that the great- 
est difficulty had been experienced. Fortunately, a 
portion of the goods with which the brig was laden 
consisted of brightly colored calico prints ; that is, mus- 
lins of a highly ornamental pattern, the figures or de- 
73 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


signs on which, instead of being woven into the goods, 
had been impressed on their surfaces by printing. 

The designs consisted of combinations of bright 
reds, oranges, greens, yellows, and other colors, com- 
bined in a manner that set at naught all the principles 
of good taste. The patterns consisted of groupings of 
stars, half-moons, triangles, squares, circles, etc., 
covering nearly the entire surface of the calico. Al- 
though the colors were badly chosen for good taste, 
yet they were exactly of the character calculated to 
please the inhabitants of the mining towns for which 
they were intended and, perhaps, more especially suited 
to the tastes of the savages, - who now beheld them for 
the first time. 

These wonderful designs instead of remaining on 
their underclothes, to which they had been originally 
impressed by printing, had been transferred to the 
bodies of the boys in a manner not unlike that of the 
highly colored decalcomania pictures generally printed 
on paper; these can be as readily transferred to the 
skin as to a sheet of paper, or to any other smooth 
surface, by simply moistening them with water and 
pressing them firmly against the surface. 

Now it happened on the day on which they had been 
carried away as captives from Harding Island, that 
the boys had to put on a new suit of underwear made 
from these calico prints. It had been a number of days 
since their clothing had been off, so that under the 
combined action of heat and perspiration they had been 
wonderfully transferred to the bodies of the boys, 
74 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


which they covered almost completely with combina- 
tions of colors that far excelled anything the savages 
had been able to produce by means of tattooings. 

It was a tremendous surprise both to Marbonna 
and Kooloo. Besides the other wonderful things the 
white lads could do, it seemed they had discovered an 
entirely new process of tattooing. Never had they 
beheld either such wonderful colors, or such remark- 
able patterns. Instead of extending in continuous lines 
between different parts of the body, the little squares, 
triangles, circles, half-moons, stars, etc., stood out 
alone, each complete in itself. 

It must be remembered that the Polynesians not only 
greatly approve of the tattooing of their bodies, but 
also appear to attach certain religious ideas to the 
process. For this reason every full-grown male in the 
community was tattooed from head to foot. Indeed, 
as has already been remarked, with a view of supply- 
ing additional human canvas for these works of art, 
most of the men had even kept their cheeks and parts 
of their heads free from hair by careful shaving. 

After examining the highly colored pictures on the 
nude bodies of the boys, which they believed to be real 
tattooings, Kooloo turned to Charley and inquired 
through Marbonna if he would not show him how he 
might obtain such beautiful markings on his body. 
Charley only laughed, and said he would think about it. 
But it was Marbonna who was most surprised and at 
the same time pleased with what he saw. As the boys 
went into the water to swim, Marbonna, splashing 
75 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


some water over their bodies, began to rub them 
violently with his hands to see whether the markings 
were waterproof. Since he was unable to produce 
any effect on them whatever, no matter how vigor- 
ously he carried on the scrubbings, he became satisfied 
that they were the result of some curious, if not magi- 
cal, process of tattooing, which he was desirous of 
learning as quickly as possible. Marbonna then said 
something to a boy, one of a crowd of boys who had 
followed them and gone in swimming with them. On 
hearing what Marbonna said, the boy started on a run 
toward the village. 

Charley and Harold were by no means pleased at 
the close examination of their bodies. In order to 
escape they plunged into the deeper water of the 
river, and were soon having a splendid swim. The 
white boys were excellent swimmers, but in this exer- 
cise Kooloo far excelled them. Nor is this surprising, 
for Polynesian children are taught to swim almost 
from the day of their birth, and although the inhabit- 
ants in the valley were to a great extent shut off 
from the ocean, yet the magnificent river that flowed 
through their valley was used freely for bathing pur- 
poses. They also frequently visited the ocean, either 
for the purpose of catching fish for food, or for ma- 
king occasional voyages in their canoes to the neigh- 
boring islands. 

Kooloo was greatly pleased to find there was some- 
thing in which he could lead the boys. Some of the 
strokes, however, Charley and Harold had learned in 
76 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


England or Australia, had never been seen before by 
Kooloo. The boys therefore began teaching these 
strokes to Kooloo who, in his turn, showed them how 
to do a number of things in swimming that were en- 
tirely new to them. 

The boys enjoyed their bath so thoroughly that they 
had not noticed the people who began to collect on the 
river-bank. The boy messenger, who had been sent 
with the special message to Mahinee, had not failed 
to inform everybody he met, that the bodies of the 
young white lads, who were then swimming in the 
river, were covered with the most beautiful tattooings 
he had ever seen. 

Abashed at the great crowds that were upon the 
bank watching them, the boys ran to the place where 
they had taken off their clothes, intending to put them 
on again. They were, however, prevented from doing 
this by a crowd of people coming toward them, form- 
ing a ring around them and beginning a careful exami- 
nation of the wonderful markings. To escape from 
this examination, each boy seized his undershirt and 
tried to put it on, when some of the men, snatching 
these articles from them and picking up all their re- 
maining clothes, ran with them toward the village. 
Looking at the crowds that surrounded them, the boys 
were surprised and pleased to see Mahinee. Turning 
to Marbonna, Charley said: 

“ Please ask the great chief to command the men to 
bring back our clothes. We don’t like to be naked 
before these people. We want to get our clothes on.” 
77 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


Charley was surprised to see that Mahinee was un- 
willing to do this, for he said to them through Mar- 
bonna : 

“ Not so, Charleyo and Harealdo. Why deprive my 
people, who have come so far from the village to see 
these beautiful markings on your bodies, of the pleas- 
ure of looking at them. If you put your clothes on 
they cannot do this and will be angry.” 

But we cannot go around in this way,” said 
Charley. “We would be ashamed to do so. In our 
country it is not usual for people to do this.” 

Mahinee did not seem pleased when Charley said 
it was not the custom in their country to go around 
without any clothes, remarking through Marbonna 
that this was the custom in his country; that he saw 
no reason why they should do otherwise. Mahinee 
then approached the boys and looked at the markings 
with much astonishment and admiration. It was evi- 
dent that he regarded them as a species of tattooings 
that greatly excelled anything that had ever been seen 
on the island. In order to satisfy himself as to this, 
he did as Marbonna had done. Beckoning one of the 
men to bring a calabash full of water, he poured it 
over the backs of the boys and commenced, by vig- 
orous rubbing, to see if the marks would come off. 
Finding, however, that they could not thus be removed, 
he too became convinced that they were tattooings, al- 
though of an entirely different character from anything 
he had ever seen before. 

Turning to Marbonna, Mahinee commanded him to 

78 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


inquire of the boys whether these markings were really 
permanent, and how they had been obtained. 

“ They won’t remain always,” said Charley. ‘‘ But 
perhaps will last for several weeks.” 

Mahinee again closely examined the figures, and 
again pouring water over the boys commanded two 
men to rub more vigorously and try to scrub them off. 
This rubbing was so severe that it almost blistered the 
skin of the boys, but it was of no avail. The markings 
were apparently as permanent as were those of the 
tattooings that covered portions of his own body. 

Mahinee then sent a messenger for a man named 
Kaloro. 

‘‘Who’s Kaloro?” inquired Charley, turning to 
Marbonna. 

“ Kaloro is the chief tattooer on the island,” was 
the reply. 

“ But, Marbonna,” said Charley, “ these markings 
are not tattooings. Tattooings remain on one’s skin 
for life, but these on our bodies will completely disap- 
pear in a few weeks.” 

“ Ah, that’s what you say,” replied Marbonna smil- 
ing. “ You don’t want to tell us how to make them. 
The king has therefore sent for Kaloro, the great 
tattooer of the island.” 

It was evident that Kaloro lived in the neighborhood 
of the part of the valley where they were taking a 
swim in the river. In a short time, the messenger who 
had been sent to call him, was seen coming with a 
little old man, running as swiftly as they could toward 
79 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


the river. When the people around the boys saw 
Kaloro coming they made an opening so that he could 
approach them. 

Kaloro was a little fat man, and was nearly out of 
breath from running. Although he at once began an. 
examination of the boys, yet he was breathing so* 
rapidly that he could scarcely speak. Even when he 
had gradually recovered his breath he was too much 
astonished at the wonderful work before him to say 
much. He was a great artist in his way, and claimed 
to know more about tattooing than any one else on the 
island. Indeed, so great was his skill that he was 
never willing to waste his time on any but the most 
important men in the valley. But here was a specimen 
of the tattooing art he would either have to learn, or 
else give up his position as the best tattooer of the 
tribe. He kept on talking, therefore, in an excited 
way to Marbonna, and ran continually from one boy 
to the other to see if he could not discover the manner 
of producing such beautiful work. He then turned 
to the king, telling him that these markings were tat- 
tooings; that he thought he could imitate them, but 
that it would require some time for him to be able to do 
this. Moreover, since the materials employed were 
very scarce, he would be obliged to make a long jour- 
ney to another island in order to obtain them. 

When Mahinee heard this he was apparently much 
pleased, and informed Kaloro that he would give him 
several weeks to begin making such markings on such 
small portions of his body that had not yet been 
8o 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


covered, and added that he especially wished him to 
begin elaborate markings on his son Kooloo. 

When Charley heard this, for he had requested Mar- 
bonna to tell him what was being said, he remarked : 

“ Tell Kaloro that these markings are not tattoo- 
ings. They will only remain on the body for several* 
weeks.” 

It was evident, however, that Charley was not be- 
lieved. The men smiled in a superior manner, inti- 
mating that they understood that this was simply a 
desire on Charley’s part to keep the secret of this kind 
of work to himself. 

The boys now vainly endeavored to persuade Mahi- 
nee to order their clothes brought back to them. The 
chief, however, would not listen to this for a moment. 

“ Why should you cover up your beautiful bodies 
and thus prevent my people from seeing them.” 

Noting, however, that the boys were very uncom- 
fortable, Mahinee sent another messenger to his house 
who soon returned with two new breech-cloths. When 
the people saw that these cloths were of the royal 
pattern, they were greatly surprised. They knew that 
if the king placed them on the boys with his own hands, 
it would mean that he had thus adopted them into 
his family. In the age of chivalry, when a com- 
mander or emperor desired to confer titles of nobility 
on a subject for some brave act, he struck him with his 
sword and called him by some new name. Here, 
Mahinee publicly adopted the boys as his sons by in- 
vesting them with the royal breech-cloths. 

F 8i 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


They, therefore, carefully watched when Mahinee 
gravely beckoning the boys to him, fastened the girdle 
around their waists and a breech-cloth around their 
loins repeating the word “ taboo,'’ and then address- 
ing each boy as “ Charleyo Mahinee, Harealdo Mahi- 
nee.” Then, as if desirous of explaining to the boys 
what this meant, addressed his son as Kooloo Mahi- 
nee. 

“ What does the king mean, Marbonna,” inquired 
Charley, by calling me Charleyo Mahinee and Har- 
old, Harealdo Mahinee ? ” 

‘‘ It means that you, Charleyo, are Mahinee’s son ; 
and you, Harealdo, are also another Mahinee’s son.” 

“ And what does taboo mean ? ” persisted Charley. 

Evidently this was, in the eyes of Marbonna, a still 
greater honor than to be adopted into the family of the 
chief, for he exclaimed : 

“ Taboo means that now no one will dare hurt you. 
If people should hurt you while you are taboo the 
spirits would kill them.” 


82 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


CHAPTER VII 

The Grove of Breadfruit Trees 

Matters went pleasantly for the white boys for the 
next two or three weeks. They were rapidly learning 
the language of the savages and were able to call 
some common things by their right names, and even, to 
some extent, to ask such questions as would be apt to 
come up during everyday life. Their friendship with 
Kooloo was rapidly growing, and the three boys spent 
much of their time together. In addition, Charley and 
Harold were gradually becoming acquainted with some 
of the savages outside of the royal household. 

As far as they could see, Mahinee put no restraint 
whatever on them as to the parts of the valley they 
were free to visit. It either never seemed to enter 
Mahinee’s mind that the boys might wish to escape 
from the island, or if he did think of it, he promptly 
put it aside, since it would have certainly been a dif- 
ficult task to escape from the valley by scaling the 
almost precipitous walls that hemmed it in on nearly 
all sides. Indeed, although nothing had been said 
directly to the boys about the matter, they understood 
that Mahinee did not wish them to attempt to visit 
the coast by means of the path by which they had been 
brought into the valley. They therefore wisely re- 
frained from making such an effort. 

83 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


The three boys were fond of taking long walks. 
Some of these, indeed, were so long that Marbonna, 
who was a tolerably old man, found that they required 
an amount of energy he could not well afford to ex- 
pend. While it was certainly a great advantage to 
have Marbonna as an interpreter for explaining diffi- 
cult points in their conversation, they were now able 
fairly to understand one another, so that when Mar- 
bonna was not with them they managed to get along. 

The white boys had become fairly well acquainted 
with the vegetable products of the valley. Marbonna, 
who knew them all, appeared to take pleasure in ex- 
plaining the peculiarities of those with which they 
were not familiar, especially warning them about a 
number of poisonous vines, fruits, and nuts. Then too, 
Kooloo knew where to find the best oranges, bananas, 
pineapples, cocoanuts, and other delicious fruits that 
grew in great abundance and perfection in different 
parts of the valley. 

Among all these vegetable products there was none 
equal in importance as foods to the fruit of the won- 
derful breadfruit tree. This tree, which grew in great 
abundance and luxuriance in different parts of the val- 
ley, was especially splendid in appearance. Indeed, 
throughout nearly the entire year, it was not equaled in 
beauty and magnificence by any of the other trees. 

In its general outline, the breadfruit tree resembles 
the chestnut, but is far more beautiful. It frequently 
attains a great age, when, to some extent, it resembles 
the sturdy elm, so characteristic of our New England 
84 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 



The Breadfruit Tree 


8s 





IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


towns, not only in the spread of its branches, but 
also in its strong, stout limbs. Its oblong leaves are 
deeply lobed or scalloped. Toward the close of the 
growing season they begin to decay, passing through 
a series of changes of color that closely resemble the 
colors of the maples of the north temperate climatic 
zones in the fall of the year. In the case of the bread- 
fruit tree, however, these colors are far more beautiful 
and varied. 

What makes the breadfruit tree so valuable to the 
people of Polynesia is the extended period during 
which its ripe fruit can be gathered. From early in 
October, the beginning of the southern summer, for 
eight months in succession the fruit can be almost 
continuously obtained from the tree in a ripened con- 
dition. The fruit is round, having both the shape and 
size of an ordinary citron melon. Instead, however, 
of presenting like the melon stripes or sectional lines 
extending from the stem to the blossom end, its sur- 
face is covered with little knoblike irregularities. The 
fruit of the well-known osage orange, so common in 
many parts of the temperate zones, very closely re- 
sembles it externally. 

The fruit is covered with a rind about an eighth 
of an inch in thickness. With the exception of a 
core, about the size of an ordinary penknife, everything 
inside the rind forms excellent food. When stripped 
of its rind the ripe fruit presents the appearance of a 
beautiful globe of almost snow-white pulp. 

The breadfruit tree, also called the bread tree, fur- 

86 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


nishes excellent wood. Like the cocoanut palm, strong, 
durable cloth can be made from its fibers. 

Captain Cook in his “ Three Famous Voyages 
Around the World,” gives the following description of 
the breadfruit tree : 

‘‘ The breadfruit grows on a tree that is about the 
size of a midling oak. It leaves are frequently a foot 
and a half long, of an oblong shape, deeply sinuated 
(strongly lobed, with the margins alternately curved 
inward and outward), like those of the fig tree, which 
they resemble in consistence and color, and in the 
exuding of a white milky juice upon being broken. 
The fruit is about the shape and size of a young child’s 
head, and the surface is reticulated, not much unlike 
a truffle ; it is covered with a thin skin, and has a core 
about as big as the handle of a small knife. The eat- 
able part lies between the skin and the core. It is as 
white as snow, and somewhat of the consistence of 
new bread.” 

The breadfruit is unfit to eat until it has been 
exposed to the action of fire. There are various ways 
of preparing it for food ; but, perhaps, the most satis- 
factory method consists in roasting it, just as a potato 
is roasted in the embers of a hot fire. In this condi- 
tion the inside of the fruit can be easily scraped out 
by a spoon. In the opinion of some travelers the taste 
of the roasted breadfruit is not unlike that of the 
crumb of wheaten bread when mixed with potatoes 
mashed with milk. While some speak of its taste 
as rather insipid, yet Alfred Russel Wallace, the well- 

87 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


known naturalist, gives the following account of the 
breadfruit that he first saw on the island of Amboyna : 

“ Here I enjoyed a luxury I have never met with 
either before or since — the breadfruit. It is baked 
entire in hot embers, and the inside scraped out with a 
spoon. I compared it to Yorkshire pudding; others 
thought it was like mashed potatoes and milk. It is 
generally about the size of a melon, a little fibrous to- 
ward the center, but everywhere else quite smooth and 
puddingy, something between yeast dumplings and 
batter pudding. We sometimes made curry or stew of 
it, or fried it in slices; but it is in no way so good as 
simply baked. With meat and gravy it is a vegetable 
superior to any I know either in temperate or tropical 
countries. With sugar, milk, butter, or treacle, it is 
a delicious pudding, having a very slight and delicate 
but characteristic flavor, which like that of good bread 
and potatoes, one never gets tired of.” 

According to Captain Cook, the breadfruit tree 
does not begin to grow unless it is planted. It is, how- 
ever, by no means difflcult to raise it in this way; for 
if a man plants ten of these trees in his lifetime, which 
he can readily do in the space of about an hour, he 
will as completely fulfil his duty to his own and future 
generation as the natives of our less temperate climate 
can do by plowing in the cold of winter and reaping 
in the summer’s heat, as often as these seasons return ; 
even if, after he has procured bread for his present 
household, he should convert a surplus into money and 
lay it up for his children. It is true, indeed, that the 
88 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


breadfruit is not always in season, but cocoanuts, 
bananas, plaintains, and a great variety of other fruit, 
supply the deficiency.” 

Charley and Harold soon became skilled in roasting 
the breadfruit. Possibly this was because of the ex- 
perience each had during his school life in England or 
in Australia, when they sometimes built fires when 
out on a picnic and roasted potatoes. Or it may have 
arisen by means of the still later experience they had 
on Harding Island in roasting yams, a tuber not un- 
like a big sweet potato. There was, to them, a fascina- 
tion in watching the breadfruit, after its rind had been 
nicely browned by the fire, burst, permitting them to 
see through the cracks, the delicate white starchy ma- 
terial in the interior. 

A somewhat similar method of preparing the fruit 
is as follows: About the end of the eighth month, 
when the trees are laden with ripe fruit, the harvest 
of breadfruit is gathered, the fruit placed in large 
wooden vessels after it has been stripped of its 
bark. Here it is subjected to a vigorous beating with 
a large stone pestle. The beating reduces the fruit 
to the consistency of dough. It is then wrapped in 
separate parcels in leaves, tied together with thongs 
of bark, and carefully stowed away in pots in the 
earth, where it is kept until wanted for use. Prepared 
in this manner, breadfruit forms what is called ‘Hutao.” 
In this form it can be kept for years without spoiling. 
Indeed, in the opinion of many, the flavor of the 
article greatly improves with age. This, however, is 
89 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


not saying much, since it should be remembered that in 
the opinion of many civilized people, especially in 
America, Germany, and England, the taste or flavor 
of cheese is actually believed to greatly improve after 
it has been kept for several years. 

Before tutao can be eaten it must undergo the 
following cooking process. A stone oven is built in 
the ground; that is, a number of large stones are 
placed in the hole and a fire kindled on them. As soon 
as the stones become highly heated the embers are 
withdrawn, and a layer of leaves placed on the stones. 
A package of tutao is then placed in the oven and 
completely covered with another layer of leaves. The 
oven is then closed and the tutao, when thoroughly 
baked, forms what is called “ amar,” which possesses 
a tart taste, and is not at all disagreeable in flavor. 

We have already referred in a previous chapter of 
this book to a variety of food product obtained from 
the breadfruit tree called poee, poee.’^ This product 
is obtained by placing baked tutao in a vessel where 
it is mixed with water, producing as it does a liquid of 
a thick pudding-like consistency.^ 

But the breadfruit tree by no means furnished all 
the vegetable food products of the valley. There were 
other varieties of tropical vegetation, some of which 
bore ripe fruit during the season that the breadfruit 
tree was not bearing. An exceedingly important 
variety of such vegetable food products was found in 
different species of bananas and plantains. These 

1 See Appendix, “ Breadfruit Tree.” 

90 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


plants are of very rapid growth. A shaft or stem rises 
to the height of fifteen or twenty feet, with a diameter 
sometimes as great as two feet. This stalk is formed 
of sheathlike leaf-stalks rolled over one another, ter- 
minating in light-green glossy blades ten feet or more 
in length, and two feet in breadth. Their tissue is so 
delicate that they are split by even a gentle wind. A 
stout foot-stalk, springing from the center of the leaf, 
and bending over on one side of the trunk, supports 
clusters of flowers, and eventually a great weight of 
several hundred plantains or bananas, about the size 
and shape of full-grown cucumbers. 

All this growth is reached in less than a year; for 
each shaft produces its fruit but once a year, when it 
withers and dies. New shoots spring forth from the 
root, and before the year is past reach their full height 
and bear fruit. 

It will be seen, therefore, that the banana, or plan- 
tain, like the breadfruit tree, when once planted, con- 
tinues to produce food year after year, although in 
the case of either of them, it is not the old tree that 
produces fruit, but a new stalk that springs every year 
from the fruit of the parent stalk. Humboldt states 
that since a single bunch of bananas will frequently 
weigh as much as from sixty to seventy pounds, an 
area of ground large enough to produce thirty-three 
pounds of wheat, or ninety-nine pounds of potatoes, 
will produce as much as four thousand pounds of 
bananas.^ 


1 See Appendix, “ Plantains.’ 


91 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


As in the lower islands of Polynesia, so on the Island 
of Captivity, the cocoanut palm formed an exceedingly 
valuable food product. Like the breadfruit tree, ripe 
cocoanuts could be obtained at almost any time through 
the entire year. The tree continues to blossom and to 
bear, and can almost always be counted on to produce 
every grade of fruit, from the dead-ripe nut to the 
opening blossoms. 

They had not lived long on the island before they 
discovered the fact that the people, indisposed as they 
were to labor would, nevertheless, refuse to eat the 
nuts that might happen to fall from the trees. On the 
contrary, many of them were quite particular as to 
the proper time for plucking the fruit. Moreover, 
even the green and unripe fruit producing, as it does, 
a very agreeable liquid, was plucked or left on the 
tree according to the particular kind of food it was 
desired to obtain. It was curious to note at a feast 
how the principal men selected a number of the cocoa- 
nuts that had been plucked and, placing them near 
them, sipped the liquid they contained, just as one 
might see in a more civilized country connoisseurs sip 
samples from a number of different bottles of wine 
in order to determine what particular flavor was the 
most agreeable. 

The wonderful fertility of the valley was a source of 
constant surprise to the white boys, especially to Har- 
old, who had lived in the cold temperate part of the 
world. The fact that the people of the valley had an 
abundance of delicious and varied food products pro- 
92 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


duced for them without any other labor than practically 
that of plucking it, was a source of constant astonish- 
ment. Remembering the hard and almost continuous 
labor that was necessary to enable the people of the cold 
temperate zones to force the ground to produce their 
food products, Harold thought that surely so favored a 
climate as that of the valley of the Island of Captivity 
should permit its inhabitants to reach a very high 
degree of civilization ; and yet, as he knew, it was far 
from being the case. The natives were generally good- 
natured, but were exceedingly lazy, and very unwilling 
to undertake hard work. 

I don’t understand how it is, Charley,” said Harold 
one day, “ that the people of the island are so little 
civilized. One would think that since they are not 
compelled to labor for their food, they would go on 
studying the wonderful things that are happening 
around them, and so become more civilized than the 
rest of the world. Why is it, Charley ? ” he con- 
tinued, “ that the inhabitants of the parts of the world 
where food grows without any help, people are so lazy 
and worthless? Can you explain it? ” 

‘‘ I think I can, Harold,” said Charley laughing. “ I 
remember once asking my father the reason for this. 
He told me that the most favorable conditions for 
progress among people was that in which a necessity 
existed for a reasonable amount of work, but in which 
time was permitted for the improvement of the mind. 
I remember his telling me that there were two parts of 
the world in which it was difficult for civilization to 
93 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


reach a very high stage. These were the tropics, where 
nature produced such an abundance of food, and in 
which the climate was so warm that the people were 
not obliged to expend much labor in obtaining their 
clothing. The other was in the polar regions, where 
it was so difficult to obtain food and clothing, that prac- 
tically all the time of the people was required for 
these purposes. He said that it was in the temperate 
zones, where nature was always ready to reward in- 
telligent labor expended either for obtaining materials 
for food or clothing, that the civilization was the most 
marked.” 

Don’t you think that’s funny, Charley ? ” replied 
Harold. 

I thought it was, Harold,” said Charley, but my 
father explained to me that we should not look on the 
necessity for working as an evil; that, on the con- 
trary, he was the more fortunate who was obliged 
to work, provided enough time was left to give him an 
opportunity to cultivate his mind.” 

It is not unlike the difference between very rich, 
very poor people, and people in moderate circum- 
stances,” said Harold, who had been thinking over 
what Charley had told him. 

“ What do you mean, Harold ? ” inquired Charley. 

“ I mean,” was the reply, ‘‘ that because a boy is 
born of very rich parents or, as it were ‘ with a silver 
spoon in his mouth,’ and knows that there has been put 
aside for him more than sufficient to permit him to 
lead his entire life in idleness, it is by no means certain 
94 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


that he will employ all his time for the improvement 
of his mind and will, therefore, become better educated 
and more highly developed than the children of other 
people. On the contrary, the chances are that he will 
grow up a good-for-nothing, worthless fellow, who 
spends nearly all his life in squandering the money 
that has been laid up for him by his parents.” 

‘‘ I guess that’s so,” said Charley laughing. “ I can 
remember hearing of the sons of many rich men who 
have gone to the bad, probably because they had been 
so unfortunate as to be born rich. 

And then,” continued Charley, “ father told me 
how almost impossible it was for the Eskimo and 
other inhabitants of the polar zones to make any ad- 
vance in civilization, because they were obliged to 
spend nearly all their time in obtaining food. Unless 
they worked hard to fill their stomachs and cover their 
backs they would either starve or freeze to death, and 
when this work was done they were too tired to do any- 
thing but sleep.” 

I understand now,” said Harold. It is the people 
in moderate circumstances, the betwixt and the be- 
tween, those who are neither very rich nor very poor, 
who are really the most favored.” 

“ Yes,” said Charley, “ that’s what father told me. 
The most civilized people in the world are the in- 
habitants of the temperate zones.” 

There was certainly one effect produced on the 
people by the abundance of food of the valley of the 
Island of Captivity; that is, the food was so plentiful 
95 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


and so easy to obtain that many of them were prodig- 
ious eaters. 

The following is related by Captain Cook in his first 
voyage around the world, and is interesting from the 
information it affords as to the character of the food 
the natives use and its immense quantity. 

“ Table they have none; but their apparatus for eat- 
ing is set out with great neatness, though the articles 
are too simple and too few to allow anything for show ; 
and they commonly eat alone; but when a stranger 
happens to visit them, he sometimes makes a second 
in their mess. . . 

‘‘ The quantity of food is prodigious ; I have seen 
one man devour two or three fishes as big as a perch ; 
three breadfruits, each bigger than two fists; four- 
teen or fifteen plantains or bananas, each of them six 
or seven inches long, and four or five round ; and near 
a quart of the pounded breadfruit, which is as sub- 
stantial as the thickest unbaked custard. This is so 
extraordinary that I scarcely expect to be believed; 
and I would not have related it upon my own single 
testimony, but Mr. Banks, Doctor Solander, and most 
of the other gentleman have had ocular demonstra- 
tion of its truth, and know that I mention them upon 
the occasion.” 


96 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


CHAPTER VIII 

Exploration of the River Valley and 
Mountain Peak 

The friendship between the Polynesian lad, Kooloo, 
and the two English lads rapidly increased, especially 
after Mahinee had practically adopted the former into 
his family; for, as Kooloo remarked, they were now 
half-brothers. 

Boys are pretty much the same in all parts of the 
world and, to a certain extent, are fond of practically 
the same things. It is true, the white-skinned lads 
had ideals that were entirely different from those of 
the brown-skinned boy. But there was a common 
ground in which the lads resembled one another, and 
that was the necessity that, existed for finding some 
direction in which they might, as it were, expend or 
blow off the excess of their physical energy. It is 
true that this excess is not so apt to manifest itself in 
the hotter parts of the world as it is in temperate 
lands. Nevertheless, Kooloo resembled the English 
lads in that, like them, he was fond of violent exercise, 
although to a far less extent. 

One day, when taking a swim, Charley turning to 
Kooloo, said, through Marbonna: 

Kooloo, would you like us to show you a game 
G 97 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


the boys play in England and other parts of the world 
where the white people live ? ” 

‘‘ Kooloo like much to see it,” was the reply. 

“ Harold,” said Charley, let’s show Kooloo how 
to play leapfrog.” 

The boys had been in swimming in the river in 
company with Marbonna, and the above conversation 
had taken place when they had come out of the river 
and before they had dressed. Harold readily agreed 
to play leapfrog with Charley, so he stood erect, with 
the exception of bending his head, when Charley, 
placing his hands on Harold’s shoulders, vaulted over 
his head in the manner well known to the boys of 
the temperate zones. As soon as Charley had made 
this vault he ran forward a short distance, and then, 
bending his head while standing erect, permitted Har- 
old in turn to vault over his shoulders, who again 
repeated the act for Charley, and so on. 

It did not take Kooloo long to understand the 
new game, and soon he was joining merrily in the 
exercise. 

Most savages are not unlike children in that they 
are apt to imitate to a considerable degree what 
they see done. When the old man Marbonna saw 
the sport, he joined in it with great earnestness. In- 
deed, he played the game so well that he not only sur- 
prised the lads but also himself. He was an old 
warrior, and had been trained to athletic exercise 
in his youth. 

As already stated, the boys were fond of taking long 

98 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


walks. It was while on these rambles that they not 
only became more attached to one another, but rapidly 
learned each other’s language. 

The mountains which stood at the end of the 
valley, near the headwaters of the river that flowed 
through it, were especially attractive to both Charley 
and Harold. They felt shut in, and wished to climb 
to some commanding height, so as to get a view 
of the surrounding ocean, and thus gain better ideas 
of the geography of the district. Then too, believing 
their friends would be looking for them, they wished 
occasionally to be able to scan the ocean so as to see 
whether or not they were coming. They, therefore, 
planned to interest Kooloo in an excursion to the 
head of the valley, and possibly to the summit of one 
of the mountain peaks, that they could clearly see 
towering far up above the headwaters of the river that 
drained their valley. 

It should be remembered that for some time past 
the boys had been scantily clad, with practically only 
the royal girdle and the breech-cloth that had been 
put on them when Mahinee adopted them into the 
royal family. The exposure to the hot tropical sun 
was beginning to raise blisters on the more delicate 
portions of their skin, so that Mahinee, although re- 
luctantly, had been persuaded to permit them again to 
wear the clothes they had on when carried away from 
Harding Island. 

Wishing to interest Marbonna in an expedition 
to the headwaters of the river, Charley asked him 
99 : 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


whether he had ever seen a variety of mineral or 
stone that had sharp cutting edges like the knife 
Charley carried in his pocket. Marbonna informed 
him that he had heard of such minerals but had never 
seen them, and wished to know if they resembled the 
pieces of quartz they sometimes employed for the 
hatchets or spear-heads. 

Then,” said Charley, ‘‘ if you’ll go with us to the 
mountain I will show you pieces of such stones.” 

“How you know?” inquired Marbonna. “You 
never been there. Ridiculous to tell me you find 
stones.” 

“ We’ll find them all right,” said Charley, “ if we 
only go there.” So he then asked Marbonna whether 
he thought Mahinee would permit an excursion to be 
made. He also took the first opportunity he had of 
asking Kooloo whether he would like to go with them 
and explore the headwaters; so between them it was 
agreed that Mahinee should be asked to give them his 
permission. 

Instead of objecting to the proposed excursion, 
Mahinee appeared much pleased at the opportunity 
for placing his young son in command of an explor- 
ing party, for as Marbonna had intimated to Charley, 
he was unwilling to permit the boys to go unaccom- 
panied by men. 

At first Marbonna, feeling that the exercise would 
be too much for him, had thought of remaining in 
the village; but when the preparations were being 
made, and the number of men who wished to ac- 
lOO 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


company the expedition proved to be so great that 
Mahinee was obliged to limit them, he changed his 
mind and determined to go along. He was all the 
more willing to do this because, although it was possi- 
ble to make the journey in about one day, it was deter- 
minded to take plenty of time. Indeed, they expected it 
would probably be a week or more before they returned. 

When one of the purposes of the expedition was 
explained, namely, that Charley expected to be able 
to find a kind of stone with cutting edges better than 
those of the teeth of the shark, or of sharpened pieces 
of iron, Mahinee smiled incredulously at the thought 
of his being able to find this curious kind of mineral 
product on a mountain on which he certainly never 
had been. When, however, Mahinee was assured by 
some of the men who had visited distant islands that 
they had seen such stones, and that, moreover, they 
possessed the properties that Charley had claimed for 
them, Mahinee was all the more willing to let them 
go. He reasoned that it would be good experience 
for his son to take complete command of an expedition ; 
that an advantage would be gained whether the stones 
were found or not, while if such stones were found, 
the honor of their discovery would of course be given 
principally to the leader of the expedition. 

The party left early the next morning, and made 
its way along the bank of the river. During this 
journey, they had opportunity of making a closer ex- 
amination of some of the fruit trees and other vege- 
table products of the island. 

lOI 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


When they encamped ior the night they erected a 
makeshift hut consisting of a rude framework of 
bamboo, covered with a thatched roof of cocoanut 
leaves. The men had brought with them a number 
of mats, which they spread over the surface of a low 
pile of stones they had found, and on which the hut 
had been erected. 

Although the days in tropical regions are very 
warm, yet the nights are sometimes quite cold. A 
fire they had kindled for the baking of the fruit of 
the breadfruit tree was therefore kept up during the 
night. Before retiring, the men sat around it telling 
stories, which Marbonna would occasionally translate. 
They also sang songs, in which they were joined by 
the boys, who at their request also sang several of their 
songs. 

A musical instrument played on by one of the men 
especially attracted the attention of the boys by the 
curious manner in which its notes were produced. 
This instrument consisted of a piece of hollow bam- 
boo with holes opening through one of the sides, and 
which in form exactly resembled a flute. Instead, 
however, of being operated by air blown from the 
mouth, its notes were produced by means of air 
blown from one of the nostrils. It was held in front of 
the left nostril, the right one being closed by contrac- 
tion, and the music produced by air blown from the 
open nostril. It was at best, however, but a poor 
apology for music. 

Now it happened that both Charley and Harold 

;I02 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


could play very well on the fife, and had been accus- 
tomed to do this while on Harding Island. So obtain- 
ing two pieces of bamboo, and cutting openings in 
the side both for the mouth and the fingers, they were 
soon able to make excellent fifes. When this was 
done and the two boys commenced playing on them, 
the effect produced on the natives was almost magical. 
The boys played well and, moreover, played stirring 
dance music. Before long the entire company, with the 
exception of the players, was enjoying a lively dance 
near the fire. Kooloo was especially pleased with the 
new musical instrument, although when he first tried 
to produce musical sounds on the one Charley had 
made for himself, he was unable to do so. On being 
shown, however, how to do it, he was soon able to pro- 
duce varied shrill tones. 

When Charley and Harold awoke next morning 
they found Kooloo still asleep on the mat next to 
theirs. He had apparently not changed his position 
from the time they had turned in for the night. 

All the men had left the hut in order to prepare 
breakfast, and soon they came to tell the boys to come 
and eat. Kooloo started directly for the place where 
the food was waiting for him. To his great surprise, 
Charley and Harold first went down to the stream 
alongside of which they had built their hut and com- 
menced washing their faces and hands. This pro- 
ceeding greatly surprised the savages, who at first 
believed it was some kind of religious worship. When 
Kooloo, desirous of knowing just what it meant, looked 
103 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


at the boys and said something which as well as they 
could understand meant “Why wash?” Charley re- 
plied : 

“ Dirty hands and mouth spoil good food,” which 
when Kooloo and the others heard, they laughed aloud 
as if it was a great joke. 

That first breakfast on what might be called a 
savage picnic or expedition was a wonderful success. 
To begin with, there was an abundance of roasted 
breadfruit. The ripe fruit had been buried in the 
glowing embers of the fire until the browned rind had 
burst, thus showing the tempting snow-white interior 
ready to be eaten. Then there were plenty of cocoa- 
nuts, bored to permit their refreshing milk-like juice 
to be sucked out readily. There was also a variety of 
fruits, bananas, plantains, juicy oranges, together with 
a few pineapples, and some other specimens of the 
fruits of the island that they had never before seen, but 
which they found to be quite delicious. 

If the savages had failed to show good habits of 
washing before eating, they certainly set the white boys 
an example after meals; for instead of instantly start- 
ing off they quietly rested for half an hour, Marbonna 
explaining this act by saying: 

“No hurry. Plenty time. Bad to walk after eat- 
ing. Make belly ache.” 

After half an hour’s rest they continued leisurely up 
the river valley, and toward evening they came to a 
place where three separate streams poured their waters 
into the main river channel. 

104 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


Pointing to the three streams, Kooloo, turning to 
Charley, inquired which of the three he wished to 
ascend. 

They were now far enough up the valley to be able 
to see all three mountain peaks. Noting that the 
central stream apparently came down from one side of 
the central peak, and that this peak terminated in an 
especially conelike elevation as if had once formed the 
crater of a volcano, Charley indicated that that was the 
mountain he wished to examine. Crossing the stream 
that discharged into the main stream from the right, 
they were soon walking slowly up its banks. 

They were now a considerable distance above the 
level of the lower part of the valley. As they climbed 
higher they observed a marked change in the character 
of the vegetation. Instead of the rich vegetation 
through which they had passed, the trees and shrubs 
on the side of the mountain began to resemble those 
of the warm temperate regions of the earth. Among 
other things, they found growing in the soil a number 
of running vines on which excellent cantaloups were 
growing. These, Marbonna told them, were good for 
both food and drink. When evening came, and they 
had erected another hut for the night, the man with the 
nose-flute again produced his lugubrious notes, but the 
men appeared greatly to prefer the brisker, shriller, 
and livelier music of the boys’ fifes; for they greatly 
enjoyed dancing to this music. 

The boys had reason to be pleased with the fact that 
Mahinee had permitted them to put on the clothes 

105 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


that had been taken from them when they had been 
adopted into the royal family. During the night the 
air was quite cold, so that Kooloo was pleased to sleep 
cuddled up between the two boys. Besides keeping 
up a good fire all night, the men slept close to one 
another in order to keep warm. 

After breakfast and a short rest they were able 
to see the summit of the mountain ; for, on the preced- 
ing evening, before they had built their hut, the higher 
slopes had been obscured by a heavy mist. 

‘‘ Charley,” said Harold, as they were examining 
the peak toward which they were climbing, that is 
just the appearance of the conical peak that Uncle 
Arthur pointed out to Jack and myself when we were 
looking at some of the mountains of the Aleutian Island 
Chain. He said conical peaks generally show that a 
mountain is a volcano. I believe the mountain ahead 
of us is volcanic.” 

I think it is,” said Charley; ‘‘and, indeed, I 
thought so yesterday, and have assured Marbonna 
and Kooloo, as you probably know, that we will be 
able to find on the summit some of the kind of lava 
which, cooling rapidly, produces a stone not unlike 
glass.” 

“Yes,” said Harold, “I remember. It’s called 
obsidian or volcanic glass. Do you think we can find 
some on the mountain ? ” 

“If the mountain is volcanic, and there have been 
any large lava flows, we are almost sure to find it. 
When certain kinds of lava cool quickly they almost 
io6 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


always form this material. Besides, if the lava beds 
have been exposed to the air and rain for some time, 
I think there are good chances that some of these 
masses have split into pieces with sharp, cutting edges. 
I hope so, anyhow,” he added. '' If we should fail to 
find this material the men will think less of me than 
they do now, and that, of course, we cannot afford.” 

They were now within a quarter of a mile of the 
base of the central cone. The slopes of the mountain 
were quite steep, and the walking difficult. Marbonna 
wished to persuade Kooloo to give orders that the ex- 
pedition should go no farther. Being unable to do 
this, he turned to Charley and said : 

Heap work walking. Marbonna much tired. We 
go plenty far enough. Why you wish go higher ? ” 

‘‘To get the knife-stones,” said Charley. “ Knife- 
stones not much higher up. At least,” he added in a 
low tone, turning to Harold, “ I hope they’re not.” 

Marbonna clearly intimated his belief that Charley 
was only fooling him. 

“ You never on this mountain before. How you 
know there are knife-stones? Marbonna no believe in 
knife-stones. He wait here.” 

Kooloo, turning to Charley, asked whether he 
wished to go higher. 

“ Oh, yes,” said Charley. “ Mahinee, the great 
chief, told us to bring knife-stones,” and knowing this 
to be true, Kooloo, who greatly wished to be able to 
take something home that his father had never seen 
before, ordered a few of the men to remain with Mar- 
107 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


bonna. He was quite willing to show the authority he 
had over the expedition, and seeing that the men were 
somewhat discouraged by the steep slope up which they 
were to go, and were beginning to murmur, he com- 
manded them in a stern voice to follow him and the 
boys up the mountain and say nothing more about it. 
This they did without any further objections, for they 
feared the displeasure of Mahinee should he learn they 
had dared to question the commands of his son. 

As they climbed higher and higher on the mountain 
slopes they obtained more and more unquestioned 
signs of its volcanic nature. They could now see the 
ashes that formed the slopes of the ash cone and, more- 
over, could clearly trace places where several lava 
streams had undoubtedly flowed down the mountain 
a long time ago. The mountain was evidently an 
extinct volcano. There were no signs whatever of 
smoke or vapor escaping from its top. 

'' It will be in one of these lava streams, Charley,” 
said Harold, that we will find the volcanic glass, if we 
find it at all. Let us carefully examine the different 
parts of the lava stream.” 

You’re quite right, Harold,” answered Charley. 

Let us keep a close lookout.” 

They were engaged in this search for over half an 
hour. To the men who accompanied them it seemed 
very foolish. Kooloo, however, still maintained his 
interest, and every now and then said to Charley : 

Kooloo hope you find knife-stone. Much like to 
take it home and show great chief Mahinee.” 
io8 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


Most of the lava they saw consisted of masses that 
had apparently cooled slowly, and were therefore de- 
void of anything like a gfesslike structure. At last, 
however, when they were almost ready to give up the 
search, they were delighted at finding a place where the 
lava had not only cooled quickly, and thus formed 
masses of fairly clear volcanic glass, but that in places 
these masses had been fractured into long slender 
pieces provided with sharp, cutting edges. The color 
of these bits of glass was mostly of a dark black, 
but some were of a greenish, brownish, or even of a 
reddish color. 

Kooloo and the two white boys, collecting several 
fragments of the volcanic glass, took it to Marbonna. 
He was not only greatly pleased but became excited, 
and asked to be taken to the place from which this 
material had been obtained, so that not only Marbonna 
and the boys, but also all the members of the expedition 
were soon searching eagerly for the sharp knifelike 
pieces of glass. 

Exclamations of wonderment and delight were con- 
stantly heard as piece after piece of the valuable ma- 
terial was obtained, and under Marbonna’s directions 
a considerable pile of the mineral was placed in a heap, 
where it was guarded by several of the men. 


109 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


CHAPTER IX 

A New Way of Starting a Fire 

“ Charley/" said Harold, ‘‘ I remember once that 
Uncle Arthur told Jack and me that in the Aleutian 
Islands the natives were able to kindle fires by placing 
a mixture of finely powdered sulphur, or brimstone, 
and dried moss, or feathers, on the surface of any hard 
stone. That when, in this condition, the stone is struck 
a hard blow by a piece of stone hard enough to make 
sparks, the sparks will set fire to the sulphur, which in 
its turn would ignite the moss or feathers, thus pro- 
ducing a flame.” 

That’s a jolly idea, Harold,” said Charley. “ Let’s 
climb to the top of the cone and see if we can find some 
bits of sulphur. You know we intended to ascend the 
cone so as to get a view of the ocean surrounding the 
island, and thus gain some idea as to the position of 
the surrounding islands. I’m a little afraid that Koo- 
loo, who is so excited about the discovery of the knife- 
stone, may wish to turn back at once, as he is .so anx- 
ious to let his father and the people in the valley 
know of our success. Now, if I can persuade him that 
there is perhaps an even more wonderful discovery 
to be made on the top of the mountain, it will be 
well to do so. 


no 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


As Charley had feared, Kooloo was not very en- 
thusiastic about climbing the cone ahead, but when 
Charley assured him that there was probably a still 
more wonderful discovery to be made on the top of the 
cone, he was anxious to visit it, and ordered some of 
his men to accompany them, while the others were com- 
manded to increase the collection of knife-stones. 

It was only after a hard climb of nearly an hour 
that they were able to gain the top. In some places the 
ashes were so loose that they occasionally slid back in a 
few seconds a distance that had taken them many 
minutes to climb. At last, however, they reached the 
summit, where they were more than repaid for their 
severe exertions by the beautiful sight that lay spread 
out before them. At their feet lay the valley they had 
left, and here and there they could see the river that 
wound in a crooked channel toward the ocean. 

They could now see another valley immediately to 
the west of the valley they had left, which appeared to 
be covered with a vegetation quite as luxuriant as that 
of their own. 

Turning to Kooloo, Charley inquired as well as he 
could whether people lived in those valleys. Kooloo 
replied : 

Heap bad men live there. If catch you and me, 
maybe cook and eat us.” 

But it was the view of the ocean thus afforded them 
that pleased Charley and Harold the most. From the 
summit of the cone they saw the open ocean in nearly 
all directions. Moreover, a number of other islands 


III 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


could be seen, especially to the north and northwest of 
them, all of which were of the same mountainous 
character as the Island of Captivity in which they then 
were. Some of these islands were, moreover, of much 
greater size. 

It is needless to say that they scanned the horizon^ 
anxiously for any signs of a boat propelled by oars. 
Of course, even if such a boat had been near the island, 
their distance from the ocean would probably have 
prevented their seeing it at all. 

The cone on which they were standing undoubtedly 
marked an extinct volcanic crater. Although its outer 
slopes were very steep, yet its inner opposite slopes were 
almost precipitous, extending abruptly down several 
hundred feet to the surface of a lake that partially 
filled the old crater. 

They now began carefully to search the edge of the 
crater, and at last were successful in finding fairly 
large quantities of crystallized sulphur. Turning with 
a smiling face to Kooloo, Charley now informed him 
that they would be able to take back to the village 
something far more wonderful than the sharp knife- 
stones. 

Greatly pleased, Kooloo ordered the men to bring 
some of the yellow stones with them, when they started 
down the cone and rejoined Marbonna. 

Marbonna was curious to know what Charley ex- 
pected to do with the yellow stones that they showed 
him with so much satisfaction. Charley simply an- 
swered by saying: 


II2 



“ They now began carefully to 
edge of the crater ” 


search 

Page 


the 

II2 



• :*i?Vf • ?i t \ i !$\ : * iX 



i- 



(?t^ . 

,» j . - f • ♦ 






^^, 1 ..-..^. 'jX.' ‘ '^'^IkSrS 

. »■ f ■ .•■' *7 • 



•>5 




‘»-f 


V 










fj'" V 



U' -aa ^ ^ ^ 

’■l-' '.'•. ' ' • rt .■^' ■ -1 

^ r ’ 




^ ^ 

* > «i 



A 'v 


* ^ ‘/ > 
•‘'lit 


^ - 


* ♦ *f^ ^ ♦ 

“Tj* iS/ r\‘ ‘ ‘I*' :' y- 


^ ^ ^ ^ 'R 

• «£•« « 


■■ •'■ 




. L- *i^ *®Hnt -H 

t!^ '■■■:■ ■ 

7 « « 

• • b « 



IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


“ Bring me some very dry moss or dead leaves that 
will burn easily, and I will show you.” 

Marbonna answered : 

“ Not now. Maybe Marbonna bring them to-mor- 
row morning.” That night, which they spent in the 
hut near the base of the mountain they had formerly 
used for night quarters, the boys found a large flat 
stone formed mainly of quartz and very hard. They 
next obtained a pebble so hard that, when used to 
strike a glancing blow against the other stone, pro- 
duced bright sparks. 

Next morning, after breakfast, Marbonna handed to 
Charley a quantity of very dry moss, which had been 
dead for a long while and daily exposed to the hot 
tropical sun. It was just the material that Charley 
needed : 

“ Now, Marbonna,” he said, Fll show you what 
we can do with the yellow stones.” 

Reducing some of the sulphur to a fine powder, Char- 
ley spread a thin layer of the dried moss over the stone, 
and then scattered some of the sulphur-dust over it. 

Kooloo, Marbonna, and all the savages crowded 
around to see what new piece of magic the white lad 
was about to show them. Taking the smaller bit of 
hard stone in his hand, Charley struck a strong, scra- 
ping blow, like striking a match, against the stone that 
was partially covered with the moss and sulphur. 
Sparks of fire flew out and, igniting the sulphur, set 
fire to the moss, so that a fire was soon burning on 
the stone. 


H 


113 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


The natives, who saw the fire thus kindled in a 
manner so much better than that in which they had 
been accustomed to kindle it, were almost wild with 
delight, and now more than ever looked on Charley 
as a necromancer or magician of the highest type. 
Nor was it surprising that this method of kindling fire 
so greatly excited them. Beyond any question the 
most severe work any of them were obliged to perform 
on the Island of Captivity was that required for 
kindling a fire. Indeed, it is very difficult for one from 
a civilized nation thoroughly to appreciate the great 
boon that has been conferred on mankind by the in- 
vention of the ordinary lucifer match. A sliver of 
wood, covered at one end with its highly combustible 
tipping, struck briskly on a rough surface bursts into 
flame. 

It was quite otherwise with the natives of the Island 
of Captivity. The method of kindling a fire not only 
required excessive but, moreover, highly skilled labor. 
It consisted in briskly rubbing two pieces of wood to- 
gether until the heat produced by friction was suffi- 
ciently great to ignite the fine wood-dust so obtained. 
The work is hard and fairly long. The following de- 
scription is taken from Melville’s book on Typee,” 
in which an excellent description is given of life among 
the Polynesians. According to this account, the match- 
box of the Polynesian house or hut consists of a 
straight, dry, and partially rotten log of the habiscus 
tree. This log is about six feet in length, and three or 
four inches in diameter, and together with a smaller 
114 


i 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


piece of a harder wood, about a foot in length and 
rather less than an inch in width, forms one of the most 
important belongings of the people of the house. 

In employing the apparatus, the log is rested with 
one end against some firm object at an angle of about 
45° In order to obtain a fire from it, one strides the 
log like an urchin about to gallop off on a cane. 
Grasping the smaller stick in both hands, he rubs its 
pointed end slowly up and down the log for a few 
inches, until at last he makes a narrow groove in the 
wood with an abrupt ending at the point farthest 
from him, where the fine dusty particles produced by 
the friction collect in a little heap. 

At first the person works quite leisurely, but, quo- 
ting the language of Melville, he 
Gradually quickens his pace, and waxing warm 
in the employment he drives the stick furiously along 
the smoking channel, plying his hands to and fro with 
amazing rapidity, the perspiration starting from every 
pore. As he approaches the climax of his effort he 
pants and gasps for breath, and his eyes almost start 
from their sockets with the violence of his exertions. 
This is the critical stage of the operation; all his pre- 
vious labors are vain if he cannot sustain the rapidity 
of the movement until the reluctant spark is produced. 
Suddenly he stops, become perfectly motionless. His 
hands still retain their hold of the smaller stick, which 
is pressed convulsively against the further end of the 
channel among the fine powder there accumulated, as 
if he had just pierced through and through some little 
IIS 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


viper that was wriggling and struggling to escape 
from his clutches. The next moment a delicate wreath 
of smoke curls spirally into the air, the heap of dusty 
particles glows with fire, and almost breathless he dis- 
mounts from his steed.” 

We repeat, therefore, it is not surprising that Mar- 
bonna and the other men, who saw this experiment, 
manifested surprise and pleasure at the wonderful 
device at which they were now looking. 

Kooloo was delighted beyond measure. He would 
not only have the great pleasure of bearing in triumph 
the pieces of knife-stone to his father and the other 
chiefs, but he would have this other piece of magic to 
show them that was so great a labor-saver. 

But with all this astonishment, there was something 
that Marbonna, Kooloo, and the other savages could 
not understand. How was it possible that the young 
white magician could know that these two wonderful 
things — the knife-stone and the yellow stone^^ould 
be found far up on the slopes of a mountain on which 
they were sure he had never been before? There 
seemed something so mysterious about it that they 
began to stand in awe of one who could do such magic 
things. 

That evening after supper several of the men began 
chipping pieces off the obsidian, or volcanic glass, so as 
to form them roughly into shapes suitable for the ends 
of spears, and had already begun the manufacture of 
this weapon with the glass points in place of iron or 
sharks’ teeth, commonly employed. Then by setting 
ii6 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


smaller pieces on the side near the head these pieces, 
inclining downward, away from the head, they pro- 
duced a weapon capable of causing a horrible wound. 
Such a weapon when striking the body, or when thrust 
into it, could make its way readily through the soft 
flesh, but when an attempt was made to pull it out, pr 
if while still in the hands of the savage who had thrust 
it, it should be given a to-and-fro movement, would 
produce horrible lacerations of the flesh. 

There was great excitement in the village when the 
expedition returned to Mahinee’s house and showed 
him the great quantity of wonderful cutting-stones 
they had brought with them, and especially the new 
form of spears they had made. The warriors thor- 
oughly understood the advantages these weapons 
would give them over their enemies. Mahinee made 
many inquiries as to the amount of material that could 
be obtained, and he and his chiefs examined the weap- 
ons with great interest. He then divided among his 
chiefs the material that had been brought, and again 
made inquiries as to whether any more of the material 
was to be obtained. 

Nothing had yet been said to Mahinee concerning 
the wonderful use to which the yellow stone could be 
put. Marbonna, then calling attention to this material, 
entered into a long explanation of its wonderful and 
magic use by the young white lad. When they under- 
stood this, they were greatly pleased to learn how 
readily a fire could be started. Mahinee motioned to 
Charley to show him how this could be done. The 
117 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


heavy stone they had employed at the base of the 
mountain was then brought into the house, and placed 
on the ground where it was covered with a thin layer 
of dried moss and powdered sulphur. Again Charley 
went through the process of starting a fire by striking 
the stone. The astonishment manifested by Mahinee 
and his chiefs was even more marked than had been 
manifested by Kooloo, Marbonna, and their party 
when first seen on the side of the mountain. Mahinee 
made careful inquiries as to the amount of this material 
on the mountain, and entering into a long conversation 
with his chiefs, the conclusion was soon reached that 
a second expedition should be sent out next morning 
in order to obtain large supplies of these very valuable 
materials. 

Mahinee was not only pleased with the results ob- 
tained, but what especially delighted him was that these 
results had been reached in an expedition that had been 
placed in the full command of his son and, although he 
recognized the fact that it was to Charley and Harold 
that the credit of the discovery was due, yet he was 
pleased that his son should have played so marked a 
part in it. 

But if Marbonna had been surprised at Charley’s 
being able to lead them to a place on the mountain 
which he had never ascended, where both of these 
materials could be found, the more intelligent Mahinee 
and his chiefs were still more puzzled. This certainly 
was magic, and magic of a much higher order than 
any they had ever before seen. Again, to the great 
ii8 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


advantage of the boys, the chiefs began to regard 
them as priests or magicians of an exalted order and, 
therefore, as beings with whom it would be well worth 
their while to remain on good terms. 

The second expedition was made with twice the 
number of men. Mahinee assumed the command. 
They did not loiter so much this time, but covered the 
entire distance in little over one day. Indeed, had they 
so wished they could even have made it in a shorter 
time. As regards the volcanic glass, as we shall see 
later, they were successful in finding a deposit contain- 
ing large quantities of fragments of the material of a 
far higher quality than those obtained by the party 
under the boys. 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


CHAPTER X 
Kaloro Makes Trouble 

The second expedition determined on by Mahinee set 
out early the next morning. Nearly all the people of 
the valley had heard of the wonders of the previous 
expedition. So many wished to accompany them that 
if all had gone it would almost have half-depopulated 
the valley. Mahinee wisely put an end to this by de- 
creeing that only the two white boys and his son 
Rooloo, together with about fifty selected warriors, 
should be permitted to form the party which he himself 
would command. 

In order properly to protect the deposits of knife- 
stone and the sulphur or, as they called it, the fire- 
stone, the priest Acharto together with a few associate 
priests were to accompany the expedition, in order to 
determine, after consultation with Mahinee, whether 
it would be best to place some kind of a taboo on the 
mountain that would prevent the common people from 
visiting it, or whether it might not be preferable to 
insure this protection in some other manner. 

Kaloro, the chief tattooer, also formed one of the 
party. It was not, as the boys suspected and after- 
ward found to be the case, because he cared to see 
the curious minerals that were to be obtained near the 
top of the mountain, but because he wished to be near 
120 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


the boys so as to try to persuade them to disclose the 
secret of the tattooing process. As already stated, 
Mahinee, Kaloro, and indeed all the men, were con- 
vinced that the peculiar markings on the bodies of the 
white lads were the result of an entirely novel method 
of tattooing. 

Harold,” said Charley, on the morning the expe- 
dition left, look out for Kaloro.” 

“ Why do you say that, Charley ? ” asked Harold 
in surprise. 

Because,” replied Charley, he is in a hole. You 
remember when Mahinee asked him to examine what 
he believed to be a new kind of tattooing on our bodies, 
Kaloro pretended to understand how to produce it, 
and was commanded by Mahinee to begin this tattoo- 
ing on Kooloo and himself within a certain time. 
Now, he believes that if we permit him to tattoo our 
bodies we will teach him this secret method. He is, 
therefore, almost crazy to begin; for the time he 
promised to start the work on Mahinee and Kooloo is 
almost up. He never meets me but he at once en- 
deavors to persuade me to let him begin work.” 

“ But, good gracious, Charley,” exclaimed Harold, 
“ should he once put those horrible markings on our 
faces we would never dare to go and live with decent 
people should we ever have the chance. Tm sure I 
would be ashamed to walk through the streets with 
such markings on me. I say,” he continued, “ don’t 
you suppose the doctors could do something to remove 
them from our faces should they ever get there? ” 

121 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


I believe not, Harold,” was the reply. You know 
the way in which boys put what they call ' beauty 
spots ’ on their arms and hands.” 

“ Do you mean,” inquired Harold, “ by tracing let- 
ters or figures on the skin with India ink, and then 
pricking them with a needle so as to pierce the skin, 
and thus let some of the ink leak in a short distance? ” 
'' That’s what I mean,” replied Charley. “ As you 
know, it produces a blue mark that will remain on 
the body as long as the person lives.” 

I know that very well,” said Harold; ‘‘ I remember 
one day the father of one of my boy friends, in Eng- 
land, showed me a piece of tattooing he had placed on 
the back of his hand twenty years ago, when he was a 
lad. The tattooing consisted of a woman’s face with 
the initials of his name, H. A. W., in letters fully half 
an inch in length, so that the face and letters almost 
completely covered the back of his hand. Ashamed of 
these markings when older, he consulted an eminent 
surgeon to see if they could be removed. I believe 
the surgeon informed him that although something 
might be done in this direction, it would be very pain- 
ful and expensive, and that even then there would be 
left markings on the skin that would probably give it 
an uglier appearance than it already possessed. He 
said the markings were due to the presence of very 
small particles of carbon, a chemical substance that 
could not be dissolved at ordinary temperatures by any 
known substance, so that he would be compelled to 
keep them for the balance of his life.” 

122 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


“ Were the markings distinct after they had been 
on the man’s hand for twenty years?” inquired 
Charley. 

'' Quite distinct,” was the reply; '' probably as much 
so as at the time they were first placed on his hand. He 
appeared to be so ashamed of them that he was in the 
habit of wearing a glove on this hand, and carrying the 
other glove in his unmarked hand.” 

That’s all very well,” said Charley laughing, “ but 
then we couldn’t wear gloves over our faces. It would 
make us look even more ridiculous than the tattooing. 
What we must do is to endeavor never to let Kaloro 
put them on us.” 

Suppose we get Marbonna to ask Kooloo how we 
can best escape being tattooed.” 

The first time Marbonna and Kooloo were together, 
Charley said to Kooloo through the interpreter : 

“ Kooloo, Kaloro wishes to tattoo our faces and 
bodies. Now we don’t want it done. Tell us, please, 
how we can avoid it.” 

The answer was very discouraging, for Kooloo re- 
plied : 

'' Why not let Kaloro mark your faces and bodies ? 
He good tattooer. Make you look so awful your 
enemies run away when they see you.” 

'' But, Kooloo,” said Charley, through Marbonna, 
''in my country people don’t have such things placed 
on their faces or bodies.” 

On hearing this, Kooloo answered through Mar- 
bonna : 


123 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


But you are now Charleyo Mahinee and Harealdo 
Mahinee. You are members of our tribe, and of the 
household of Mahinee. In our country they do wear 
these things, so why not you? ” 

At first Kooloo thought that it was the fear of the 
pain produced by the tattooing process that made them 
wish to escape having it done. He therefore assured 
them that when he was tattooed, which was, however, 
only to a small extent, the pain was not great. He 
added, however, that Kaloro would not dare to tattoo 
them without their consent, nor unless permitted to do 
so by Mahinee. 

Acharto, the priest, as well as his associate priests, 
did what they could to further the wishes of Kaloro. 
The natives associated tattooing with their religious 
beliefs. They declared that if a male should grow to 
manhood without being tattooed, he would be pre- 
vented from entering the happy hunting-grounds in 
which they all hoped to live after death. 

But Acharto had plans of his own concerning the 
boys. He wished them to come and live with him in 
the great house where most of the idols of the tribe 
were kept. He therefore cultivated their acquaint- 
ance, and by the help of Marbonna held long con- 
versations with them, asking them to come and live 
with him, assuring them he would give them a good 
time, with very little to do. He had come to the con- 
clusion that the young white lads were great magicians, 
and believed that if he could get them to come and 
live with him and the idols, they would be of great help 
124 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


in inducing the people to come more frequently to the 
house of the idols with offerings. 

During the expedition Acharto went with Marbonna 
to Mahinee, and endeavored to get Mahinee’s promise 
to let the boys leave his household and come and live 
with him. 

Charley assured Mahinee that neither he nor Harold 
wished to leave his house; that they had been very 
happy there; that if Acharto’s requests were granted 
they would not only see less of the great chief, Mahi- 
nee, whom they loved, but would also be obliged to 
leave Kooloo, who was now their half-brother; that 
they did not suppose that Mahinee would be willing to 
part with his sons, and that they therefore hoped that 
he would not give the required permission. 

Mahinee listened to what was said, and promised to 
give his decision when they returned to the village. 
Charley’s argument appealed very much to him, for 
he thoroughly understood the advantages his son was 
deriving from daily association with the white lads. 
Already Kooloo had learned much from his white 
friends, not only in speaking English, but he could 
also now do many of the things the white lads did. 

When the party reached the summit of the mountain, 
they spent a whole day in examining more carefully 
the lava fields as well as the deposit of sulphur, or 
brimstone, on the edges of the crater. 

During this time Harold made an important dis- 
covery of deposits of two oxides of iron of an un- 
usually beautiful deep yellow and a bright red. As 

125 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


Harold’s uncle had informed him, when they were in 
the neighborhood of the Aleutian Island Chain, the 
people of the islands made excellent paints or pigments 
by finely grinding these colors and mixing them with 
oil. Harold took the specimens, showing them to 
Mahinee, who was greatly pleased that such an im- 
portant discovery had been made on the expedition 
which he commanded. He knew that his people 
would be only too glad to obtain these bright colors for 
paints with which to ornament their spear handles, the 
bamboos employed in the construction of their houses, 
and similar surfaces. They were accustomed to ma- 
king paints or pigments by grinding different colored 
stones into powder and mixing them with oil. But the 
colors Harold showed him were far more beautiful 
than anything he had before seen. 

As the time at their disposal was much greater than 
during their first visit, Charley and Harold spent more 
time on the mountain examining a number of addi- 
tional lava streams on the opposite slopes of the moun- 
tain. During one of these examinations when they 
happened to be alone — Kooloo having remained with 
his father in order to select specimens of the knife- 
stones that were much better and far freer from color 
than any they had previously obtained — Charley and 
Harold came to a region in the lava field where they 
made a discovery of something that is very common 
in such fields ; i. e., lava caves. 

When the molten lava flows down the side of the 
volcanic mountain it sometimes entangles in its mass 
126 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


quantities of water, which being rapidly changed into 
steam blows huge bubbles. The outsides of these bub- 
bles, hardening, form caves that often communicate 
with one another for considerable distances under- 
ground. In other cases the lava streams, when of con- 
siderable size, on making their way down the slopes of 
the mountain, harden on the outside into a crust, and 
continue flowing on the inside, even after the stream 
ceases to pour out from the volcano. There is thus left 
in the lava mass a more or less cylindrical cavity that 
extends like a huge tunnel below the surface. Such a 
lava cave is especially apt to form in those places where 
portions of the side of the mountain are broken or 
fissured by the great pressure of the lava stream as it 
slowly rises toward the top of the crater. 

The caves they discovered belonged to both of these 
classes. One of the latter class appeared to extend for 
great distances from its entrance, near the place where 
the stream had issued from a fissure or crevice in the 
mountain toward the lower slope. It was a large 
cave and, owing to the fact that portions of its roof 
had partially broken in by the weathering or gradual 
decomposition of the lava, was well ventilated. It 
would, therefore, form an excellent hiding-place should 
the necessity for such a place ever arise. Moreover, a 
fairly good-sized stream of fresh water flowed through 
the bottom of the tunnel-like passageways. 

“ Harold,’' remarked Charley, I think we had bet- 
ter keep this discovery to ourselves.” 

‘‘ Why do you say that? ” inquired Harold. Won’t 
127 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


you tell Kooloo. Fni sure he would like to see it and 
it would be great fun for us to explore it.” 

“ Don’t forget, Harold,” replied Charley, “ that 
some of these days we might be very well pleased to 
have this place to hide in, with no one knowing of it but 
ourselves.” 

'' You don’t think, Charley,” exclaimed Harold in 
surprise, “ that the people of the island will ever be- 
come our enemies ? ” 

“ I hardly think they will,” was the reply, “ but you 
remember what Kooloo and Marbonna told us concern- 
ing the inhabitants of the other valley on this island. 
We might, some day, be taken captives by them and 
succeed in escaping. Besides,” he added, don’t for- 
get that our friends from Harding Island are almost 
sure to get here sometime or other, and that such a 
hiding-place might be of very great value to them.” 

You certainly are a great fellow for looking ahead, 
Charley,” said Harold. “ I’ll say nothing to Kooloo 
or any one else about this discovery.” 

“ Then,” said Charley, “ let’s hurry back or Kooloo 
will miss us.” 

The quantity of knife-stone and sulphur they carried 
with them to the village was much greater than that 
obtained bn the previous expedition. What especially 
pleased Mahinee was that they had brought back with 
them such large quantities of the two stones, espe- 
cially of the knife-stone, some of which had hardened 
in curious rounded masses, that readily split in lens or 
moon-shaped pieces. 


128 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


Charley was especially anxious to learn the decision 
of Mahinee as regards Kaloro’s desire to tattoo them, 
and was glad to learn from Marbonna that the decision 
was as follows: That the lads were still quite young; 
that now being members of his family, when they grew 
older, they would necessarily be expected to become 
tattooed like all grown people; that there was plenty 
of time for this during the next few years. As for 
the request made by Acharto, the priest, that the lads 
should leave his house and spend a part of their time 
in the House of the Idols, he thought it reasonable, and 
therefore decided that they should give two days in 
each week for this purpose. It was but proper that 
the lads, who had been gifted with such wonderful 
powers, should spend a part of their time with the 
priests. It was therefore agreed that twice a week, 
on Mondays and Thursdays, the white boys should 
spend the day, from early morning to near the setting 
of the sun, with Acharto and his priests in the House 
of the Idols. 

Kaloro pretended to be satisfied with the decision of 
MahineCi At the same time he went around among 
the people, gradually bringing many of them to the 
belief that unless the white lads were tattooed their 
gods would be angry, and might bring some great 
calamity on the entire valley. This feeling rapidly 
spread, so that a great pressure was brought to bear 
on Mahinee. One day Mahinee asked the boys whether 
they did not think it well if they were to have only a 
little tattooing done, say just the face where it could be 
I 129 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


seen so well. He added, as an inducement, that since 
he had taken them into his family he would not object 
if they had the sacred triangle tattooed from the top 
of the head to the mouth and ears, explaining that only 
a part of their hair would be required to be cut off for 
this purpose. 

But even this magnificent offer failed to have any 
effect on the boys, and both Charley and Harold con- 
tinued to offer objections to being tattooed at all. 
Mahinee on again being asked by Kaloro to command 
the boys to let him tattoo them, said he would think 
the matter over and let him hear his decision in a few 
weeks. 


130 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


, CHAPTER XI 

Charley and Acharto 

AchartOj representing as he did the religious element 
of the valley, had considerable influence over Mahi- 
nee. Although king and chief ruler of the people, yet 
his rule was not absolute, the people having con- 
siderable independence. It would not be advisable 
therefore for Mahinee to attempt to exert his authority 
beyond certain limits. Then, again, like all the people 
of the valley, Mahinee was exceedingly superstitious. 
He stood in awe of the malign influences of the evil 
spirits over whom the priests claimed they had power, 
and did not hesitate to threaten him with their dis- 
pleasure if he failed to grant their requests. For this 
reason Mahinee had agreed to send the boys two days 
each week to the House of the Idols, to serve there 
under the direction of Acharto and his fellow-priests. 

Several weeks before the occurrences just related, 
while taking a walk with Kooloo and Marbonna, the 
latter pointed out to Charley and Harold the ruins of 
a number of ancient pi-pis. These while closely re- 
sembling those on which the houses in the valley were 
erected, differed from them in several respects. In 
the first place, they were much larger and higher, and 
the stones of which they were built were far heavier. 

13T 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


But what surprised them the most, was that the 
separate stones, instead of consisting as in the case 
of those employed for their houses of irregularly 
shaped blocks just as they had taken them from the 
earth, were more or less carefully hewn into smooth 
surfaces, that fitted closely together. How this hewing 
was done they could not discover. Even the closest ex- 
amination failed to show any traces of a chisel or other 
cutting-tool. 

It was evident that these huge pi-pis had been built 
by a different race than that now inhabiting the valley. 
This was shown by the great size of these structures, 
the huge stones, and the skill with which they had been 
hewn. Nor were evidences wanting of the antiquity of 
the structures. Nature had stamped the locality as of 
great age by huge and venerable breadfruit and other 
trees she had caused to grow between the crevices of the 
courses of stone. These trees had surely been growing 
for many years. 

Although the site did not seem favorable for lux- 
uriant growth, yet the trees appeared to thrive remark- 
ably well. This was evidenced not only by their great 
size, but also by the dense foliage that almost com- 
pletely excluded the sunlight from the surface of the 
pi-pi. In addition to the trees there were various 
creeping vines that, climbing up the trunks and reach- 
ing from tree to tree, added their dense foliage to that 
of the trees, and thus still further excluded the light. 

‘‘ Who built these places, Marbonna ? Your peo- 
ple ? '' inquired Charley. 


132 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


'' Not my people,” was the reply. ‘‘ But a great peo- 
ple who lived on these islands many, many lives ago.” 

Were they men like you and Mahinee? ” inquired 
Harold. 

“ Me not know,” was the reply. ‘‘ Marbonna often 
ask, but no one knows. Men lived very long time ago. 
A great people; greater than my people.” 

“ Where did they get the big stones for building? ” 
inquired Charley. 

‘‘ Marbonna don’t know,” was the reply. No such 
stones in the valley.” 

But if they brought the stones from other islands, 
how could they carry them up the slopes of the preci- 
pices that face the sea and down into the valley ? ” 
inquired Charley. 

Marbonna not know,” was still the reply. May- 
be stones brought from the valley you see from the 
top of the mountain.” 

‘‘ Are there no poisonous snakes in this pile of 
stones ? ” said Harold to Kooloo ; ‘‘ if not, I would like 
to walk through the paths between the trees. Do you 
think there are snakes here, Kooloo? ” he continued. 

Kooloo assured him that there were no snakes on 
the island that could hurt them. This statement being 
confirmed by Marbonna, they made an exploration of 
such parts of the pi-pi that were not completely cov- 
ered by the trees or the climbing vines. 

They then found that the pi-pi was several hundred 
feet in length and nearly twenty feet in width. There 
was a depression at the center, the sides being raised 

133 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


several feet. As they afterward learned there are 
many other islands in Polynesia in which the remains 
of long-forgotten races are to be seen in the almost 
imperishable ruins of immense piles of stones collected 
in pi-pi-shaped masses. 

What did they use the piles of stones for, Mar- 
bonna?” inquired Charley. ‘‘Do you know?” 

Marbonna entered into a long explanation, parts of 
which the boys were unable to understand. It was 
evident that he believed their use was somehow con- 
nected with religious beliefs still held by the people 
of the valley. But, as the boys had often noticed, when 
Marbonna, Mahinee, or others began to talk about 
religious things he spoke rapidly and used words 
difficult to understand. When Marbonna, talking to 
the boys in broken English, came to words the English 
equivalents of which he was ignorant, he never hesi- 
tated to use the native words. 

As well as the boys could understand, it appeared 
that these pi-pis were believed by some to have been 
the places where big houses were built, in which great 
numbers of the people lived together. 

He was not certain of this, although he had been 
told that on some of the islands of the great ocean, 
meaning, of course, the Pacific, there were even to-day 
houses in which many families lived together. 

“ Might they not have been built by some of the 
rulers of this great people to mark the places where 
they had been buried ? ” inquired Harold. 

“ Maybe,” replied Marbonna. “ Some people say 

134 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


that’s why they were built ; others say maybe they were 
built by the priests as houses of their gods, but Mar- 
bonna don’t know. Nobody knows.” 

Acharto’s house had been built on the ruins of one of 
the ancient pi-pis. Only a portion of the pi-pi was 
covered either by the houses in which the priests lived, 
or by the House of the Idols that had been erected near 
it. 

As far as Acharto’s house was concerned, it did 
not differ from the other houses on the island, the ar- 
rangement of its interior being practically the same 
as that of Mahinee’s house. It was, moreover, next 
to Mahinee’s house the largest on the island, thus 
giving to some extent an idea of the standing of the 
priests in the community. 

The House of the Idols stood at some little distance 
from the priests’ houses. Its general construction was 
the same, except that there was no place for reclining. 
Moreover, it was circular in outline, with the wooden 
idols arranged near the walls. There were eight idols 
of varying sizes and ugliness. No attempt had been 
made to represent their deities with pleasing faces. 
On the contrary, their features were threatening, thus 
showing the need of their being appeased by frequent 
gifts or offerings. They were poor apologies for gods, 
consisting, as they did, mainly of huge logs of wood 
rudely carved so as to represent men with their arms 
folded and with hideous faces. The eyes were repre- 
sented by bits of shining stone, or pieces of the mother- 
of-pearl of the pearl oysters. In several instances, es- 

135 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


pecially in that of the principal idol, the eyes consisted 
of large pearls of great beauty and rarity. 

What a silly thing it is, Charley,” said Harold, 
“ to bow down to such ridiculous-looking things.” 

“ It is, indeed,” said Charley, it makes one think 
of what the Prophet Isaiah said about idols.” 

I don’t remember it. Charley,” said Harold, 
“ can you repeat the words? ” 

“ Yes,” was the reply. “ I memorized them. Isaiah, 
in speaking of the foolishness of the man who makes 
for himself an idol, says: 

‘ He heweth him down cedars, and taketh the cy- 
press and the oak, which he strengtheneth for himself 
among the trees of the forest : he planteth an ash, and 
the rain doth nourish it. . . 

“ * He burneth part thereof in the fire : with part 
thereof he eateth flesh ; he roasteth roast, and is satis- 
fied; yea, he warmeth himself, and saith. Aha, I am 
warm, I have seen the fire. 

‘‘ ' And the residue thereof he maketh a god, even 
his graven image : he falleth down unto it, and wor- 
shipped! it, and prayeth unto it, and saith, Deliver me ; 
for thou art my god ’ ” (Isa. 44 : 14-17). 

The principal idol, the one that had pearls of 
great price for its eyes, was placed in the center of the 
semi-circle of idols immediately facing the entrance 
or door, so that those coming into the place could 
readily see it. 

‘‘Look at those pearls, Harold,” said Charley. 
“ Wouldn’t they surprise Hiram and the captain. They 
136 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


would bring a big price in England or any other civil- 
ized part of the world.” 

Yes,” said Harold, it seems a shame to leave 
them for the eyes of that horrible-looking idol.” 

“ Don’t touch them, Harold,” said Charley. ‘‘ I 
wouldn’t give much for your life if you attempted to 
take them.” 

The House of the Idols had been built on the western 
side of the pi-pi, near its summit, so that the idols 
faced the east. Access was had by a flight of stone 
steps formed by the successive courses of the pi-pi that 
ascended in a gradual slope from the bottom to the top. 
A passageway, showing the direction of the steps, had 
been marked out by huge pieces of limestone roughly 
carved into a circular shape, and pierced at the center 
by holes not unlike those sometimes found at the 
centers of Chinese coins. The stones had been placed 
on edge on either side of the space left for the steps, 
clearly marking out the entrance. 

What are those things that look like millstones 
with holes in them? Do you suppose they have ever 
been used for millstones, Charley,” inquired Harold, 
“ and that the holes were used for putting in pieces of 
wood on which the stones were turned ? ” 

I think not,” was the reply, “ I remember reading 
in one of the books in the library on Harding Island, 
that they are called limestone money, though how the 
people can use them, and what good they do I cannot 
say ; for one could never carry around pieces of money 
that weigh so much.” 


137 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


‘‘ Oh, well,’' replied Harold laughing, “ I don’t 
think money would be of much use in a place like this 
valley, where food can be obtained with no more trou- 
ble than taking it off the tree or bush on which it 
grows.” 

The boys were good observers. As far as they could 
see none of the priests appeared to have much belief 
either in the power of the idols, or of the gods or spirits 
they represented. When by themselves, they spoke 
very disrespectfully of them. It was only when the peo- 
ple came to bring offerings and presents that they pre- 
tended to stand in great awe of the gods, explaining 
at length the terrible things that would happen if 
the best things they owned were not presented. Then 
they would pretend to beseech the idols to deal kindly 
with the people who brought them these fine presents, 
and protect them from their enemies. 

These sacrifices or gifts consisted of the best and 
choicest fruits of the valley. The priests assured the 
people that if they brought stale, unripe, or overripe 
fruits, or any damaged or injured goods, such as the 
cloth they manufactured in the valley, the gods would 
know it and would punish them severely. The gifts 
were left on rude tables resembling altars, placed on 
each side of the idols. 

The service expected of the boys in the House of 
the Idols was far from tiresome. It was to keep the 
lights burning before each of the idols during those 
hours of the day when the people were apt to come with 
their gifts. The lights consisted of the kernels of a 

138 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


nut closely resembling a horse-chestnut, that was quite 
common on the island. When taken out of its shell and 
strung at suitable intervals on a branch of the cocoanut 
tree, it burns, when set on fire, producing an uncer- 
tain bluish flame. It continues less than a quarter of 
an hour, when another nut must be ignited. It was 
not hard work, but it required constant attention. 

Acharto and the other priests were kind to the 
boys. Indeed, it soon became evident that they stood 
in some little awe of them; for they looked on them 
as priests like themselves. The wonderful things that 
they did, especially Charley, led them to think that he 
possessed a far greater power over the gods than they 
did. Indeed, it soon became evident that one of the 
purposes for which they had asked to have the boys 
serve in the House of the Idols was that they might 
perhaps themselves learn how to do some of these 
things. 

The boys had not been long with the priests when 
they were far from pleased to receive a visit from 
Kaloro, the chief tattooer. Kaloro made this visit 
for the purpose of endeavoring to persuade the boys to 
permit him to begin tattooing their faces. He had 
hoped to be able to induce the priests to help him to 
persuade the boys to let him tattoo them. At first 
Acharto promised that he would do what he could 
to help persuade the boys, so he spoke to Charley as 
follows : 

‘‘ Why young white lad not wish to be tattooed ? 
If not tattooed the gods will be angry and punish him. 

139 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


Afraid it hurt? Not hurt much. If no tattoo on your 
faces or bodies, when you die the gods won’t let you 
come into the happy lands where there is plenty of 
cocoanuts, breadfruits, and other good things.” 

Charley saw that Kaloro and Acharto were work- 
ing together. Fearing Kaloro would win Acharto 
over to him, he determined to take positive action. 
When, therefore, Acharto told him that the gods would 
be angry if they did not at once become tattooed, 
Charley pretended to consult his watch, and after- 
ward his magnetic needle, then turning to Kaloro ex- 
claimed : 

Spirits say Charleyo taboo. Don’t get tattooed 
yet. Maybe after a while, yes.” 

Kaloro was very angry when he heard what Charley 
had to say, and demanded that Acharto should consult 
the other gods so as to find out what they wished done. 
Now this was just what Charley hoped would happen. 
As he knew, the methods employed by the priests for 
ascertaining the wishes of their gods was to ask the 
idols questions, and then pretending to listen, declare 
that they distinctly heard their answers. This, of 
course, enabled them to make the pretended communi- 
cation anything they wished. Now, knowing that 
since if the gods should demand that both boys should 
be tattooed, not only would the priests but also the 
people and even Mahinee insist that this should be 
done, Charley detennined by the use of ventriloquism 
to make these answers such as he wished. He there- 
fore said to Kaloro: 


140 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


The white lads will obey the gods and be tattooed 
if they command it. If they say they do not wish to 
have it done, will you agree to their commands and 
cease to ask us to be tattooed ? Do you say yes to this ? ” 

This conversation had been carried on by the aid of 
Marbonna as interpreter. 

Kaloro, who believed that the communication from 
the gods would be in his favor, agreed gladly to the 
proposition. As for Acharto, he was delighted with 
it. It gave him the opportunity he had wished for 
showing to the boys, especially to Charley, the great 
influence he had with the gods, so he gladly agreed. 

Acharto determined to make a grand occasion of 
the matter. He not only brought all the priests to- 
gether, so as to have a grand pow-wow, but even 
sent word to Mahinee, Marbonna, and others of the 
chiefs of the great service that was about to be held 
in the House of the Idols. With a view of making an 
imposing appearance, Charley and Harold were com- 
manded to light a greater number of candle-nuts than 
was usually employed. 

A crowd of people came to the House of the Idols 
to see the ceremonies. The people of the valley had 
been told the question that was about to be put to their 
principal god. 

The crowding of people to the House of the Idols 
greatly pleased Acharto and his priests. It was under- 
stood that whenever the people came to the place they 
should bring gifts and offerings and place them on the 
altars near the gods. So many came that the altars 
141 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


were unable to hold all the gifts, especially those in 
front of the principal god, to whom it was understood 
the questions were to be addressed. Indeed, the tables 
on both sides of this idol were so laden with gifts that it 
had been found necessary to place them on the floor 
beneath them. 

Harold,” said Charley, while they were keeping 
the lights burning and the people were bringing their 
gifts in to the idols, this is a serious matter. Should 
Acharto pretend, as I fear he will, that the gods whis- 
per to him that they wish us to be tattooed, I believe 
nothing can stop Kaloro from doing this.” 

But that would be horrible, Charley,” exclaimed 
Harold. ‘‘ Think how terrible it would be if our faces 
were covered with the awful marks, not to say any- 
thing about those placed over our bodies ! ” 

I wouldn’t mind the body marks so much,” said 
Charley, ‘‘ for we could cover them with our clothes, 
but a fellow couldn’t put anything on his face to cover 
up the tattooings.” 

What will you do, Charley? ” inquired Harold. 

I intend trying to scare them for all I’m worth. 
As you know, I can easily make these people believe 
that the god has actually spoken, for I can do this by 
ventriloquism. It’s a dangerous experiment. If dis- 
covered, the people would be so angry they would kill 
me. 

“ Then don’t try it, Charley,” said Harold anx- 
iously. I’m sure I would rather be tattooed all over 
than have you killed.” 


142 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


“ I am going to try it all the same,” replied Charley 
decidedly. 

When the people were assembled Acharto made a 
long prayer to the principal god, telling briefly how the 
two white lads had been brought to the island, how 
they had been adopted into the family of their chief, 
Mahinee. In this prayer he asked that the god would 
let them know whether or not he wished the boys to be 
tattooed like the people of the island, or whether he 
wished them to wait a few years until they grew older. 

‘‘ Shall they wait? ” he asked. 

Of course the god said nothing. It was not in 
Acharto’s opinion advisable that the answer should 
come too easily, so he repeated the question, “ Shall 
they wait ? ” and stood with one of his ears near the 
mouth of the god as if awaiting the reply. 

When this question was repeated Charley was eight 
or ten feet from the god with his head bent over so as 
to conceal his mouth, while in the act of lighting a fresh 
candle-nut. Suddenly there came, apparently direct 
from the mouth of the god in a loud tone entirely un- 
like Charley^s voice, for of course he had concealed it, 
speaking the language of the savages : 

“ Aa, Aa. Charleyo Mahinee taboo. Harealdo 
Mahinee taboo. Aa, Aa, taboo-taboo.” 

The surprise was tremendous. Never before had 
any of their gods spoken in so loud a tone. Here was 
a manifestation that had never been equalled in the 
recollection of the oldest man present. Moreover, the 
tone of the god was angry. They understood that 

143 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


the god was angry, that any one should for a moment 
attempt to lay hands on what the king had pronounced 
to be taboo. They understood too, that the words. 
Taboo-taboo,” they last heard were a declaration 
from the god himself that these two boys were an un- 
usually great taboo, and were not on any account to be ‘ 
meddled with. 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


CHAPTER XII 

The Great Taboo. Charley Turns the Tables 
ON Kaloro 

The wonderment among the people rapidly increased. 
Never before had they actually heard any of their gods 
speak. It was only to the priests they spoke. But 
now the god was so angry that he thundered out his 
message, declaring that the white lads were not only 
taboo by their chief, but they were taboo by their god, 
and therefore should be left alone. Evidently the 
white lads, especially Charley, were great priests, since 
for the first time the god had broken his long silence. 

Acharto and his fellow-priests, who well knew that 
the gods never before had spoken, were, indeed, not 
only surprised, but greatly frightened. They firmly 
believed that spoken words had actually come from the 
mouth of the god, who was evidently angry they should 
have attempted to do to the white lads what they did 
not wish to have done. These lads, therefore, were 
greatly to be feared. 

But while greatly frightened, the priests were never- 
theless pleased. Miracles and magic like that which 
had been witnessed by the people would beyond doubt 
cause the people to hold the gods in greater reverence. 
They would visit the House of the Idols more fre- 

K 145 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


quently, and there would be a great increase in the 
value and the amount of the offerings they would bring 
with them. 

Acharto and his fellow-priests never for a moment 
suspected that Charley had played a trick on them, just 
as they had been in the habit of playing tricks on the 
people. They were convinced that it was by reason 
of the presence of these boys in the House of the Idols 
that this wonderful thing had occurred. 

The people lingered as if hoping for another mira- 
cle, but none coming, they left, and were on their 
way back to the houses, talking eagerly and excitedly 
over the wonderful things that had happened. There 
were yet several hours before the boys would be 
through with their work and, therefore, could return 
to Mahinee^s house. Charley and Harold were then 
the only ones left, since Acharto and his priests had 
left as soon as the people had gone. Acharto told the 
boys to remain and keep the lights burning; that he 
would return shortly. They were standing in front of 
the god who had spoken to the people, where they were 
attending to the burning lights. 

, Being alone the boys were at liberty to talk to each 
other, which they did in low tones. 

“ That was great, Charley,” said Harold. You 
surprised and frightened the priests and the people 
all right.” 

‘‘ It did seem to surprise them, Harold,” said 
Charley ; ‘‘ did it not ? ” 

“ Surprise them, Charley,” repeated Harold. I 
146 , 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


don’t suppose that Acharto was ever more surprised in 
his life than when the words came in so angry a tone 
from the mouth of the idol. Of course, he knows well 
enough that their gods had never before actually spoken 
to them. Charley,” he continued, “ I could hardly 
keep from laughing right out when you made the 
words seem to come straight from the idol’s mouth. 
What do you intend to do should such questions be 
again asked ? ” 

'' I have not determined yet just what I’ll say. It 
must, however, be something decided, so that no fur- 
ther attempt shall be made by Kaloro to cover us with 
his horrible tattooings, or by others to persuade us to 
permit this to be done.” 

“ Take care they don’t catch you, Charley.” 
ni be careful, Harold,” said Charley gravely. 
‘‘ Not only my own life depends on my success, but 
yours as well. I have no doubt that should I be dis- 
covered talking we would both be killed.” 

While they were talking, Acharto came into the 
room accompanied with some of his priests. He was 
in extremely good humor. The wonderful happenings 
of the day had caused great numbers of gifts to be 
given to the idols by the people. Seeing how the tables 
had overflowed, he ordered his priests to take the gifts 
from the altars and put them where they would not 
spoil, for it was understood that such of the gifts as 
were not immediately required by the idols were in- 
tended for the use of the priests. 

Turning to Charley, Acharto said: 

147 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


Has the god spoken any more since I was here ? ’’ 
Charley shook his head in order to indicate No, no. 

I hope he will speak again,” said Acharto, “ the 
people like to hear the god speak, and will come here 
again and bring gifts and presents. Do you think he 
will speak again, Charleyo? ” he inquired anxiously. 

I think it very likely,” was the reply. 

No one trouble you now,” said Acharto to Charley 
and Harold. “ You great taboo. But tell me, Char- 
leyo,” he continued, will you say to Kaloro, after 
time of waiting is past: Kaloro, now you can cover 
us with your beautiful tattooings? ” 

Charley gave a most decided answer to this ques- 
tion. He said that Kaloro had agreed that if the 
gods decided the question in his favor nothing more 
was to be said about it; that moreover, he, Acharto, 
had made a similar promise; that the gods had given 
their answer, and evidently did not wish to be bothered 
about it again. He then turned to Acharto and said 
in a mysterious manner: 

“We not only taboo by Mahinee, but also taboo by 
the gods. If any one dares to trouble us about tattoo- 
ing I will call on the spirits of the gods to punish 
them.” Then, wishing to settle this matter finally, he 
said : “ Acharto, ask the god again whether the white 
lad has not spoken the truth when he said the gods do 
not wish them to be tattooed.” 

When Charley asked these questions he was stand- 
ing fully fifteen feet from the god, with Acharto next 
to him. No answer to the question came. 

148 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


“ Go nearer to the god,” said Charley, '' and hold 
your ear near his mouth.” 

Acharto did this willingly. As he brought his ear 
near the mouth of the god, Charley, in a loud note 
which appeared to come directly from the lips of the 
god, shouted out the answer : 

“ Aa, Aa, Charleyo, taboo-taboo. Harealdo, taboo- 
taboo.” 

It was splendidly done. Never before had Charley 
performed so skilful a piece of ventriloquism. Harold, 
who was carefully watching his lips could not, as he 
afterward told him, see the slightest motion. 

Acharto was now thoroughly scared. He had not 
the slightest doubt but that the words came from the 
angry god’s mouth. They were not only loud, but 
they were clearly angry as if the god resented being 
again asked the same question. 

Are you satisfied, Acharto, that I am right in 
saying that the gods forbid any one tattooing the 
white lads ? ” 

Aa, Aa,” replied Acharto, now greatly frightened. 
‘‘No one dare touch you now. You are great taboo, 
great taboo.” 

“ All right then,” said Charley; “ don’t forget it.” 

There evidently was something of great importance 
in Acharto’s mind. He was thinking of the splendid 
gifts the people would be sure to bring with them if 
he only could induce the boys to propose a similar 
question being put to the gods on the morrow in the 
presence of a still greater number of the people. He 
149 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


knew that if this was done nearly all the people in the 
valley would come to the House of the Idols to see the 
miracle. 

‘‘ Charleyo Mahinee,” he said, “ should we not have 
another test so that all the people may know the gods 
will be angry with any one who does not believe you 
are the great taboo? Don’t you think it best?” he 
inquired anxiously. 

Wishing to have the question settled once for all, 
Charley said : 

“ Very well, Acharto, let’s have- a great meeting of 
the people, and ask the gods whether Harealdo and I 
are not great taboo. If this is done, do you promise 
never again to speak about this matter? ” 

Acharto, who was greatly pleased with this conces- 
sion, gladly agreed for himself and his priests that if 
the gods still declared that they wished them not to be 
tattooed that they themselves would see that it was not 
done. 

The boys had now been in the House of the Idols for 
the time agreed on, so that they bade Acharto good- 
day and were soon in the house of Mahinee. Here 
they found Mahinee and Kooloo anxiously awaiting 
them. As soon as they entered the room, Mahinee in- 
quired whether the gods had said anything more. 
When Charley told him what the gods had spoken 
Mahinee became greatly excited, exclaiming : 

“ Charleyo Mahinee taboo. Harealdo Mahinee ta- 
boo. Both taboo by the gods. Now, no one shall 
touch you unless you are willing. I, Mahinee, say so.” 

ISO 


INt:APTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


Kooloo was also greatly excited, and said: 

Any one touch you now must also touch Kooloo.” 

Charley then told the king of his promise to Acharto 
to have another public test made, and asked Mahinee 
if he was willing to permit it to be made. 

‘‘Yes,” replied Mahinee, “if you wish; but if not, 
there must be no test ; and yet,” he continued, “ if you 
are willing the people would like another test very 
much, so Mahinee hopes you say Yes. But if you 
don’t wish and say No, all right.” 

Turning to Marbonna, Charley requested him to say 
to Mahinee : 

“ Say to the great chief that Charleyo Mahinee and 
Harealdo Mahinee are his friends, and are willing that 
this question shall be again asked of the gods, but the 
test must not be made again; that the god has whis- 
pered in his ear that when he once says No, he don’t 
wish to say No again, that would be too ridiculous. 
Ask Mahinee if it is understood that this question is 
not to be asked again.” 

“ Yes,” was the reply, “ this time only. Then never 
again until Charleyo say ‘ again.’ ” 

The day for the additional questioning of the gods 
at last came. There was great excitement throughout 
the valley. Nearly the entire population had assembled 
in front of the open door, as well as on the steps lead- 
ing to the House of the Idols and on the ground in 
front of the pi-pi. 

Of course, the priests were careful to see that the 
people laid their gifts in the House of the Idols before 

iSi 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


the questions were asked. At last this was done and 
everything was ready for the questions. 

The priests were all standing before the gods. A 
still greater number of lighted candle-nuts were burn- 
ing, these being attended to not only by Charley and 
Harold, but also by Kooloo, as well as by another boy, 
the son of one of Mahinee’s chiefs. 

Acharto began a long prayer in which he besought 
the gods not to be angry at being asked this question 
again. He then turned to the people and told them 
the story of the wonderful things that had taken place 
not only when the people were present, but also after 
they had left. He explained to them that since Charleyo 
Mahinee and Harealdo Mahinee were then taboo both 
by the great chief Mahinee, himself, as well as by their 
god, that unless they had been willing to have this 
question asked again it would not have been asked. He 
then turned to the principal god and said : 

‘‘ Do you wish the white lads to be left alone ? Do 
you forbid any one from troubling them? ” 

Instantly there came again in a very angry tone the 
same message as before : 

“ Aa, Aa. Charleyo Mahinee taboo-taboo. Har- 
ealdo Mahinee taboo-taboo. Taboo-taboo.” 

‘‘ Is that enough, Acharto ? ” inquired Charley. 
‘‘ Are you satisfied ? ” 

Acharto replied that he was quite satisfied. That the 
boys were great taboo and were to be left alone. 

‘Hf you have any doubt,” said Charley, ‘‘ ask each 
of the other gods separately.” And on this being 
152 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


done, there came from the other gods, in different 
tones, the similar statement that the gods decreed that 
the boys were great taboos, and were to be left alone. 

Acharto then addressed the people, and said that 
they had now heard the decision of all their gods, and 
that any one who would dare to touch the boys or at- 
tempt to make them do anything that they did not 
wish to do, would surely meet with their anger. He 
then sternly forbid Kaloro ever again to mention the 
word tattoo, especially to endeavor to tattoo the white 
lads, and turning to Mahinee, he inquired whether the 
great chief had anything to say to his people. 

Mahinee then spoke to the people and informed them 
that the commands of the gods must be obeyed; that 
it was evident the white lads were great friends of 
the gods; that they were taboo, and of a taboo much 
higher than usual ; that he hoped the white lads would 
continue to serve in the House of the Idols as they had 
already done for two days in the week, and that during 
these days he would command his son Kooloo to keep 
them company. 

The fact that Charley and Harold were now great 
taboo not only by the proclamation of Mahinee, but 
also by the voices of all their idols, made all the people 
hold them in great respect. Indeed, this was carried 
to such an extent, that the boys soon found that their 
position was far less pleasant and comfortable than 
it had been. Now, when they walked through the 
valley the people instead of greeting them pleasantly, 
and even walking with them a part of the way, held 

153 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


aloof, crying out in consternation “ taboo, taboo.” To 
their great surprise even Marbonna, to a certain ex- 
tent, stood aloof from them. 

Marbonna,” said Charley one day, why do you 
and the people treat Harealdo and myself so differently 
from what they formerly did ? ” 

Because you now great taboo,” was the reply. 
“ They fear Mahinee and the gods that called you ta- 
boo will be angry if they touch you. Also because 
when man great taboo anything he touches belongs 
to him.” 

But,” objected Charley, “ we don’t like this. It 
makes our life in the valley very uncomfortable. Can 
nothing be done to stop it ? ” 

Maybe,” was the reply. Come ask Mahinee. 
Ask Acharto. Maybe they fix it.” 

On being questioned, Mahinee replied that so far as 
his taboo went he could make it less troublesome, but 
that they would have to arrange with Acharto about 
the taboo given to them by the gods. 

On visiting Acharto he seemed much pleased at the 
question. The crafty fellow at once saw the possibility 
of his having another great pow-wow at the House of 
the Idols, with the consequent inflow of gifts. He 
therefore arranged that another public meeting should 
be held, and the gods each and separately be requested 
to remove only so much of the taboo as prevented the 
common people from approaching the lads, but that 
so far as their lives or liberty were concerned, the 
taboo was still to be regarded as holding. 

154 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


Such a meeting was held. Perfectly satisfactory an- 
swers were received from the gods, so that the boys, 
while protected by a most powerful taboo, had removed 
from it all those objectionable features that tended to 
isolate them from the rest of the people. 

As they afterward discovered, the custom of the 
taboo, or the process of laying it on things or people, 
was by no means limited to a few islands of the Pacific 
Ocean. On the contrary, it existed in practically all 
the islands of this ocean, and, indeed, in many other 
parts of the world. 

It is evident, from what has been said, that the taboo, 
as an institution, is political as well as religious in its 
character. It is imposed for various reasons. For 
example, if a danger existed threatening the destruc- 
tion of fish in a river by fishing during certain seasons 
of the year, it was only necessary to declare the river 
to be taboo during those seasons. It was the same 
with the killing of game. In such cases the taboo 
simply had the effect of a stringent law or rule, the 
breaking of which was followed by the death penalty ; 
in this case the punishment being meted out to the 
people by the power of the chief. 

A religious taboo, however, was a law or prohibi-; 
tion declared by the priests threatening the anger of 
the gods on any who broke it. 

In either of these cases the power of the taboo would 
depend on the authority or power of the person or 
persons pronouncing it. A taboo pronounced by a 
great chief would be obeyed by the people because they 

155 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


feared his anger. It might, however, be set at naught 
by a still more powerful chief, who did not fear what 
the chief who had imposed the taboo could do. 

The religious taboo pronounced by the priests would 
of course have the superstitions of the people to back it. 
Such a taboo was generally respected, since in most 
parts of Polynesia, few if any of the people dared to 
disobey the commands of their priests. Then the great 
fear of the gods would prevent them. Stories were 
told of cases where taboos had been disregarded that 
resulted in the death of the disobedient, but whether 
this death was caused by fright, or whether the priests 
took it on themselves to see that these people died any- 
how, they never discovered, although they believed that 
the latter was probably the true cause. 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


CHAPTER XIII 

Everyday Life on the Island of Captivity. The 
Burning-glass 

For several weeks after the supposed spoken decision 
of the gods, matters grew more and more pleasant for 
the boys. Kaloro no longer dared to urge them to 
be tattooed. Acharto was much pleased with the 
decision of Mahinee to permit them to give two 
days a week in the House of the Idols, even though 
he had added to this statement that he would leave the 
decision entirely to the boys, who were themselves 
evidently priests of a very high order ; that if they did 
not wish to give two days each week to the service, 
they were at liberty to refuse. Mahinee added, how- 
ever, that he hoped they would do so. When they 
heard this, the boys very sensibly determined to give 
the time that was asked for. 

The friendship between the white boys and Kooloo 
was now so great that on the days they were in 
the House of the Idols, Kooloo passed much of his 
time with them. 

Kooloo was very much in earnest in trying to learn, 
as far as possible, about the white boys of England and 
Australia. He seemed never to grow tired of hearing 
about them and what they did in their great schools. 
The description of these schools, both in the neighbor- 
157 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


hood of London, England, and of Melbourne, Austra- 
lia, greatly puzzled the brown-skinned boy. It seemed 
to him very odd that there should be great buildings 
where boys studied, ate, slept, and lived together, often 
without seeing their parents for months and months. 
He was much pleased to hear the tricks the boys 
played on their masters, especially on those who had 
trouble in keeping them in order. These tricks greatly 
amused him, and many a hearty laugh he had with 
Charley and Harold who, like all boys, were fond of 
talking about the pranks they had played at their 
schools. 

As is well known, the white boys of civilized coun- 
tries are fond of going in crowds or gangs. To a cer- 
tain extent this was true of the boys of the valley. 
There were always a number of native boys who hung 
around the white boys and Kooloo, although a certain 
respectful distance was kept between them and Kooloo, 
the son of their great chief, and the white boys, whom 
they looked on with marked respect as being protected 
by the great taboo. Whenever they went in swim- 
ming, which was generally several times a day, they 
had the company of the crowd of brown-skinned 
youngsters. 

Leapfrog was a favorite with the boys, especially 
during swimming time. Every now and then they 
would leave the water and, without dressing, would 
form a line of some fifteen or twenty, so that starting 
at the end of the line one would get no little exercise in 
vaulting over all the others. In the hot tropical air of 

158 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


the valley this was generally found so tiring that, when 
each had vaulted two or three times over the entire 
line, he cooled off by diving into the water. A suit- 
able place was therefore selected on the bank of the 
river where the water was deep. The boy at the 
head of the line would stand on the edge of the bank ; 
when he was vaulted over, the one vaulting was ex- 
pected to make a good clean dive into the water. If 
this was not done, he was obliged to take his place 
at the end of the line nearest the river and wait until 
all the others had vaulted over him. While this ex- 
ercise was severe owing to the heat, yet it did not 
make so much difference, since the plunge in the cool 
water of the river soon made them comfortable. 

As will be remembered, mention has been already 
made of the fifes constructed by Charley and Har- 
old out of pieces of hollow bamboo, and the merry 
dance music they played on them. One day Charley sug- 
gested to Kooloo, who had learned to play on the 
fife, that it would be a good scheme to make a number 
of extra fifes, and teach some of the other boys of the 
valley to play on them. At the same time he planned 
to have constructed a number of drums, not the heavy 
drum used on the island, that was so large that it 
required to be rested on the ground, and was beaten 
with a single large stick only, but the lighter drum 
of England and other civilized countries, known as the 
snare drum, that is beaten with a pair of drumsticks, 
and is sufficiently small to be readily carried by means 
of a cord slung over the neck and shoulders. 

159 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


It required no little patience to teach the savage boys 
to play on the fife, especially to play a tune, but at 
last by the help of Kooloo, after weeding out the poorer 
boys, a sufficient number were taught how to play a 
lively tune fairly well. 

It was agreed, as far as possible, that no one in the 
valley should know of the plan for organizing a fife- 
and-drum corps. At Charley’s advice, however, Kooloo 
informed his father what the white boys had planned, 
and asked if he was willing they should go on with it. 
So far from objecting, Mahinee seemed to be pleased, 
and not only gave them the desired permission, but 
even instructed some of the men who knew how to 
make the large drums employed on the island, to do 
whatever the white lads, or priests, as they were now 
frequently called, might ask them to do. 

Charley’s ability to draw was of considerable help 
to him in this new work. He prepared a sketch of 
what he wanted the men to make; this was the well- 
known snare drum. This drum is made by tightly 
stretching over both ends of a hollow wooden cylinder 
thin pieces of dried skin of very young sharks. In 
order to stretch these tightly, the drumheads were 
tightened in the usual manner by means of a long 
fibrous thread attached alternately to wooden hoops 
connected with the opposite drumheads. When this 
thread is tightly stretched, the hoops are drawn down 
firmly against the ends of the drums, thus tightly 
stretching the heads. 

As is well known, the snare drum is only beaten on 
j6o 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


one of the heads, that is, on the upper or batter- 
head. The lower, or snare head, as it is called, 
is never beaten, but is provided with one or more 
threads of dried gut or rawhide, stretched tightly 
across and in contact with it. When the upper head is 
beaten by drumsticks, there is thus produced the rat- 
tling sound that is so characteristic of this kind of 
drum. 

Had it not been for the fact that Charley had on 
several occasions made fifes for himself in Australia, 
he would probably have had difficulty in tuning so 
many fifes, so as to produce notes in the same scale. 
As is well known, fifes are made in three different 
keys ; namely, in the keys of B, A, and C. The B fifes 
are the longest, and therefore produce the lowest 
tones, while those tuned to the C scale are the shortest, 
and produce the shrillest tones. There are openings 
or finger-holes provided for producing the different 
notes, by opening or closing them with the fingers, 
and a blow-hole where the wind from the mouth is 
blown. 

There were fifteen fifes and six drums, a combina- 
tion capable of making considerable noise of a char- 
acter most apt to appeal to the savage taste. 

When Kooloo learned that it was common in Eng- 
land and Australia for a fife-and-drum corps to have 
a gorgeously dressed commander, called the drum- 
major, who would by means of a long rod or baton 
that he carried indicate the music to be played, as well 
as the direction in which the corps should march, he 
L i6i 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


inquired if Charley and Harold wished to be drum- 
major; that if they did not he would like that office. 
This was agreed on and a wonderful headdress was 
provided, much to the delight of Kooloo and of the 
fife-and-drum corps generally. Harold and Charley, 
who had received training in the English schools in 
marching, spent no little time in drilling the corps to 
perform a number of maneuvers. 

There was a great curiosity on the part of the peo- 
ple of the island as to just what the boys were doing 
in a part of the valley that Charley had persuaded 
Mahinee and Acharto to declare to be taboo, so that 
none of them dared to come near it. When, therefore, 
the boys were ready to play for the first time in public, 
they sent word to Mahinee who invited all the chiefs 
and the people generally to meet him in the sliade of a 
grove of cocoanut palms where there was plenty of 
room. 

Mahinee with his chiefs and warriors had assem- 
bled, together with a great number of the people of the 
island who were quietly seated at a respectful distance. 
The shrill but inspiring notes of the fifes were heard, 
together with the rattle of the snare drums slowly ap- 
proaching from a distance. It was a sight that strongly 
appealed to the onlookers, especially to Mahinee and 
his chiefs. They at once recognized the effect 
such music would have in encouraging his warriors 
when on the warpath. The wonderful marching of 
the fife-and-drum corps which, preceded by Kooloo, 
magnificently dressed as a drum-major, went through 
162 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


many evolutions, drew loud exclamations of praise 
from both the warriors and the people. 

Mahinee was so pleased by the corps that he ordered 
a large house to be built where the boys could not only 
safely store their drums and fifes, but at which they 
could meet for practice; and in order that they should 
not be disturbed by the visits of the people, he declared 
this house to be taboo. 

On the last expedition to the headwaters of the river 
and the mountain slopes, they had, as already men- 
tioned, discovered a large deposit of volcanic glass that, 
unlike the black or dark-green glass they had obtained 
on the first expedition, was almost as clear as ordinary 
window-glass. 

Several remarkable pieces of this clear glass obtained 
by Harold had broken into curious new-moon-shaped 
fragments ; that is, in pieces in which the opposite sur- 
faces or faces, were rounded, and were bulged outward 
and inward. 

Harold, like most boys, had often played with a 
burning-glass by so holding it in the sunlight as to 
bring the image of the sun on something placed on the 
other side of the glass. Such a point is called a focus. 
In the case of the burning-glass the focus is not only 
where the light of the sun is crowded into a small space, 
but is also where the heat collects so powerfully as to 
be able to set on fire a piece of wood or other combusti- 
ble matter placed there. Harold found on trial that 
there was no difficulty in almost instantly starting a 
fire in this manner even with a heavy piece of wood. 

163 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


He was careful, however, not to let any of the natives 
see what he was doing. He took this piece of glass 
to Charley and said : 

“ Charley, do you want some great magic ? ” 

“ Great white priest always wants new, big magic,” 
replied Charley laughing. Why do you ask? ” 

“ Because I have a piece of volcanic glass shaped like 
a burning-glass that can almost instantly light a fire 
by the sun’s rays.” 

‘‘ That is splendid, Harold,” said Charley excitedly. 
** If we can do this we will get a still stronger hold on 
the people. Let’s take a walk to some place where no 
one can see us and try to start a fire.” 

The lens-shaped piece of glass was fairly large, 
some four inches in diameter, so that considerable heat 
was collected or crowded together in a small space. 
By the use of this lens the very hot sun of the tropical 
regions, when shining very nearly overhead, had its 
rays so concentrated as almost instantly to set on fire 
a large piece of dry wood. 

‘‘ This is bully, Harold,” cried Charley. “ You must 
show it to the people.” 

•'* Not so, Charley,” replied Harold. The people 
look on you as the great white priest or magician. You 
had better show it. It will make the people still more 
afraid of you. Besides, you may wish to use your 
ventriloquism with it. So you had better get this 
magic off.” 

“ Well,” said Charley, after some little considera- 
tion, ‘‘ perhaps you are right.” 

164 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


“ Shall we show this thing first to Mahinee or to 
Acharto? ” inquired Harold. 

I think, Harold,” said Charley, “ that Acharto 
would be the more likely to make the most of this new 
form of magic fire-starter.” 

‘‘ You are right,” replied Harold smiling. We’ll 
show it to Acharto first.” 

It was now nearly midday with no clouds in the sky. 
The sun was shining almost directly overhead. The 
boys knew that at this time they were quite sure to 
find Acharto resting in the cool of the priests’ house. 
In a short time they entered his house and found him 
seated on mats with most of his priests around him. 

‘‘ Acharto,” said Charley, “ how would you like to 
have a great piece of magic to show the people ? ” 

Acharto like it very much,” was the reply. Char- 
leyo Mahinee great priest. People like to see more 
magic. What will you show the people? ” 

Without answering this question directly, Charley 
turned to the priest and said : 

Acharto, do you think any one could make the sun 
come down from the sky and light a fire for him? ” 

‘‘ No one can do that,” replied Acharto in a positive 
tone. “ Sun too far ofiF.” 

Come out in the sunlight,” said Charley, ‘‘ and I’ll 
show you that it can be done.” 

Acharto, followed by the other priests, eagerly fol- 
lowed Charley out of the house into the full sunlight. 

‘‘ Tell your priests to bring the log of wood and the 
piece of small wood you once used for starting a fire 

165 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


by rubbing the smaller piece of wood rapidly over it” 

Ever since Charley had showed the people the 
method of lighting a fire by means of the wonderful 
yellow stone discovered on the mountain, the old 
method of obtaining a fire by friction was hardly ever 
used. As the men gathered around watching what he 
would do, Charley again spoke to Acharto, and said : 

So you don’t believe that any one can make the sun 
send a little piece of himself down to the earth to kindle 
a fire ? ” 

Why you ask so foolish questions, Charleyo Mahi- 
nee? ” said Acharto. No one can do such things.” 

But might it not be done here so near the House of 
the Idols?” 

‘‘ Yes, that might be,” answered the priest, as if 
eager to bring some of the idols into the magic. 

Would you mind bringing one of the idols out 
here ? ” inquired Charley. 

Me no mind. Glad to show how great our idols 
are.” So he commanded some of his assistants care- 
fully to lift the principal idol, the one that had gained 
such notoriety by seeming to speak to the people. 

Now, Acharto,” he said, ask the idol if he will 
not grant to the piece of magic knife-stone I have in 
my hand,” showing him the lens-shaped piece of ob- 
sidian, ‘‘ the power of commanding the sun to send 
down a small piece of himself to set fire to this wood 
almost instantly.” 

The question was asked by the priest, when Charley, 
by ventriloquism, made it appear to say: 

i66 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


“ Aa, Aa. Charleyo Mahinee taboo. Harealdo 
Mahinee taboo. Aa, Aa.” 

The priests, especially Acharto, were again both 
greatly surprised and frightened. They saw Charley, 
placing the log of wood in front of the idol, hold the 
piece of glass so that the sun’s rays were collected on 
its face, and when a bright spot, looking like a small 
piece of the sun, seemed to fall immediately on the 
surface of the log which almost instantly burst into a 
strong flame, they were greatly delighted. If this 
great piece of magic were done before the people, it 
would bring crowds to the House of the Idols, and 
thus cause many gifts to be laid on their tables. 

Now turning again to Acharto, Charley said : 

“ Ask the god whether he will not grant that the 
magic power of the fire-stone shall always bring a 
piece of the sun down to kindle a fire.” 

Again, by means of ventriloquism, Charley made 
the god appear to say : 

“Aa, Aa.” (Yes, yes.) 

The priests now entered into an excited and pro- 
longed conversation. They were greatly pleased that 
they had another piece of magic to show to the people. 

“ Let us go and tell Mahinee what the young white 
priest has done,” said Acharto. 

When Mahinee heard about what had happened in 
the House of the Idols, he expressed a wish to see this 
wonderful thing, and asked Charley whether they could 
not have a public exhibition the next day so that the 
people of the valley could see it for themselves. 

167 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


Charley agreed to this, and Mahinee appointed the 
next day, at noon, when it was understood that he and 
his chiefs and warriors, together with all the people 
of the valley who chose to come, should assemble be- 
fore the House of the Idols to see the wonderful man- 
ner in which the young white priest could bring a piece 
of the sun down from the sky to light a fire for the 
people of the valley. 

There was a great meeting the next day. The space 
in front of the House of the Idols was crowded with 
people from all parts of the valley. Acharto and the 
priests were there, and also Mahinee with his chiefs 
and warriors, besides many hundreds of the common 
people. 

Acharto made a speech to the people relating what 
happened when Charleyo the white priest had re- 
quested him to ask their principal god if he would not 
command a part of the sun to come down from the 
heavens and kindle a fire. He told how the answer 
came promising to do this, and how, moreover, when 
Charleyo held the magic glass of fire-stone over the log 
the wood had burst into a flame. He also told them 
the young white priest would now bring down fire 
from the sun. When Charley did this and the pile of 
kindling-wood, that had been placed on the ground, 
burst almost instantly into a flame when a bright spot 
of light fell on it, there were loud murmurs of surprise 
and admiration from every one. 

Mahinee was much brighter than any of his people. 
He appreciated the great advantage that would be 
i68 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


gained if moon-shaped pieces of the fire-stone could be 
obtained for their use. He therefore eagerly inquired 
of Charley through Marbonna whether he thought 
other pieces of moon-shaped fire-stone could be found 
on the mountain. When Charley replied that he be- 
lieved if they spent a long enough time searching they 
could find many other pieces, Mahinee determined to 
send another expedition to the volcanic cone for this 
purpose. 


169 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


CHAPTER XIV 

Taken Captives by the Natives of the Western 
Valley 

The expedition to the volcanic mountain left early the 
day following the exhibition of the magic burning- 
glass at the House of the Idols. Mahinee had given 
strict orders to make careful search for the moon- 
shaped fire-stone, and to bring back as many pieces as 
possible. 

Mahinee, who did not think it necessary to take per- 
sonal charge of this expedition, gave the command to 
Kooloo. In order to obtain as many of the magic 
fire-glasses as possible, he sent a number of men skilled 
in cutting the hard stones they had formerly employed 
for the heads of spears, for hatchets, knives, etc., to ac- 
company the expedition. He knew that in the chipping 
a waste is apt to occur from the stones splitting in un- 
desired shapes. He, therefore, adopted this plan so 
that the stones could be shaped on the slopes of the 
mountains near the places where the material was ob- 
tained. 

The party consisted of only ten warriors who, 
with the stone-cutters and other attendants, numbered 
twenty in all. This number Mahinee thought sufficient 
for the work. He did not believe there was any danger 

170 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


of an attack, although a bitter enmity existed between 
his people and those of the neighboring valley, that was 
called the Western Valley in order to distinguish it 
from his, or the Eastern Valley. It is true there had 
been several severe battles, but in all cases the victory 
had always been in favor of Mahinee’s people. Their 
neighbors, therefore, stood in fear of him, and would 
not be apt, he thought, to attack the expedition. 

At first everything was successful. They not only 
obtained large quantities of the clear knife-stone that 
had caused such a surprise to the people of the island, 
but new and better deposits were discovered. In order 
to give plenty of time to the work, it was understood 
that if necessary they might be gone for three weeks or 
more. 

They had now nearly completed their work, having 
been out on the mountain for about three weeks, and 
had made arrangements to return early the next morn- 
ing. The packing up of the moon-shaped pieces of ob- 
sidian, and other things they intended to take back 
with them, had been nearly completed. 

It was yet far from noon, and there were still many 
hours before sunset, so that Charley, Harold, Kooloo, 
Marbonna, with two of the warriors had gone to ex- 
amine another lava stream. 

An excellent view of the Western Valley could be 
had from this part of the mountain, but they were so 
intent on what they were doing that they looked only 
straight ahead of them. Not so, however, the people 
of the Western Valley. They had been watching Koo- 
171 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


loo’s small expedition of twenty ever since it had first 
reached the mountain, and had determined to attack it 
that afternoon. A large body of warriors, sent out to 
do this, had almost r-eached the head of the valley. 
Seeing that six of Kooloo’s little company had sepa- 
rated themselves from the others, and were making 
their way around a side of the cone where they could 
not be seen by the remainder of their company, they 
determined to begin the attack. Dividing themselves, 
therefore, into two bands, they sent the smaller band 
after Charley and his companions, while the other band 
hurried toward the hut at the base of the cone. 

Before Charley and those with him had reached the 
portion of the mountain they intended to visit, Harold 
stopped to make a careful examination of one of the 
lava streams. Charley and Kooloo wished to wait for 
him, but Harold assured them that it was not neces- 
sary, since he did not expect to be longer than ten or 
fifteen minutes and would then join them. That should 
he not reach them, he would meet them at the hut near 
the base of the cone, where the stone-chippers were 
still working. 

After examining the lava flow for some fifteen min- 
utes, Harold proceeded at a rapid pace in the direction 
taken by Charley and the others with the hope of over- 
taking them. They had moved more rapidly than he 
had expected, for he did not even see them until they 
were almost ready to descend. At this moment, how- 
ever, he saw the strange warriors just as they were at- 
tacking Charley, Kooloo, and his party. 

172 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


To his horror, Harold saw that the attacking party 
outnumbered Charley’s party three to one. He did not 
hesitate, however, but ran in the direction of Kooloo 
and Charley for the purpose of aiding them in the 
fight; but before he had gone very far, the short but 
severe fight was over. One of Kooloo’s warriors was 
killed, the other severely wounded, and Charley, Koo- 
loo, and Marbonna were taken prisoners. Their hands 
were quickly tied behind them, and they were being 
hurried toward the Western Valley. Before starting, 
however, Harold was horrified to see that they at once 
killed the wounded man and, instead of leaving the 
bodies of the two dead men on the mountain, were 
carrying them toward the valley on the left. 

Seeing that he could do nothing, Harold now de- 
termined to make his way to the hut, so as to let his 
people know what had happened. 

It appears, however, that some time before the at- 
tack on Kooloo’s party, some of his warriors who had 
been on the slopes of the cone near the hut had seen the 
approach of the invaders, but had not seen the party 
attacking Kooloo and his companions. Rushing to the 
camp they had given the alarm. There were imme- 
diate inquiries made for Kooloo, their chief. No one 
knew where he was. He had been seen to start out 
with Charley and Marbonna shortly after noon. Some 
declared they had seen them going down the river val- 
ley with two warriors ; others that they had seen them 
going in the direction of the opposite side of the cone. 
The greater number appeared to believe that they had 

173 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


gone down the river valley. Thinking this was so, the 
warrior who came next in rank to Kooloo, and would 
therefore command the expedition in his absence, gave 
orders to the men to take what they could with them, 
proceed down the valley, and thus avoid being cut off 
from their homes. This they did with the invaders in 
hot pursuit. The invaders were unable to catch up 
with them and, apparently fearing to go any further 
into the territory of so greatly feared an enemy as Ma- 
hinee, turned back, and running rapidly toward their 
valley, soon disappeared in the direction taken by the 
party that had carried away Charley, Kooloo, and 
Marbonna as captives. 

Before reaching the hut Harold saw the remainder 
of Kooloo’s men running down the valley with the in- 
vaders after them. Two of the men, however, who 
had stayed at the hut with the intention of bringing 
some of the material that had been left in the hurried 
departure of the others, and had thus been cut off 
from them, were hiding back of some blocks of lava 
waiting for a chance to join their people in the valley. 

Informing them of the capture of their friends, Har- 
old urged them as soon as they could do so to take 
word to their people of what he had witnessed. Wait- 
ing until the enemy had ceased to pursue Kooloo's 
men and had disappeared in the path taken by the 
captors of the two boys and Marbonna, they ran 
down the valley and overtook the retreating party and 
told them the sad news. They were brave fellows, 
those warriors of Mahinee. At first they were dis- 

174 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


posed to follow the invaders and, by offering battle, 
endeavor to rescue the captives. Better advice, how- 
ever, prevailed, so they determined to continue their 
way rapidly to their village where Mahinee would get 
together all his warriors and make a descent on the 
Western Valley. 

They were very anxious to reach Mahinee as soon as 
possible. Harold, who understood enough of their 
language to enable him to get some idea of what they 
were saying, heard to his horror that they were es- 
pecially anxious to bring the tidings quickly to Mahi- 
nee, since the invaders were great cannibals and would 
probably kill and eat their captives. 

But let us now see what was happening to Kooloo 
and his small party. They had left Harold and, little 
dreaming the danger that was so near them, were talk- 
ing about the success of the expedition and the things 
they intended to do on their return to the village. Char- 
ley had brought with him an unusually fine specimen 
of the moon-shaped fire-stone, so large and clear that 
it would almost instantly kindle a fire when the sun’s 
rays were focused on the fuel. 

They had not gone far before one of the warriors, 
who had lingered a short distance behind, came run- 
ning to them and said in an excited tone to Kooloo : 

“ Warriors from other valley coming this way.” 

Kooloo at once inquired : 

‘‘ How many warriors coming ? ” 

“ Very many. Three times more than all our men.” 

175 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


When Kooloo heard this, turning to Charley, he 
said: 

“We first look for Harealdo, and then try join 
our party.” 

“ Yes, Kooloo,” said Charley, “ we first find him.” 

But the invaders had spied them, and running 
rapidly were soon engaged in a fierce battle. It was 
quickly over, however, with the results Harold had 
witnessed. 

When Kooloo saw that their captors had brutally 
killed the wounded man, and were carrying his body 
and the body of the man first killed with them, he 
turned to Charley and said : 

“ Bad men. Cannibals. Take bodies to their valley, 
cook and eat them.” 

“ What do you think they will do with us, Kooloo ? ” 
inquired Charley. 

“ Bad people. Maybe they cook and eat us too.” 

Charley then turned to Marbonna and asked whether 
this was probable. The answer was far from reas- 
suring, for that person briefly said : 

“ Yes, kill and eat us too, maybe. 

Marbonna, however, kept his wits about him, and 
the first opportunity he had of coming near the leader, 
cried out, pointing to Charley : 

“ Taboo-taboo.” 

The captors seemed greatly frightened. Their 
leader, a brutal-looking man, with the most awful tat- 
tooings on his face of a pattern that made him look, if 
possible, even more cruel and ferocious than he was by 
176 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


nature, inquired of Marbonna how it was that Charley 
had become so great a taboo. Marbonna at once en- 
tered into a long explanation of the fact that both 
Charley and Kooloo had been declared taboo by the 
great Chief Mahinee; that besides this the white lad 
had been declared taboo by all their gods. He then 
told them of the day when each of their gods had cried 
aloud in the hearing of the people that the white lad 
was a great taboo. 

Now Mahinee was held in great fear by the people 
of the Western Valley. They knew him as a warrior 
who would punish any one who disregarded his taboo. 
But they were all the more frightened when they 
learned that Charley had been declared taboo-taboo in 
a miraculous manner by the actual voices of the gods 
speaking so that all the people could hear. 

The leader was so alarmed at what he heard about 
Charley that he ordered some of his men to unloose 
his hands, but at the same time telling him, through 
Marbonna, that should he attempt to escape he would 
be promptly killed. He also told him that he would be 
taken before their king and priests, who would then 
determine what was to be done with him and his com- 
panions. 

As soon as Charley’s hands were untied the party 
marched rapidly with their prisoners, and hurriedly 
descended into their own valley. 

As Charley had been able to see from the top of the 
volcanic cone on the day he and Harold had climbed it, 
this Western Valley closely resembled the valley in 

M 177 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


which they had passed so pleasant a time with Mahinee 
and his people. Though somewhat smaller and much 
shorter, yet it was hemmed in by high precipices, and 
was covered with a vegetation quite equal in luxuri- 
ance to that of their valley. 

Since Kooloo could now understand English fairly 
well, he and Charley conversed together without any 
danger of the savages knowing what they said. In 
this manner they were able to talk freely. Moreover, 
they could, in the same manner, talk safely with Mar- 
bonna. 

“ We are in a bad fix, Kooloo,” said Charley. 
‘‘ What would you advise? ” 

‘‘ Pretend not be afraid,” replied the lad. Maybe 
they kill us. Hear what king says. Maybe he no kill 
you because you great taboo. But king great enemy 
of Mahinee. Like to kill all and make Mahinee sorry. 
Suppose you ask Marbonna. He old man. Big head. 
He’ll tell you better than Kooloo can.” 

Acting under this advice, Charley turned to Mar- 
bonna and asked: 

“ What had we better do, Marbonna? ” 

After a while,” Marbonna replied, “ Charleyo show 
them some great magic. Then place your hands on 
Kooloo and me and say in loud voice, ‘ taboo, taboo.’ 
Then maybe men will be frightened because you are 
great magician. When you say we are taboo, tell them 
in a loud voice that if they do not untie our hands you 
will ask the gods to punish them.” 

It was three o’clock before an opportunity was ob- 
178 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


tained for Charley to show them some magic. At 
this time they reached a grove of breadfruit trees, and 
entering a house took from it the log of wood and the 
small piece of wood employed for producing a fire by 
rubbing the small piece of wood rapidly to and fro in 
a groove. When Marbonna saw what they were do- 
ing, he said : 

Ask the white lad, the great taboo, to bring down a 
piece of sun to light your fire.” 

The leader laughed at what Marbonna said in scorn. 

He can’t do that. No man can do that. Not even 
our priests could do that. Sun too far off.” 

“ Try,” said Marbonna. “ Young white lad big 
magician; has great power from the gods.” 

Wishing to see whether this was true or not, the 
leader motioned to Charley that he would like to see 
him do this great thing, intimating, however, that he 
did not believe for a moment that he could do it. 
Charley, however, pretending to make strange mo- 
tions to the sun, and to speak to it in words that the 
natives could not understand, nor, indeed, could he, 
for he made up the words just as they came into his 
head, then held the moon-shaped piece of volcanic 
glass over the wood laid for the fire. A bright light 
just like a piece of the sun seemed to come down and 
rest on the wood. Almost instantly it burst into a 
bright flame, when Charley, pretending to be not at all 
surprised, turned away as if he did not think much of 
a little miracle like that. The natives were greatly 
astonished. The awe in which they already held the 
179 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


lad from what they had heard, was now greatly in- 
creased by what they had seen. 

Probably with a view of making the fire burn more 
briskly and thus hasten the roasting of the breadfruit, 
for which they had built it, the men had collected a 
number of candle-nuts, the same as they had employed 
in the House of the Idols in their valley for candles, and 
placed them in the pile with the wood. 

Picking up one of these nuts, and motioning to the 
savages to look at him, Charley held it so they could all 
distinctly see it and then, employing a trick he had 
learned in sleight of hand, called “ palming,” he caused 
it magically to disappear. The savages now regarded 
him with positive fear. Nor was this lessened when 
he pretended to take the nut out of the left ear of the 
leader, holding it up so that all the people could see it. 
Then, as if he feared this might not be enough, he 
again motioned to the men that he would make the nut 
disappear in the man’s ear and would afterward take 
it out from the end of one of his feet. As the savages 
watched this, to them, most miraculous feat, but to 
one well versed in sleight of hand, a very ordinary per- 
formance, they drew back from the lad in actual terror. 
Had they not all seen the nut disappear in the ear of 
their leader? Had they not with equal distinctness 
actually seen it taken out of his right foot? Must not 
the white lad be a most wonderful magician? He 
could command the sun to come down from the sky and 
light their fires. He could make a candle-nut disappear 
and reappear, and pass in so wonderful a manner into 
i8o 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


the ear of their leader and thence through his body and 
out at the foot. Was not this greater magic than any- 
thing they had ever heard of? 

Indeed, even Kooloo and Marbonna were greatly 
astonished at what Charley had done with the candle- 
nut. He was careful in not permitting his magic to 
become too common, and never before had they seen 
what seemed to them so wonderful. 

Seeing he had produced the desired impression on 
the savages, Charley now, placing his hands on the 
heads of Kooloo and Marbonna, cried out in a loud, 
angry voice : 

“ Taboo, taboo,’' and then pointing to the cords that 
bound their hands motioned to the leader with an 
angry look to remove them. Although greatly 
frightened at what he saw, the leader said to Mar- 
bonna : 

“ Must go tell great chief and priests first. See what 
they say.” 

After they had roasted and eaten the breadfruit, they 
again passed at a rapid gait down the valley. 


i8i 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


CHAPTER XV 

What was Done on Harding Island 

But let us now go back to the time when Charley and 
Harold were carried off toward the northeast in the 
war canoe. Rompey had delivered Charley’s message, 
and Captain Harding and Jack, seizing their rifles and 
revolvers, and Hiram a cutlass as well as a revolver, 
had boarded No. 23, the largest and best of their 
boats, and rowed it rapidly toward the southeastern 
end of the island. They reached this part of the 
island in shorter time than they had ever before done, 
and crossing to the southern side of Harding Channel, 
a channel that had been formed by an earthquake while 
they were on the island, moored the boat and ran 
rapidly along the beach to the southeastern corner of 
the island. But they were too late. The war canoe 
had left so long ago with the boys that it was now far 
off toward the northeast, where it could only be seen 
indistinctly with the naked eye. 

Hiram, who like most sailors, possessed excellent 
sight, pointing to the indistinct boat, said : 

“ Cap’n, I reckon that be them.” 

The captain who had with him a pair of glasses, 
formerly the property of his friend. Doctor Parsons, 
at once pointed them to the distant object. These 
glasses were unusually powerful, so that the captain 
182 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


was not only able to see the boat distinctly and recog- 
nize the boys, but could even see that instead of look- 
ing frightened and sorrowful, they had been able to 
conceal their true feelings with the hope of gaining the 
good-will of their captors. They were certainly plucky 
and brave boys to be able to show a smiling face at a 
time when they were being carried off, they knew not 
where, from the island on which they had spent so 
many happy days with their friends. 

As the captain stood watching the rapidly disappear- 
ing boat. Jack, becoming restless, turned to him and 
said : 

Shall we not get in our boat and follow them in 
the direction we see they are going, and try to catch up 
with them?” 

** Jack,” said the captain, handing the glasses to the 
lad, take a look at the boys through this glass. You 
can then see that there are six men with paddles who 
are urging the canoe rapidly through the water. In 
addition to the rowers, there are six other men ready to 
take their places when tired. They can, therefore, keep 
on moving the boat day and night without stopping. 
Their canoe is going at a rate far more rapid than we 
could give to our boat even if all three of us rowed, one 
of us taking two oars and each of the other two an oar. 
You see, therefore, there would be no use in our at- 
tempting to follow them now. They would soon be 
completely out of sight.” 

Jack saw that what the captain said was true. Then, 
turning to him, he remarked sorrowfully : 

183 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


“ Then at least let us climb to the top of Jackson 
Cliffs and watch the boys as long as we can. In this 
manner we will be able to see if the war canoe makes 
any change in its direction.” 

“ That’s a good suggestion, Jack,” said the captain. 
‘‘ Don’t you think it is, Hiram? ” he asked of the other 
man. 

‘‘ Mr. Jack’s idee is all right,” was the reply. “ Let’s 
hurry up afore we lose sight of the canoe.” 

They had landed their boat on the southern side of 
the channel. The cliffs referred to by Jack were sit- 
uated on its northern side. Running rapidly to the 
boat they got in and pulled it to that side. Then, 
climbing quickly to the top of the cliffs, they again ex- 
amined the distant boat. 

As the captain pointed his glasses to the distant 
canoe, turning to Hiram, he said in an excited tone : 

There are four other canoes ahead. The canoe 
containing our boys is being urged rapidly toward 
them. Look and tell me, Hiram,” he added, handing 
him the glass, ‘‘ if you do not think the other canoes 
belong to the same party as the canoe that is carrying 
away the boys.” 

Hiram took the glass and, after examining the 
distant canoes, replied : 

I reckon they be friends, not only bekase the other 
boats be going toward them as if they wished to git 
closer, but also bekase, as fur as I kin see, the men in 
all the canoes are dressed alike. At least,” he added, 

if one kin call the little that they wear, a dress. They 
184 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


hev the same kind of spears too; and agin, all the 
canoes be of the same build.” 

Jack, take a look through the glasses and tell me 
what you think.” 

Jack looked through the glasses for some time, and 
then said : 

‘‘ The canoe containing Charley and Harold has 
reached the other canoes that seem to have waited for 
it. They are doing something I don’t understand. All 
the other canoes have stopped and have collected 
around the canoe containing the boys. See, captain,” 
he cried in a still more excited tone, handing the cap- 
tain the glasses, I think Charley and Harold have 
left the canoe in which they were carried away and 
have gone into the largest of the canoes. Am I not 
right?” 

The captain eagerly scanned the distant canoes. He 
could distinctly see that two figures he was almost cer- 
tain were the boys, since they were much smaller than 
the others, had stepped from one of the smaller to the 
largest of the canoes, and as soon as this was done the 
canoes all continued their journey toward the north- 
east. 

I think you are right. Jack,” replied the captain, 
and then handing the glasses to Hiram, he said : “ Look 
again, Hiram, and let me know whether you still think 
they are friends.” 

Hiram again looked long and earnestly through the 
glasses, and then said : 

‘‘ They be friends, that’s sartin. I reckon that sense 

185 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


the boys went to the bigger canoe thet they hev gone 
to the chief of the party. Now listen to what Hiram 
Higgenbotham says. As fur as I kin see, and I only 
wish I could see better, they are all sitting quiet and 
comfortable like. Them lads hez made friends with the 
savages. Ef not, why should they change boats ? But, 
cap’n,” he said, there be no difficulty in counting the 
number in them boats. There be four small canoes and 
one large canoe. There be twelve men in each of the 
small canoes and twenty-four in the big one. Now, if 
my reckoning is correct, that makes seventy-two fight- 
ing men. Cap’n,” he added, I reckon you’ll agree 
with me thet there would be no sense in trying to reach 
them boats to once. Supposing we could come up to 
them, they would either kill us offhand or take us cap- 
tives, and then thar would be no one to try to free the 
boys. Now, cap’n, the best Hiram Higgenbotham kin 
tell ye, is thet it would be tarnation foolish to attempt 
to catch up to them now. What do ye think ? Is thet 
not so ? ” 

It would be a piece of great folly, Hiram,” replied 
the captain, “ to attempt to catch up to the canoes or to 
give them any idea that we were following them. 
Should they once believe that an attempt is being made 
to rescue the boys, they would feel less kindly disposed 
to them. We will, therefore, wait at least a day or 
two.” 

But, captain,” said Jack anxiously, we will then 
certainly follow the boys, will we not, and try to rescue 
them from the savages ? ” 

1 86 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


Most certainly, Jack,” was the reply. “ There is 
no need for you to worry about that. We will never 
rest until we have brought our dear boys back again to 
Harding Island ; provided, of course,” he added, they 
have not been killed by the savages.” And then seeing 
that his remark had greatly affected Jack, he added: 
“You are almost a man now, Jack. I think it better 
that you look this matter straight in the face and 
recognize that the boys may be killed by the savages at 
any time. However,” he added, “ as I have already 
said, if the boys have gained the good-will of the 
savages, as I think they have done, then they are prob- 
ably as safe with them as they would be with us. What 
do you think of that, Hiram ? ” he added, turning to 
that person. 

“ Wall, cap’n,” he replied, with a glad smile, “ you 
and I know that our lads be uncommonly strong in 
winning a fellow’s affections. Both on them, but es- 
pecially Mr. Charley.” 

During all this time the dog Rompey was in great 
distress. He would look toward the distant canoes, in 
which he seemed to know his young masters were being 
carried away, and would every now and then look up 
into the faces of Jack and the two men, giving a 
mournful howl as if beseeching them to go after the 
canoes and bring the boys back. 

“ All right, Rompey,” said the captain good-na- 
turedly, “ we will do all we can to bring them back. 
Do you want us to try to see Charley and Harold 
again ? ” 


187 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


At the mention of his young masters’ names the poor 
dog began barking and shaking his tail, as much as if 
to say that that was exactly what he wished them to do. 

They stood at the edge of the cliffs taking turns look- 
ing through the glasses at the canoes that were now 
rapidly disappearing in the distance. At last even the 
strong glasses were unable to show them anything. 
The canoes had completely disappeared below the 
horizon. 

** Come,” said the captain, ‘‘ we can do no more 
here. Let us hurry back to Jackson House and give 
this matter our most careful consideration. It will be 
a long voyage. We must get the boat ready; take on 
plenty of food and water, and determine the character 
of the other things of which we will stand in need.” 

As they were returning to the boat, poor Rompey 
thought they were now certainly going to take it 
in the direction in which they had all seen the canoe 
containing his young masters disappear. He there- 
fore ran ahead of them with joyous barkings, as if 
he felt certain he would soon be again with his young 
masters. When, however, instead of heading the boat 
toward the northeast they took it through Harding 
Channel, the poor animal began moaning and looked 
earnestly into the captain’s face as if beseeching him 
to change the direction in which they were going. 

'' Poor doggie,” said the captain, greatly affected by 
his actions. We will get the boat ready to go for 
Charley and Harold.” 

Doubtless many of my readers will be surprised that 
i88 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


a man of intelligence like the captain would talk in this 
way to the dog, as if he expected he would be under- 
stood. But, as we have frequently remarked, it was 
by no means certain that the dog had not some general 
idea as to what was said to him. For our part, we be- 
lieve he had. 

It was, indeed, a sorrowful party that returned that 
night to Jackson House. None of them felt like eating 
supper. They were too sorrowful. Even Rompey re- 
fused to eat anything, and stood looking up into the 
face of the captain as if he said : 

‘‘ Why do you lose so much time waiting here ? Why 
don’t you take the boat and go look for the boys ? ” 

“ This will never do,” said the captain to Jack and 
Hiram. ‘‘ We must force ourselves to eat. There is 
much to be done. In the first place we must agree 
on the best kinds of food to load in boat No. 23, and 
the amount of fresh water we can take. Then, what is 
even still more important, we must determine what 
other things we are apt to stand in great need of while 
on the ocean. Then again I must make a careful study 
of the chart that we have of this part of the Pacific 
Ocean so as to find out, as far as possible, what large 
islands are probably to be found beyond the northeast 
horizon. In this manner we ought to be able to make 
a fair guess as to where the savages are probably ta- 
king the canoes. We must, therefore, force ourselves 
to eat something. Come, Hiram,” he added, ‘‘ we’ll all 
help you get something ready. We must keep up our 
strength.” 


189 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


It was hard work, but they all made the effort and 
began helping Hiram to prepare supper. But when 
it was ready, although each did his best to pretend to 
eat, they were unable to do so. Their heavy hearts 
had not only completely banished any semblance of ap- 
petite, but it even seemed to them that they would cer- 
tainly choke if they made any efforts to swallow. See- 
ing this, the captain said : 

I suppose we might as well give it up; to-morrow 
we may be able to do better.’’ 

So helping Hiram clear away the supper and wash- 
ing things up, the captain turning to Hiram and Jack, 
said : 

Come and help me look over the charts I have of 
this part of the Pacific. We ought to be able to form 
some idea of the part of the ocean toward which the 
savages have gone.” 

Do you think, captain,” inquired Jack, ‘‘ that any 
of these charts are sufficiently accurate so that you can 
rely on them? ” 

Of course. Jack,” replied the captain, ‘‘ while I ac- 
knowledge that none of the charts can be absolutely 
relied on, yet, with the exception of very small islands, 
I believe it improbable that the charts will not show 
all the large islands that exist in this neighborhood. 

Now,” he continued, as far as I can make it out, 
Harding Island is situated here,” he said, pointing gen- 
erally to the islands of the Paumotu Archipelago. I 
think our island is one of the northeasternmost of these 
islands.” 


190 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


“ About here, captain ? ” said Jack, pointing to a 
particular island. 

Yes, about there,” he replied. ‘‘ As you can see,” 
he continued, no large islands are represented on this 
chart until we come to the Marquesas. These islands, 
however, lie in the path taken by the canoes toward 
the northeast. It would seem, therefore, as if the 
canoes must pass over a distance of between five hun- 
dred or six hundred miles before they reach any of 
these islands. Now for us to take a small boat like boat 
No. 23 so far will be a very difficult matter. If, how- 
ever, a storm does not overtake us, I think we ought to 
be able, with care, to cover this distance in safety. 
We will be obliged, however, to husband our food and 
water carefully so that the supply shall last until we 
reach the distant island, wherever it may be situated.” 

Wall, cap’n,” said Hiram, it’s fortunate that this 
be the season of the year when big storms are scarce 
like. Ain’t that so ? ” he continued. 

‘‘ Yes, Hiram, you’re right,” was the reply. “ I 
think the chances are excellent for continued fair 
weather for many weeks. However, even if it were not 
so, I am sure neither you nor Jack would hesitate to go 
after our boys no matter what the weather may be.” 

“ I sartinly would not hesitate, cap’n,” said Hiram. 

“ I needn’t tell you I would not ! ” cried Jack. 

“ I did not suppose for a moment that either of you 
would hesitate,” said the captain. “ I was only stating 
what is undoubtedly true. As there are only three 
of us, and we cannot keep rowing continuously, it will 
191 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


take a long time to reach any of the Marquesas. We 
must, therefore, carefully determine the amount of 
food and water we can carry, after other necessaries 
have been placed on the boat.’’ 

But, captain,” said Jack in a sorrowful tone, 
even supposing we reach the Marquesas, how can 
we find out to which of these islands the boys have 
been taken ? There are a great many islands in this 
part of the world, are there not? ” 

It is unfortunately true. Jack, that there are a great 
many islands to the northeast of Harding Island,” 
was the reply. ‘‘To tell the truth, I do not know how 
we can find out to which island the boys have been 
taken. Indeed, there may be no way now but to ex- 
amine the different islands, one after another, until we 
find our boys.” 

“ And during this search,” replied Jack, “ we will 
have good chances of being taken prisoners ourselves.” 

“ There is no doubt about that,” was the reply. 
“ But we will willingly take our chances.” 

“ Cap’n,” suggested Hiram, “ you know how wery 
bright those boys be, especially Mr. Charley. Ef we 
keep our eyes wide open we will find that one or the 
other of them will have left something to pint out not 
only whar they hev landed, but also the direction in 
which they had been took. Ef course, I know,” he 
added, “ the chances are sartinly agin us landing on the 
identical island, and especially on the wery spot whar 
they landed. But let that be as it may, I be wery glad 
to hear ye say that we will examine one island arter 
192 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


another until we find the identical place whar they be. 
This is what Hiram Higgenbotham says.'' 

“ And so say I," remarked Jack. 

“ And now,” said the captain, “ we had better turn 
in. But let us read the Bible lesson as has been our 
custom when the boys were with us.” 

The captain then read selections from the Forty- 
sixth and the One Hundred and Twenty-first Psalms. 
The beautiful words from the Forty-sixth Psalm were 
very comforting. When he read : “ ‘ God is our refuge 
and strength, a very present help in trouble. Therefore 
will not we fear, though the earth be removed, and 
though the mountains be carried into the midst of 
the sea; though the waters thereof roar and be trou- 
bled.' ” 

And then when he read in the One Hundred and 
Twenty-first Psalm: 

' I will lift up mine eyes unto the hills, from 
whence cometh my help.' 

^ My help cometh from the Lord, which made 
heaven and earth. He will not suffer thy foot to be 
moved ; he that keepeth thee will not slumber ; it 
seemed as though the promises had been made directly 
to them. So bidding each other good night, they all 
turned in. 


N 


193 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


CHAPTER XVI 

Preparations for the Rescue of Charley and 
Harold 

It was late when they retired for the night. The sad 
occurrences of the day had been so exciting that it 
was long after midnight before any of them fell asleep, 
and even then their rest was so disturbed by alarming 
dreams of savage cannibals, and of Charley and Har- 
old in constant danger, that it was not until toward 
early morning that they fell into a deep sleep from 
which they were awakened by the rays of the rising 
sun. 

As far as our feelings are concerned, there is a great 
difference between the darkness of the night and the 
bright light of the morning. Somehow or other, just 
why perhaps no one can tell, troubles do not seem 
so serious in daylight as at night. The bright sunlight 
probably acts as a stimulant that strengthens our cour- 
age, so enabling us the better to face difficulties. When 
Hiram came to call them for breakfast, for he had got- 
ten up long before the others, they were able to eat a 
fairly hearty meal. 

After breakfast they thoroughly overhauled boat 
No. 23, making a careful examination of its joints, 
its water-tight compartments, paying special atten- 
194 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


tion to the condition of the oar-locks and oars; for 
should any serious accident happen to any of these, at 
a distance from land, they would indeed be in great 
danger. 

“ I reckon it’ll be safer, cap’n,” said Hiram, ‘‘ ef we 
took a couple of extra oar-locks out of boat No. 13, and 
two of the oars. What d’ye think ? ” 

I agree with you, Hiram,” was the reply. “ Jack,” 
he inquired, ‘‘ do you know where the boys left this 
boat ? ” 

I think I know where it is, sir,” was the reply. 
‘‘ The boys discovered a small grotto on the western 
side of Harding Channel, and generally hid the boat 
in this grotto when they intended to spend some time 
in the cabin of the wreck. I am almost certain I 
can find it for you.” 

“ Then,” said the captain, “ let us take boat No. 23 
and look for boat No. 13. We will take both boats 
to the Maddox Clearing and load them with vegetables, 
cocoanuts, and other edibles for use on our long voy- 
age. We will then return to Jackson House and get 
everything ready. I believe we shall be able to start 
early to-morrow morning.” 

When they entered boat No. 23, Rompey again 
became almost wild with joy. At last, thought the 
poor animal, they intend to look for my young masters. 
When, however, instead of passing through Harding 
Channel to the ocean, so as to take the boat toward 
the northeast, they stopped at the northern side of the 
channel at the mouth of the grotto, Rompey became 

195 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


restless. He could not understand what seemed to him 
to be such vacillating conduct. Suddenly, however, 
remembering that this was the place where he and 
the boys had left the boat, he apparently began to think 
that perhaps his young masters had returned to the 
island in the night and that he would see them in the 
boat. He therefore began to bark joyously. 

“ Have you any idea, Jack,” inquired the captain, 
noticing the action of the dog, “ why Rompey seems 
so pleased ? ” 

I think I understand it, sir,” was the reply. He 
probably remembers this as the place where the boys 
left their boat. Possibly he can detect their scent.” 

Then, Hiram,” said the captain, we’ll take our 
boat into the grotto and look for boat No. 13.” 

They found the boat where the boys had hid it, near 
the entrance. Rompey became greatly excited as they 
approached it, but when he found his young masters 
were not there, he commenced to howl mournfully, and 
when they attached the boat to the stern of boat No. 
23, towing it after them to Maddox House, he again 
looked at them in a wondering manner as if he could 
not understand why they did not at once row the boat 
toward the northeast. 

At Maddox House they found the boys had left 
everything in good order. As they passed through 
the room in which they had last slept, a feeling of sad- 
ness came over them. Would they ever see the boys 
again ? 

Jack especially was deeply affected. 

196 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


‘‘ What are you thinking of, Jack? ” asked the cap- 
tain. 

“ I was wondering,” was the reply, “ whether we 
would ever see this place again, and especially if the 
boys will ever see it again.” 

“ We’ll hope so anyhow. Jack,” was the reply. 

Placing in boat No. 23 such things as they thought 
would be needed on their long voyage, they shut up the 
house so as to keep out the rain, etc. Going to the 
clearing, they took back with them quantities of beets, 
onions, sugar-cane, and such other things that might be 
useful. 

As soon as they reached Jackson House they began 
packing different things in boat No. 23. Since the 
space in the boat was limited, great care was necessary 
in order to avoid either overloading, or loading injudi- 
ciously, for the introduction of too much of any one 
article would necessitate the leaving out of some other 
article. 

Now,” said the captain to his companions, ‘‘ sup- 
pose you each tell me what should be taken. You be- 
gin, Hiram.” 

“ Wall,” said Hiram, “ I think we had better take 
a few things wot will be likely to please the savages 
we will meet when we wisit the islands to look for the 
boys.” 

Name some of these things, Hiram,” said the cap- 
tain. 

I reckon that ye couldn’t give them savages a bet- 
ter present than spikes or nails,” was the reply. They 
197 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


are sure to be pleased to git bits of iron, especially soft 
iron, since they kin make ’em into fishhooks or pints 
for their spears. Then, if we kin spare’ em, take along 
some of the hatchets from the hardware we took off 
the brig.” 

‘‘What have you to suggest. Jack?” said the cap- 
tain. 

“ I think we had better take a few of the highly 
colored blankets, captain,” replied Jack, “ and some of 
the calico prints we made our underclothes of. The 
savages would probably greatly admire their bright 
colors.” 

“ We’ll certainly take some of these things. Jack,” 
replied the captain. 

“ While we are at it, cap’n,” said Hiram, “ I reckon 
I’d better put in as many of the canned goods as we kin 
spare room fur. Such things contain a lot of food in 
a wery small space.” 

“ One of the most important things yet has not been 
mentioned, captain,” said Jack. 

“ What is that ? ” inquired the captain. 

“ The medicine chest,” was the reply, “ and the sur- 
gical instruments we found in it.” I 

“ Yes, we must certainly take them,” replied the cap- 
tain. “ There is something,” continued the captain, 
“ that has not yet been mentioned — the box of pearls 
we took from the cabin of the coral-encrusted wreck of 
the brigantine. Do you think we should take it or 
leave it here, Hiram ? ” 

“ It sartinly wouldn’t take much room,” said Hiram, 
198 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


but I reckon we had better leave it hid somewhere at 
Jackson House. It would bother us to look arter it 
on the boat. We’ll come back here some day, and we’ll 
continue fur to live on the island until we git rescued.” 

I believe you are right, Hiram,” said the captain. 
‘‘ What do you think. Jack? ” 

By all means leave the pearls,” was the reply. 
‘‘We will hardly want to use them while away from 
the island and, as Hiram says, if we come back, as we 
shall try to do, we can then get them. Captain,” con- 
tinued Jack, “ of course we will take fishing-lines and 
nets? ” 

“ Yes,” was the reply, “ we’ll need them to add fish 
to our food supplies.” 

Rompey seemed to have come to the conclusion, 
when he saw all the different things being packed in the 
boat, that at last they were all going to look for his 
young masters. He kept a close watch on the boat as 
if he feared it might go off without him. 

Considering the number of things they wished to 
take with them, the captain was somewhat doubtful 
whether it would not be preferable to load up boat No. 
13 and tow it after them. There were certainly many 
advantages to be gained by doing this, but then on 
the other hand the disadvantages were also many. 

“ Do you think it better to load up boat No. 13 and 
take it with us, or not, Hiram? ” asked the captain. 

After thinking for a long time before answering, 
Hiram said : “ Thar is much thet can be said on both 
sides of sech a question.” 


199 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


“ Then let us hear both sides,” said the captain. 

“ Wall,” was the reply, “ in the fust place, ef we take 
boat No. 13, we kin carry a sight more of both wittals 
and drink, and then too, we kin carry a lot of stuff that 
would tickle the savages. But what is more impor- 
tanter, we could more than double our load of fresh 
water. Now it would sartinly be of great adwantage 
to carry these extry things.” 

“ Now,” said the captain, “ let us hear your reasons 
for not taking boat No. 13.” 

‘‘ Sence boat No. 13 can’t take itself,” said Hiram, 
speaking slowly as if considering every word, ‘‘ one of 
us would hev to row it, or we would hev to tow it arter 
us, so we would go much slower. Now this would be 
unfortunate ez the voyage will be a long one anyhow, 
and ef it takes too long, we’ll eat all our wittals and 
drink all our water afore we reach the islands.” 

Why couldn’t one of us row the smaller boat and 
two of us the larger boat? ” inquired Jack. 

‘‘ Kase,” was the reply, there be but three of us. 
No fellow could keep on rowing continuous like. We 
hev to sleep sometimes. Ef we take No. 13, we’d spin 
out our voyage so long ez to make it dangerous.” 

“ I’m afraid you’re right,” said the captain, we 
can’t take No. 13, although I would like to do so.” 

When the captain came finally to this decision, Hi- 
ram said : 

I’m glad ye intend to leave boat No. 13 behind, 
cap’n, fur I think that the reasons agin taking it are 
strongest.” 


200 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


Boat No. 23 was thoroughly packed and ready to 
start long before sunset. During this time numerous 
arguments were advanced and «6uggestions made as to 
the advisability of changing the amount or character 
of the materials that should be taken with them. They 
thought of taking several additional articles, but when 
it was found that this would require the leaving of 
some other article, they decided to make no changes. 

While there was one thing the captain would have 
liked to take, yet he did not think it advisable to do so. 
This was the manuscript of Doctor Parsons’ great 
work on The Physical Geography of the Sea.” When 
Jack asked him about it, he said : 

I fear it would be too risky to take it ; it could 
so easily get lost or ruined. No, I will leave it in 
Jackson House. Should the opportunity ever come, 
I intend sending this manuscript to America to the 
doctor’s heirs, and shall endeavor to have it published 
for them.” 

Don’t ye think we had better put the bronze cannon 
in the boat wot we got from the pirate wessel in the 
Sargasso Sea, cap’n? ” inquired Hiram. ‘‘ I know it’s 
heavy, but I hev been thinkin’ that sence we may have 
to fight with the savages, it might come awful handy.” 

“ You’re right, Hiram,” was the reply. ‘‘ We’ll take 
the cannon as well as powder and balls; for I think 
you told me that you had cast some balls for load- 
ing it.” 

Next morning, after an early breakfast, putting 
Jackson House in order they carefully closed it and, 
201 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


silently bidding good-bye to the place in which they 
had spent so many happy days, they got into boat No. 
23 and rapidly rowed through the lagoon toward 
Harding Channel. Rompey, who was of course with 
them, was now almost wild with delight. He was sure 
that they were at last going to look for his young 
masters. 

Rompey,” said Jack to the dog, we’re going now 
to find Charley and Harold. Will you help us ? ” 

Rompey certainly did his best by a wonderful com- 
bination of joyous barkings and tail shakings, to let 
them know that he certainly would, and that they could 
count upon him. 

They had no idea of taking Satan, since they knew 
the bird could easily look after itself on the island. 
Satan, however, had evidently intended to go, and had 
the intelligence to wait until the boat was some little 
distance from the island before joining them. As she 
alighted on the boat, the captain said : 

We’ll have to let her stay now. We can’t take the 
time to go back with her.” 

The captain and Hiram took the first turn at the 
oars, and under their vigorous, but not too rapid 
strokes, the boat was soon moving swiftly through 
Harding Channel out into the ocean toward the north- 
east, until it finally reached so distant a point that 
Harding Island disappeared below the southwestern 
horizon. 


202 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


CHAPTER XVII 

A Long Voyage in an Open Boat 

Had Captain Harding and Hiram been less experi- 
enced, they would probably have made the mistake of 
putting forth too great an effort at the start. They 
both well knew that their limited supply of food and 
water made it necessary that the long voyage should 
be completed in the shortest time possible. But they 
were also aware of that curious physiological condition 
known as getting one’s second wind. By their own 
experience, and what they had witnessed in others, they 
knew that when obliged to make prolonged physical 
exertion, if the effort at the beginning is not too pro- 
nounced, a time will soon come when a relation will 
be established between the beating of the heart and the 
rate of breathing, such as will enable the exertion to be 
continued and even increased without marked physical 
distress. If, however, the beginning calls for too rapid 
an expenditure of energy, the physical distress due to 
excessive heart action and breathing soon becomes so 
great that all efforts must be stopped until conditions 
become more nearly normal. 

There is a big stretch of water to pass over, Hi- 
ram,” said the captain. “ We’ll take it easy at the start. 
We must expend our energy intelligently. As you 
know, if we work in this way we will be able to con- 
203 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


tinue the long row we have ahead of us at a fairly good 
rate.” 

1 allow ye be right, cap’n,” replied Hiram. Ef 
we go slow at fust we’ll acterally git over thet ere bit 
of water much more sartinly then ef we started on a 
rush. Does that queer you, Mr. Jack?” he said, ad- 
dressing the lad. 

“No, Hiram,” was the reply; “I remember the 
athletes at Eton always made the best records in long 
runs by starting slowly and then increasing their pace. 
In that way a fellow gets his second wind. That’s what 
you mean, Hiram, isn’t it? ” he continued. 

“ Thet’s just what I do mean, Mr. Jack,” was the 
reply. 

“ But, Hiram,” said Jack, “ you and the captain 
must not forget that I expect to do my full share of 
work. If you do not row too rapidly I can keep at 
the oars for many hours before being used up.” 

“ Each of us will do his part of the work,” said the 
captain. “ But neither Hiram nor I expect a boy to do 
a man’s work. Whatever you can do. Jack, I am sure 
you will do willingly.” 

There were four oar-locks in the boat, so that it was 
possible to keep either two men at the oars, or to have 
all hands at work at the same time by one of the men 
rowing with two oars and the other man and Jack sit- 
ting by each other pulling each one oar. This latter 
method, however, they did not consider, since if all 
three worked at the same time they would be unable 
to relieve one another, and in a long row like that they 
204 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


had ahead of them frequent rests were necessary. 
They therefore arranged matters so that for twelve 
hours of daylight, say from six a. m., to six-thirty p. m.^ 
one of them would always be at the oars. After con- 
siderable thought, the captain determined on the fol- 
lowing division of the day. Jack was to take charge of 
the little cooking that they could do. In addition to this 
he was to relieve each of the men during the daylight 
work at such intervals as would give him six hours of 
rowing. In this way each man would have three hours 
of rest, or nine hours of rowing each day during the 
daytime, and Jack six. 

During the night, it was agreed that but one of them 
should keep at the oars, and then only for periods of 
three hours each, the night being divided into three 
watches, during which time it was understood that the 
boat should be kept moving at a much slower rate than 
during the daytime. 

This division of time called for breakfast at five- 
thirty A. M.^ thus permitting the morning rowing to be- 
gin promptly at six. This would bring the first six 
hours of the morning’s work to midday, or twelve 
o’clock. Then another half-hour was given for dinner. 
Then an additional six hours, from twelve-thirty to six- 
thirty P. M.^ would complete the full twelve hours of 
day work, and bring on the first four hours of night 
work for one of the party. 

As can readily be seen the amount of work required 
for each was considerable; Jack by no means had a 
small amount of work apportioned to him. In addition 
205 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


to his turn at the oars, there was the work necessary 
for the preparation of the meals, and had not this 
necessarily been of a very simple character, his share 
of the work would probably have proved too onerous. 
Their being in a small open boat, however, prevented 
much cooking from being done. Nevertheless, by 
placing in the stern of the boat a disk of sheet-iron 
that had been found with the stores of hardware on the 
brig, and intended for placing under ranges or stoves, 
and spreading a thin layer of sand over this, they were 
able to kindle a fire in a small stove, and so heat canned 
vegetables, soups, and meat ; to boil water for the mak- 
ing of tea, coffee, or chocolate, as well as to cook any 
fish they might be so fortunate as to catch. Since from 
lack of room, the amount of fuel they could carry was 
necessarily limited, the captain had counted on being 
able to keep up the fire by the fats or oils that came 
from some of the fishes. It may be said here that the 
amount of work thus laid out by the captain was so 
great that when any of them was relieved, whether 
during the day or the night, he generally turned in, in 
order thus to increase his amount of rest. 

Everything went well during the first day. The sur- 
face of the ocean was in splendid condition for rowing. 
Although the Southeast Trades blew almost at right 
angles to the general direction in which they were row- 
ing the boat, yet the wind was not strong and, being 
dry, brought with it a refreshing coolness that made 
their labor at the oars far less severe than it would have 
been had no wind been blowing. 

206 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


Rompey behaved himself in a most exemplary man- 
ner during the entire voyage. He appeared to be per- 
fectly satisfied now that the boat was moving in the 
direction in which he had seen his young masters dis- 
appear. He had great faith in the ability of the peo- 
ple in the boat to take it to the place where they would 
find the boys. He spent a great part of the time in 
looking intently toward the northeast, as if he believed 
that it was in this direction they would find the two lads 
of whom he seemed to be^ constantly thinking. 

They long afterward remembered that first night on 
the ocean in their little open boat. There had been al- 
most no clouds in the sky during the greater part of 
the day, but toward sunset light bands of the cirrus 
clouds began to collect overhead, while not far above 
the horizon the cumulus clouds, that during the day had 
been moving across the heavens as snow-white heaps, 
began to collect near the northwest horizon under the 
action of the Southeast Trade Winds. As the sun sank 
slightly below the western horizon, his colored rays 
began to paint the western clouds with the sunset tints 
of gold and crimson, while overhead the yellow and 
orange tints spread out on the huge canvas of the 
heavens, produced a combination of colors that none 
of them had ever before seen equaled. Nor was this 
all. The clouds flinging off their colored lights began 
to paint the ocean with the same beautiful though less 
brilliant hues. And there they were in their tiny boat, 
below that marvelously colored. dome; a mere speck in 
the center of a scarcely less brilliantly colored expanse. 
207 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


Their boat seemed so tiny when compared with the 
overhanging dome, and the vast waste of surrounding 
waters, that they keenly felt their insignificance. Their 
thoughts were insensibly led to the great Being who 
has made this wonderful world, 

Who hath measured the waters in the hollow of his* 
hand, and meted out heaven with the span.” 

The glorious heavens above them seemed stretched 
out as a vast covering, extending downward on all 
sides, until it reached the horizon, or the line where 
the sky seems to touch the earth. 

This idea had evidently so impressed itself on the 
the captain, that when he read, as usual, that evening 
to his companions a short passage from the Bible, he se- 
lected the beautiful and poetic description given by 
Isaiah, in the fortieth chapter, about the God who 
“ Stretcheth out the heavens as a curtain, and spread- 
eth them out as a tent to dwell in.” 

The sight was so glorious that none of them cared to 
speak, so they sat silently watching it. At last the 
captain broke the silence : 

“Is it not a wonderful sight. Jack?” he inquired. 
“ Such a magnificent grouping of color, both on the 
sky and on the ocean ! ” 

“ It is indeed grand,” said Jack. “ If an artist were 
able to put such colors on canvas most people would 
probably declare he had drawn too much on his imagi- 
nation; that such a glorious picture was never seen in 
nature.” 

They sat watching the heavens and the waters until, 
208 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


as the sun sank farther below the horizon, the colors 
gradually disappeared, and the stars came out one after 
another. The clouds disappeared from the higher por- 
tions of the sky, and gradually from the entire sky, 
giving them a splendid view of the starry wonders of 
the southern heavens. Shortly afterward the moon 
rose, sending a beam of bright silvery rays that 
stretched like a path across a portion of the great ocean. 

Both the captain and Hiram, who had now com- 
pleted their first twelve hours of almost continuous 
rowing, were thoroughly tired. Seeing this, and it 
having been arranged that Jack should take the first 
four hours of the night, Jack said : 

“ Come, captain, you and Hiram had better turn in. 
ril keep the boat going slowly for the next four hours.” 

“ Very well. Jack,” said the captain. Hiram and 
I will do as you say. Call me if anything happens. 
If not, call me after your watch is over. Be sure to 
keep the boat pointing toward the northeast. Here 
is my pocket compass. I have taught you how to use 
it, so that you should have no trouble in keeping the 
boat on its true course.” 

Everything went well during Jack’s watch and turn 
at the oars. After four hours he called the captain, and 
turned in himself and slept soundly ; nor did he awake 
until Hiram, who had been called by the captain at the 
end of his spell, took the oars for four hours. Jack 
was called at five-thirty the next morning to prepare 
their simple breakfast. 

The next day passed in an uneventful manner with 
o 209 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


plenty of hard work. The wisdom of their working in 
the systematic manner above described, that is, of go- 
ing at the work slowly at first, somewhat more ener- 
getically afterward, and taking as frequent rests as pos- 
sible was soon evident; for on the second day they 
were much less fatigued than they had expected to be. 
They were rapidly gaining the ability to work harder 
and more continuously. The captain was therefore en- 
couraged. He was convinced that if no unforeseen ac- 
cident occurred they would have plenty of food and 
drink to last until they reached the Marquesas Islands. 
Once there, he knew there should be no difficulty in 
being able to replenish their supplies of fresh water 
and food. This would give them an almost indefi- 
nite time to continue among the islands in their search 
for the boys. 

On the night of the second day dense banks of cumu- 
lus clouds collected in the western horizon, preventing 
a repetition of the glorious sunset effects of the preced- 
ing night. At the same time all the heavens were over- 
cast with clouds, the wind began to rise, ruffiing the 
surface of the water and covering it with diminutive 
^whitecaps. 

■ Toward midnight, when the captain was at the 
oars, he saw such wonderful phosphorescent effects in 
the water that he thought he was justified in awaken- 
ing his companions. The entire waters appeared ablaze 
with a pale, fitful light that was bright enough faintly 
to illumine the heavens. As he dipped his oars in 
the water, there seemed to fall from them not water 


210 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


but drops of liquid fire that would sink into the mo- 
mentary depressions made by the oars, and then would 
disappear as if the fire had been extinguished. 

Although quite tired, both Jack and Hiram thanked 
the captain for calling them. They had often seen 
phosphorescence, but never on so grand a scale. 

“ Hiram,” said Jack, there are plenty of ghosts 
and spirits around to-night, ain’t there?” 

He did this to jolly Hiram, who was very supersti- 
tious and had declared that any lights seen in the 
water, especially in the case of corposants, or lights 
due to electric discharges, were properly regarded by 
sailors as being due to the spirits or ghosts of drowned 
people. 

Now, Mr. Jack,” said Hiram, quit pokin’ fun at 
me. It is the corposants sailors say are brung by 
ghosts. The lights ye see air of another kind, and 
wery few of my mates believe they come from dead 
people. Howsumever, I must acknowledge thet some 
say they be so caused. Cap’n,” he said, turning to 
Captain Harding, “ I think ye told me once thet these 
lights are brung by little bits of animals in the water. 
Kin ye tell me, sir,” he added, why the light only 
shows where the water is shaken by the winds or stirred 
by the oars when ye dip them below the surface ? ” 
Yes, Hiram,” said the captain. I’m glad to see 
that you are gradually giving up the superstitious ideas 
you used to hold concerning some of the many natural 
things that occur on the ocean. The light we see is 
due to a gradual burning of a chemical substance pro- 
211 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


duced by the little animals when they come in contact 
with the air. The light only shines, therefore, in those 
parts of the water that are touched by the air, as when 
the wind blows against the water, or the oar splashes 
the water against the air.” 

Thank you, cap’n,” replied Hiram. This be 
wery simple when a fellow once understands it. I fer- 
git, cap’n,” he added, didn’t ye tell me the name given 
to thet kind of light? ” 

“ I think I did, Hiram,” said the captain. It is 
known as phosphorescent light.” 

“ Captain,” inquired Jack, is the exact chemical 
composition of the substance producing phosphores- 
cent light known?” 

Why do you ask. Jack? ” inquired the captain. 

Because I remember to have heard it is the same 
kind of light that is produced by the firefly and the 
glowworm, and that if a fellow could get a bottle full 
of it he would be able to carry a sort of lantern with 
him that would be very convenient.” 

‘‘That’s so; Jack,” replied the captain laughing; 
“but suppose you had a bottle of such stuff. How 
would you bring it in contact with the air so as to make 
it shine? Would you blow the air against it, or would 
you blow it against the air? ” 

“ I hardly know which you would call it,” said Jack 
laughing. “ But I thought that if I had a small fan 
that, when folded up, could be dipped into the stuff 
and, when drawn out and opened, it would produce a 
light when waved through the air.” 

212 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


Not a bad idea, Jack,” said the captain laughing. 
“ Many people have endeavored to produce an artificial 
light like that of the firefly or the glowworm. Such 
a light would be very economical, since unlike ordi- 
nary light it is accompanied by very little heat, while 
the light of oil lamps or candles contains far more heat 
than light.” 

Jack, who had been looking over the stern of the 
boat, suddenly called out in an excited tone to the 
captain and Hiram: 

'' Look into the water beneath our boat. There’s a 
big shoal of fish swimming there that look as if they 
were on fire.” 

True enough, in the direction pointed out by Jack 
they saw thousands of fish about the size of ordinary 
mackerel, swimming through the water in great haste, 
as if they were endeavoring to escape from their ene- 
mies. As their bodies moved against the water they 
glowed with so intense a phosphorescence that they 
appeared to be on fire. 

What makes them shine, captain ? ” inquired Jack. 

‘‘ The same phosphorescent light you see in the wake 
of the boat and where the wind blows against the 
waters.” 

But how can any air get against the sides of the 
fish while they are under the water? ” inquired Jack. 

I am not certain,” said the captain, but I think it 
comes from a film of air that covers the fish. So strong 
an attraction exists between certain substances and the 
air, that a film of air is actually condensed on their sur- 
213 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


faces in a liquid condition. If a film of liquid air covers 
their bodies, then as they move through the water the 
air is brought in a very condensed form in contact with 
the phosphorescent substances and thus produces the 
strong light you see.” 

'' I wonder what the fish are running from ? ” con- 
tinued Jack. “ They certainly appear to be endeavor- 
ing to escape from something of which they appear 
to be greatly afraid.” 

“ Look at them now, Jack,” said the captain, and 
you will see.” 

As the captain spoke, a number of large and vora- 
cious-looking fish were seen pursuing the fleeing fish, 
and devouring them one after the other. 

I wouldn’t like to be in their place,” said Jack. 

“ Neither would I,” said the captain. “ But I would 
like to have a few of them with us, that is, in the boat.” 

“ I reckon ye’re right there, cap’n,” said Hiram grin- 
ning. “ They be wery nice eatin’ ef Jack would fry 
them fer to-morrow’s breakfast.” 

‘‘ Then we’ll try to catch some of them,” said the 
captain. 

By the use of scoop-nets they had no difficulty in 
taking several dozen good-sized fish. All agreed when 
Jack served them the next morning for breakfast that 
they were delicious. The captain was especially 
pleased, since he had hoped to make his food supplies 
last longer by catching fish. 

At noon on the next day they passed through another 
shoal of fish of the same character as those they had 
214 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


caught in the night. In this way they increased their 
food supplies and, moreover, insured a pleasant change 
in their diet. Indeed, the number of fish thus caught 
in a short time, was so great that they were unable 
to eat all of them. But by putting aside some of the 
fattest as fuel for the stove, and keeping others in a 
bucket of sea water, they were able to have fresh fish 
for the table whenever they so desired. 

Jack had included in the fishing-lines they had 
brought a number of skid-hooks and lines, so that by 
letting one of these trail back of the boat they were 
able on several occasions to catch some fairly large 
fish. 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


CHAPTER XVIII 

What Boat Number Twenty-three Picked Up 
AT Sea 

It was now their fifth day out from Harding Island. 
So far nothing unusual had occurred. Indeed, they had 
been making such satisfactory progress that Jack began 
to wonder whether they should not soon see faint traces 
of some of the Marquesas Islands. 

“ Did you not tell us at Jackson House, captain,” he 
inquired, “ that the Marquesas Islands were probably 
situated between five and six hundred miles northeast 
of Harding Island ? ” 

“ Yes, Jack, why do you ask? ” replied the captain. 

“ Because, it seems to me, we should not be very far 
from these islands. As well as I have been able to cal- 
culate roughly, we have already gone something in the 
neighborhood of four hundred miles. Am I much out 
in this estimate ? ” 

No,” said the captain, “ I think we have gone at 
least that distance.” 

“ Then you think we are only about two hundred 
miles or so from the Marquesas ? ” 

‘‘ I didn’t say so. Jack, did I ? ” replied the captain. 

No, but that would be a fair inference, would it 
not? ” inquired Jack. 


216 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


When the above conversation took place, the cap- 
tain and Hiram had been rowing with good, strong 
strokes. Before answering Jack’s last question the 
captain, turning to his companion, said : 

Hiram stop rowing a few moments. I wish to 
show Jack something.” 

“ I reckon I know what it be,” said Hiram grinning. 

It took some time for the boat to stop moving to- 
ward the northeast, but when at last it did so the cap- 
tain pointing to a small piece of kindling-wood, said : 

Throw that overboard. Jack, and watch what hap- 
pens.” 

Jack was greatly surprised at what the captain asked 
him to do. But picking up the piece of wood, he threw 
it into the water and watched it float. Instead of re- 
maining alongside of the boat, it was carried by an 
ocean current toward the west, or in the opposite 
direction from that in which they had been rowing. 

‘‘ I see now, captain, why you wanted me to do that. 
We are in an ocean current that is moving toward the 
west.” 

“ Yes,” said the captain, “ we are in the South Equa- 
torial Current of the Pacific.” 

And that, if I remember right,” said Jack, “ is a 
constant ocean current.” 

And, therefore,” said the captain, it is carrying 
both chip and the boat away from the Marquesas 
Islands.” 

‘‘I see what you mean,” exclaimed Jack. ''We 
haven’t gone so far to the east as I supposed. While 
217 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


we would have gone a distance of four hundred miles 
had there been no current carrying us in the opposite 
direction, we have made in reality a much shorter dis- 
tance, so that we are probably more than two hundred 
miles from the Marquesas.” 

‘‘ I regret to say. Jack, I believe you are right. How- 
ever, we have no reason to complain. We are making 
a fair progress toward these islands, and I think we are 
almost certain to reach them before long.” 

“ But you cannot tell me how long, can you, cap- 
tain? ” 

“ Not exactly,” was the reply. I suppose in four 
or five days more. You remember I had no way of 
determining the latitude of Harding Island, and have, 
therefore, been obliged to guess at its position. Nor 
do I know to what extent the current is keeping us 
back.” 

“ I know we have plenty of food,” said Jack; but 
our water supply is getting rather short, is it not? ” 

“ It is,” said the captain, ‘‘ and this is giving me no 
little anxiety.” 

Whether it was because they had changed their di- 
rection during the night, or because the strength of the 
South Equatorial Current of the Pacific was greater 
than they had estimated, yet on their twelfth day out 
from Harding Island they could see so far, no traces 
of land toward the northeast. Again and again the 
captain anxiously scanned the northeastern horizon 
without being able to see those slight dark specks 
that mark the approach to distant islands. The 
218 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


islands they hoped to reach were still too far off to be 
seen. 

The captain’s anxiety was increasing; for while 
they had been able to husband their food supply by 
the fish they had been fortunate in catching, their 
store of drinking-water was growing dangerously 
small. Already they had agreed to put themselves on 
an allowance as far as water was concerned. 

Toward noon of this day, Rompey, who as usual 
had been anxiously scanning the northeastern horizon, 
suddenly began to show great excitement and to bark 
in a glad tone, as if he had seen something that greatly 
pleased him. 

‘‘ What is it, Rompey? ” inquired the captain. “ Do 
you see anything? ” 

Rompey certainly acted as if he understood just what 
the captain had asked him, and he tried, poor animal, in 
the best way he knew how — by joyous barkings and 
waggings of his tail — to say he had seen something, and 
that, moreover, it greatly pleased him; and then look- 
ing at the captain until he caught his eye, he pointed 
with his face in a certain direction, as much as to say : 

‘‘ It’s over there.” 

Pointing his glasses in the direction indicated by; 
Rompey, the captain suddenly exclaimed in an excited 
manner : 

Hiram, if I’m not mistaken, I see what looks like 
the head of a man in the ocean on our left. He appears 
to be holding on to something that looks like a canoe. 
Take the glass, Hiram, and tell me what you can see.” 

219 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


Taking the glass, Hiram exclaimed: 

It be a man, cap’n, who is sartinly holding on to a 
canoe. I reckon thet canoe must be badly injured; for 
ef that fellow is a brown-skinned man, a native of one 
of the islands in this here part of the ocean, he wouldn’t 
think anything of righting the canoe and getting in 
it again. Them fellows kin swim for miles. They air 
so much in the water that even ef they lose their canoe 
they kin easily keep up for hours afore they be 
drowned. Howsumever, he looks pretty near played 
out, so I reckon we’d better pick him up. Shall we 
not, cap’n ? ” 

Most certainly, Hiram, it would be sheer brutality 
to leave the poor fellow.” 

Then let’s pull as hard as we kin,” replied Hiram. 

Rowing vigorously, they soon decreased the distance 
between their boat and the canoe, and could now see 
both the man and the canoe to which he was holding. 
The man saw them coming and rejoiced at the cer- 
tainty of rescue. When they drew nearer to him he 
said something in a weak voice, but the distance was 
still too great to permit them to hear what it was. He 
made it evident, however, by the waving of his hands, 
that he was very glad they had come, beckoning to 
them as well as he could to come quickly. They were 
now near enough to see that the man was greatly ex- 
hausted and would be unable to keep up much longer. 
As they came nearer, to their great surprise, the man, 
evidently a Polynesian, which they could see by his 
brownish-colored skin, said to them in broken English : 

220 



“ He zvould be unable to keep up 
much longer” 


Page 223 















. » * 


f • 






« *-■• • 


"^V Srk 


'•ft 




^ - » . •* i ■ ■ 4 

^ A, 




• * 


V 




t. 




V' ©y * • 


■v^ ■ r< ' ■ ■ •■ 

' ■- - fiit-s':-,--. 


‘ ff V% ' * • 

A » = * * ’ k .* "* •' lb V* * • 

fs^-: ^ 

'H^yv 






' I . 


; I 




• I 


^ % 


i> • 


• t 


?: sji 'f 

^ . r 




-* , 


• 1 


« » 



* ^ 

> 9 t: 



iM r 


r 



ft 


/♦ 


<^4 




p. ^ 

'.-■ *•; 

■ ■’ ’ 8 ^' 


. .. , , ’ 1 ^. 
'/ "f “" 

^ L- 4 


r 






: ;'• ■ '?•- '^‘ ' a’^ 


■• *1 * 4^>- «*k 

. ■; - .»k.U.V?- t^>l 

, <: • • . >5 ■ 4ttii 

. ’'.'ifei ■.•i.-V:,, % M •■- 

1 ^ :.*.• fri-^s^v .'i'iif^V'-vviii -'^-^ 

"/*, ' ' ■* ' ■ > . ■ .-s A- .. . 1^- r- V • - ^,* 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


Heap glad you come. If you come later me drown 
sure. Me talk plenty English. You talk English? ” 

As they lifted the man into their boat they saw that 
he was too weak to give them any help whatever. The 
captain said : 

Yes, we speak English. What is your namSb? 
Where do you live ? ” 

Me Waheatoua. Canoe wrecked. Waheatoua 
long in water ; very thirsty. Very hungry. Please give 
me something to eat and drink.” 

“ Jack,” said the captain, give the man some water 
and food.” 

The man drank the water eagerly and devoured the 
food ravenously. 

Don’t let him eat too much at a time,” said the 
captain. It might kill him.” 

What your name ? ” said Waheatoua, turning to 
Jack. Me like you. How you called in English? ” 

My name is Jack,” was the reply. 

Jackee, Jackeo,” said the man, trying to pronounce 
Jack’s name. 

No,” replied the lad, my name is Jack.” 

The man made several unsuccessful trials. The 
nearest he could get to it was Jackeo. 

Jack,” said the captain smiling, I guess you’d 
better let him call you Jackeo.” 

Jack had given the man only a small quantity of 
food, because he feared, as the captain had told him, 
that overeating would probably result in his death. 
Waheatoua therefore turned to Jack, and said : 

221 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


“ Waheatoua wants more. Very hungry. No eat; 
no drink for whole day.” 

** Give him a small piece of sweet chocolate,” said 
the captain, and another drink of water.” 

Waheatoua looked with some surprise at the black- 
looking stuff, the chocolate, that Jack had given him as 
if in doubt what he was to do with it. But taking a 
piece of chocolate himself, Jack began to eat it, and 
smacking his lips as if to say in pantomime that it was 
all right, the brown-skinned man followed suit, and 
was evidently delighted with the taste of this new kind 
of stuff. 

“ Allee right food,” he exclaimed. Grow on tree ? ” 

Jack nodded his head so to indicate yes, and added : 

‘‘ It grows on tree far from here.” 

“Where do you live, Waheatoua?” inquired the 
captain. 

“ One day and one day more from here. Over 
there,” said Waheatoua, pointing toward the north- 
western horizon. 

“ If we are right in our direction,” said the captain, 
“ that would be some distance to the west of the Mar- 
•quesas Islands.” 

‘ The captain then pointing toward the northeast, 
said : 

“ Any islands in that direction, Waheatoua? ” 

“ Many islands,” was the reply, “ but very far. Wa- 
heatoua’s island nearer. One day and one day more.” 
And he added, to their surprise : “ Waheatoua know 
Marquesas Islands.” 


222 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


Wishing to test the accuracy of his knowledge, the 
captain inquired: 

‘‘ In what direction are they from here ? 

To the captain’s delight Waheatoua pointed toward 
the northeast, and replied: 

Over there.” 

‘‘ Are the Marquesas Islands far from here, Wa- 
heatoua ? ” 

Very far,” was the reply. “ One day, and one day, 
and one day, and one day, and more,” was the reply. 

What does he mean, captain ? ” inquired Jack. 

He means more than four days,” said the captain. 
‘‘ He does not know our numerals one, two, three, and 
four, so he counts up by saying one and one day until 
the necessary number is reached. He says more than 
four because he is uncertain. I think he means that if 
one goes three or four days there are still more days 
before the islands are reached. Is there any good water 
and food on your island, Waheatoua? ”• 

Plenty water there,” was the reply. ‘‘ Lots to eat. 
My family live there.” 

Is it a large island ? ” asked the captain. 

“ Not very large island. But plenty good water. 
Good breadfruit trees, oranges, cocoanuts, bananas, 
all kind good things. You come to Waheatoua’s 
island, he take good care of you, give you plenty 
eat and drink. My people be good friends to you, be- 
cause you save Waheatoua’s life.” 

“ I guess, Hiram,” said the captain, we had better 
take Waheatoua back to his island. If he is right about 
223 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


the distance to the Marquesas I think it will be too 
great a risk with our small water supply to go there 
direct, especially since we now have an additional pas- 
senger to keep supplied with food and drink. Let us, 
therefore, go to his island, take on plenty of fruit and 
fill our water-barrels.” 

‘‘ Ye kain’t do better than thet, cap’ll,” replied 
Hiram. 

Turning to Waheatoua, the captain said : 

“ Waheatoua, we will take you to your island. We 
wish to get water and food. You will find both of 
them for us, will you not? ” 

Yes,” was the reply. Waheatoua is friend of 
white men because they pick him out of water. But 
where you come from? ” he inquired. Been on the 
water long? ” 

Yes, very long,” was the reply. ‘‘ We have been 
on the water for one, and one, and one, and one,” con- 
tinuing up to twelve days. 

The length of the journey greatly surprised Wahea- 
toua, who said: 

“White men great sailors. No have great ship? 
Waheatoua see ship one time. You have no ship? ” 

“ No,” was the reply; “ only a boat.” 

Curiously enough, Rompey, instead of growling at 
the brown-skinned man, looked kindly into his face and 
barked joyously. Just why, it is difficult to say; for the 
dog might very naturally have looked with anger and 
disgust on men with dark-brown or black skin, be- 
cause it was by such men that his young masters had 
224 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


been carried off, and by such men that his life had been 
threatened by the hurling of a spear. But for reasons 
of his own, Rompey was pleased to see the dark- 
skinned man. Possibly because he hoped through him 
to see his young masters again. 

Waheatoua was greatly pleased with the manner 
in which the dog had received him, and commenced 
patting him on the head. It was evident that Rompey 
did not like this, but he did not show his displeasure. 
He evidently wished to gain the good graces of the 
man. 

Great dog,” said Waheatoua. How you call 
him? ” 

‘‘ Rompey,” was the reply. 

The man got this name very closely, although it is 
true that he insisted on calling him Rompeyo. 

Rompeyo,” said the man, good dog.” 

Satan, who appeared to be jealous because so much 
attention was being given to Rompey, now got off one 
of her favorite sentences, crying in a shrill tone : 

“ Pm hungry. I’m hungry. Give me something to 
eat. I’m starving.” 

At this, the man gave as hearty a laugh as his feeble 
condition would permit. 

Great bird. Bird says, ' I’m hungry.’ Waheatoua 
also hungry. He says give me something to eat.” 

All right. Jack,” said the captain laughing, give 
the poor fellow a little more food, but not too much.” 


p 


225 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


CHAPTER XIX 

Boat Number Twenty-three Reaches 
Waheatoua's Island 

Apart from the question of humanity, the decision to 
change the direction of their boat and go with Wa- 
heatoua to his island was wise. In addition to the 
meagerness of their supplies, there was the uncertainty 
of the distance of the Marquesas. The information the 
rescued man gave them as to the island being located 
at a distance of one, and one, and one, and one, and 
more days was provokingly indefinite. How many 
days there were besides the four, remained unknown. 

But more than this. By taking Waheatoua back to 
his island, they would not only be able to replenish their 
supplies of food and water, but would also obtain a 
stronger hold on his friendship. The captain especially 
recognized the advantages that would result from ob- 
taining some slight knowledge of the people of this 
part of the ocean, and especially being able to visit an 
island where they were reasonably certain of a kind 
reception. They had undoubtedly saved the man’s 
life, so that his people and neighbors would almost 
certainly look kindly on them. While, therefore, the 
turning out of their course might at first thought seem 
to keep them from their search, yet taking everything 
226 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


into consideration, it would most probably aid them in 
the end. 

The man’s canoe was too much broken up to make it 
worth their while to endeavor to take it with them. 
Indeed, when they asked Waheatoua whether he would 
like them to do this, he replied : 

Canoe no good. Too much smash up. Waheatoua 
build a new one. Plenty trees on his island.” 

“ Do you understand that, captain ? ” inquired Jack. 

There were certainly not plenty of trees on Harding 
Island.” 

‘‘That’s true. Jack,” was the reply; “but from the 
books I have been reading in our library, I find the 
Marquesas are a different type island from Harding 
Island. There is very little coral formation around 
them. They consist of the remains of elevated moun- 
tain ranges that descend abruptly into the water. There 
is little or no low beach land. Their habitable portions 
are limited to deep valleys formed by the erosion of 
the many rivers that descend the mountain slopes. 

“ Then the rainfall on these islands is heavier than 
on Harding Island, captain. Is that right? ” 

“ Yes, Jack. The rainfall is especially great near 
the summits of the mountains. The moist winds are 
chilled not only with the cold mountain slopes, but also 
by their sudden expansion on reaching the higher re- 
gions of the atmosphere.” 

The boat was soon making its way in the direction 
toward which Waheatoua had pointed. At first Wa- 
heatoua wished to take his place at the oars. The 
227 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


captain, however, was unwilling to consent to this 
since the man had been without food and drink for 
some time, and his long continuance in the water had 
greatly weakened him. He had a magnificent physical 
development, however, and owing to the care the cap- 
tain had taken to see that he should not over-eat, had 
recovered sufficiently, six hours after they had started 
toward his island, to permit him to take a short spell 
at the oars. 

I don’t suppose,” said the captain to Hiram, that 
Waheatoua knows enough about rowing to be able 
to give us much help. I think I’ll ask him first. Can 
you row, Waheatoua? ” he inquired. 

“ Waheatoua know heap about rowing. Rowed on 
big ship where he learned to speak English. Row all 
right.” 

They were agreeably surprised, therefore, when he 
took his turn at the oars, to find that he could row a 
well-timed, vigorous stroke. 

The boat continued moving steadily for the whole 
day in the direction of Waheatoua’s island. During 
the next day they came in sight of a strange appearance 
on the ocean that surprised both the captain and Hiram. 
They could see far away, over the bow, dim streaks 
that apparently consisted of distant land. 

“Is that your island, Waheatoua?” inquired the 
captain. 

“ No,” replied the Polynesian contemptuously. 
“ Not much land. Plenty water.” 

“ I don’t understand that,” replied Jack. “ That’s 
228 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


pretty true of any island in this big ocean. There’s 
much more water than land.” 

But the captain, who had been carefully examining 
the distant point with his glass, said : 

‘‘ I think I understand what Waheatoua means, but 
we’re too far off to be certain. Take a look through the 
glasses. Jack,” he said, handing him the glasses, for 
at this time, Waheatoua and Hiram were at the oars. 

“ I can’t make it out,” said Jack, but it looks to me 
as if the land was not continuous.” 

I noticed that too,” replied the captain, and don’t 
understand it. However, we’ll get a better idea as 
soon as the boat gets nearer.” 

After a few hours’ rowing they reached the island, 
and found the land to consist of a great number of 
small islands or islets, arranged in a more or less 
circular form, that were connected together below 
the water by a submerged reef or wall of coral rock. 

That’s still another kind of coral island, is it not, 
captain? ” inquired Jack. 

It certainly looks like it. Jack,” replied the captain; 
but take a good look at the island and I think you will 
be able to answer that question yourself. Imagine 
what would happen if that submerged reef or wall 
should be raised a few feet. It would make a coral 
island like Harding Island, would it not, except that 
none of the land would be very high, but there would 
then be an oval or circular coral reef surrounding a 
lagoon. Can you answer your question yourself now, 
Jack?” 


229 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


‘‘Yes,” was the reply; “I think I understand it. 
Sometime ago this has been an ordinary coral island, 
but the sinking has gone on more rapidly than the 
waves were able to build a continuous reef, so we have 
the sunken island that we see before us. Is this 
right? ” 

“ It is,” was the reply. “ That is the way I under- 
stand the formation.” 

“ Bad place for canoes,” said Waheatoua, pointing 
to the sunken reef. “ Reef like this cut big hole in my 
canoe. Look out, maybe hurt bottom of boat.” 

“ That’s good advice, Hiram,” said the captain. 
“ There are many places here where the boat could 
easily be wrecked by striking against the sunken reef 
in the shallow water.” 

“ Are there many other islands like this, Waheatoua, 
in this neighborhood?” inquired Jack, turning to the 
Polynesian. 

“ Heap islands,” was the reply. “ Some big, some 
little. Bad water over reef. Not deep. Smash canoe. 
But very deep there and there,” he said, pointing suc- 
cessively to the former site of the lagoon and the ocean 
outside the reef. 

“I guess that’s right, captain,” said Jack; “is it 
not ? If the sinking has been going on for a long time 
the water both of the lagoon and of the ocean outside 
the reef should be very deep.” 

“ It should,” was the reply. “ Waheatoua’s descrip- 
tion is quite correct. I remember in the books I have 
been reading about this type of island, that navigators 
230 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


have been unable to find the bottom either in the lagoon 
or in the ocean outside the reef.” 

'' Plenty good fish in there,” said Waheatoua, point- 
ing to the lagoon, “ and big turtles good to eat.” 

They continued to row the boat in the same direc- 
tion for fully two days after the rescue of Waheatoua.- 
Toward noon on the third day they could see dim 
specks of land over their bow. Waheatoua, pointing to 
these streaks, said in an excited tone : 

See, Waheatoua’s island. Now you soon get 
plenty fresh water and good things to eat.” 

As the boat came nearer to the island, the captain, 
who had been looking at it through his glasses, said to 
his companions: 

“ It’s a mountainous island, and therefore of the 
general character of the Marquesas. I imagine it is 
one of the outlying islands of that group. If this is so, 
we will find very deep water off the island, and little or 
no coral formations.” 

The boat at last drew so near to the island that they 
could see it with fair distinctness without the use of 
the glasses. It was a small island, probably only two or 
three miles across, and was of an entirely different for- 
mation from Harding Island. It consisted of a single 
fairly high mountain, that rose with almost precipitous 
sides from the ocean, with a very little coral near the 
coasts. 

The mountain slopes, covered with a dense growth 
of trees, were here and there deeply cut or gullied by 
several rivers. Some of these discharged into the ocean 
231 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


in cascades over the precipitous slopes. The largest, 
however, emptied into the ocean through a compara- 
tively level valley that it had gradually cut or eroded 
during the many thousands of years it had been drain- 
ing the sides of the mountain. This valley, for a length 
of about three-quarters of a mile, was comparatively 
level or flat, and in some places was a quarter of a mile 
in width. It extended, however, farther toward the 
top of the mountain, but with a fairly steep inclination. 

The valley the three white men now saw for the 
first time, was covered with a wonderfully rich vege- 
tation. They had all seen tropical vegetation before, 
especially the captain and Hiram, but never in such 
marvelous luxuriance. Here nature seemed to have 
made an effort to excel herself, and had succeeded 
to such an extent that, had they not seen for themselves, 
they would not have believed such luxuriance possible. 
It was a repetition, though on a smaller scale, of Mahi- 
nee’s beautiful valley on the Island of Captivity; and, 
as was natural, the sight awakened in their minds 
feelings similar to those already described in the 
case of Harold and Charley when they stood on the 
top of the precipitous cliffs that bounded Mahinee's 
valley. To Waheatoua, however, the sight was fa- 
miliar. He was returning, after a narrow escape from 
death, to his friends and family and, although the 
beautiful and luxuriant vegetation of the valley neces- 
sarily appealed to him, yet, being an everyday affair, 
it had lost its novelty. 

Waheatoua was greatly pleased by the marked ef- 
232 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


fects produced on his three white companions by their 
first sight of the valley. 

“ Did I not say,” he exclaimed, “ Waheatoua’s island 
great place? Plenty of fresh water. Plenty good 
fruits. Big river of water,” he added, pointing toward 
the river, “ and big trees everywhere.” 

Turning to Waheatoua, the captain inquired: 

“ Where shall we land ? Is the water at the mouth 
of the river deep enough? ” 

Plenty deep,” was the reply. Deep enough to 
take boat far up the river. Waheatoua show you.” 

Under his guidance the boat was soon safely landed 
on the left-hand bank of the river, at a distance of about 
a hundred feet from its mouth. Here they were met by 
a party of savages, who began speaking eagerly to Wa- 
heatoua as if to ask him where his boat was; who the 
white people were; whether they were friends or ene- 
mies. When Waheatoua told them of his rescue by the 
white men, of the loss of his boat, and of their coming 
so far to bring him to the island, they were received 
by the savages by signs of great friendliness. Wahea- 
toua then said something, when some of them leaving 
the party soon returned bringing baskets filled with all 
kinds of luscious fruits. 

Among these were a number of ripe cocoanuts, but 
somehow or other the white people passed these by, 
and selecting in their place oranges, pineapples, and 
bananas, began eating them eagerly. They had been 
living for so many months on Harding Island that the 
cocoanuts, although extremely luscious and pleasant to 

233 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


eat, had become such an everyday matter, that they 
naturally chose fruits they had not tasted now for over 
a year. 

Mr. Jack,” said Hiram, ye don’t seem to care so 
much for cocoanuts as ye did when I fust showed ye on 
Harding Island how to suck out the juice. Air ye goin’ 
back on cocoanuts, my lad ? ” 

‘‘ No more than you are, Hiram,” said Jack laugh- 
ing, or the captain either for that matter. Both of 
you have passed by the cocoanuts and taken to the 
oranges, pineapples, and bananas.” 

“ I allow ye air right, Mr. Jack,” said Hiram grin- 
ning. “ I reckon we’ve all got summat tired of cocoa- 
nuts, and feel sorter drawn toward the other fruits.” 

'' That’s my case, Hiram,” said the captain. I 
don’t think I ever ate anything so luscious as these 
oranges and this pineapple,” he said, pointing to a 
huge, thoroughly ripened pine that he was cutting into 
pieces with his knife. 

The baskets of fruit brought to them contained, 
among other things, a half-dozen or more large bread- 
fruits. 

What are these, Hiram ? Do you know ? Are they 
good to eat? ” inquired Jack, pointing to the breadfruit. 

“ They’re what be called breadfruit. Ye don’t eat 
them raw. Ye hev to bake or roast them ez ye would 
a potato or yam.” 

There were several houses erected on the bank of 
the river in full view of their boat, to which the natives 
invited their visitors. 


234 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


I think/’ said the captain in a low tone to Hiram, 
‘‘ that one of us better remain to watch our boat. Al- 
though the savages may feel quite friendly to us, their 
ideas of property are often very loose.” 

Ye mean,” said Hiram laughing, ‘‘ that they might 
hook anything what they see in the boat.” 

That’s just_what I mean,” was the reply. 

“ Then I’ll stay here and tidy things up.” 

I think perhaps you had better,” said the captain. 

I will walk ahead with Jack and Waheatoua to the 
nearest of these houses. It is so near, indeed, that we 
can see one another and the boat from it.” 

Waheatoua, who understood what Jack had asked 
about the breadfruit, now said : 

“ Waheatoua show you how to bake breadfruit. 
Heap good baked.” 

And so too thought our three friends when some 
time afterward he brought each of them, hot from the 
embers of the fire, a well-baked breadfruit. 

The rind, browned by the heat, had burst here and 
there, and through the cracks they could see the almost 
snow-white material of the breadfruit. It looked not 
unlike an unusually mealy potato. 

How much of it is good to eat, Waheatoua? ” in- 
quired Jack. 

‘‘ Alle good except this,” he said, pulling out the 
core. 

“ It tastes something like a mixture of bread and po- 
tatoes, don’t it, Hiram?” inquired Jack. 

** I reckon ye’re right,” was the reply. ** Anyhow 

235 


IN CAPTIVITY IN.THE PACIFIC 


it’s fust-rate eatin’, and as ye’ll find, Mr. Jack, there be 
warious methods of preparing this food,” continued 
Hiram. 

Jack afterward discovered that the breadfruit grows 
on a large tree from which ripe fruit can be gath- 
ered for about eight months out of the twelve. He 
also learned the peculiarities of the tree, its fruit, and 
the different ways in which it is prepared for food that 
have already been described. 

The house to which the savages had taken them was 
built after the general plan of Mahinee’s house. It 
was so close to the ocean that the river water near it 
was brackish. Splendid fresh water, however, was ob- 
tained from a strong tributary stream that flowed in 
from the side of the valley. 


236 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


CHAPTER XX 

A Few Days on Waheatoua's Island 

To the people of the island the white men were great 
curiosities. The news of their arrival and of Wa- 
heatoua’s return brought nearly the entire valley to 
the house near the river’s mouth where they were stay- 
ing. They did not annoy their visitors, but merely 
sat looking at them, and whenever anything was done 
different from their method of doing it, entered into 
long, excited conversations with one another. 

One of these visitors was evidently a messenger, for 
as soon as he entered the room he went to Waheatoua 
and, after a short conversation, that individual in- 
formed the captain with much pride that Otoa, king of 
the island, would soon be with them. On hearing this 
the captain went to the boat with Jack, and getting a 
small piece of printed calico, a hatchet, and a few nails 
and spikes, returned with them to the house. In a 
short time Otoa came into the room and, approaching 
Waheatoua, began to speak with him, pointing to the 
captain and nodding to him in a friendly way. As 
soon as this conversation was completed Waheatoua, 
turning to the captain, said : 

“ Otoa says that the white strangers are welcome to 
his valley. He has heard of their kindness to Wa- 
heatoua, and is therefore their friend. He give you 

237 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


much fresh water and fruit. Fill your boat. Hopes 
you will stay with his people a long time. When you 
go he will be sad.” 

'' Say to Otoa,” replied the captain, “ that the white 
men thank him for this welcome. That they will be 
glad to stay a few days in his valley. Say too,” added 
the captain, “ that Otoa’s valley is the most beautiful 
place they have ever seen. They don’t believe there are 
many other places in the world to equal it in its beauty 
and fertility.” 

It is somewhat doubtful whether Waheatoua was 
able to understand exactly what the captain had said. 
He knew, however, its general import, and so turning 
to Otoa, said : 

“ White men heap pleased. Never see so beautiful 
a valley. Don’t think any other valley can be more 
beautiful.” 

This praise of his valley evidently pleased Otoa, who 
simply said he was glad they liked it so well. 

Otoa then said something to one of his followers, 
when he disappeared and shortly afterward returned, 
followed by a number of men, bringing baskets of 
fruit. 

The captain, knowing that it was the custom of the 
Polynesians to give presents before receiving them 
from others, thanking Otoa for the gifts, requested 
Waheatoua to ask the chief to accept a few little things 
from the white men. He then handed him the pieces 
of printed calico, a hatchet, and a number of spikes and 
nails. Otoa appeared much pleased with the gifts, but 
238 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


was evidently especially delighted with the spikes and 
nails. Then turning to Waheatoua, he invited the cap- 
tain and Jack through him to call the other white man 
at the boat and ask him to come to the house. 

‘‘ Say to Otoa,” replied the captain, “ that we would 
be pleased to visit the king together with the man who 
is at the boat, but we do not like to leave our boat, 
fearing the people might be hurt by some of the magic 
things we have there.” 

Otoa smiled when he heard this, and beckoning to 
the captain and Jack to follow him, went immediately 
to the boat, and sticking his spear in the ground near it, 
said in a loud voice : 

“ Taboo, taboo.” Then attaching a piece of white 
cloth to it turned toward his house, evidently thinking 
that no explanation was necessary. 

Now,” said Waheatoua, can leave boat by itself. 
No one dare come near it. Boat’s taboo.” 

‘‘ I guess it’s all right, Hiram,” said the captain. 

Come with us to the chief’s house.” 

Following Otoa they soon reached his house which, 
like that of Mahinee, on the Island of Captivity, was 
erected on an elevated pi-pi, consisting of huge layers 
of stone. As in the case of Mahinee’s house, it was 
larger than any of the other houses of the valley. 

The captain and his companions spent a few days 
very pleasantly in the valley, where they were kindly 
treated by Otoa and his people. Since the daily life 
of the people was the same as that of the people of 
Mahinee’s valley, it is unnecessary to describe it. The 

239 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


captain, however, was a scholarly man, a great reader, 
and, moreover, a close observer; he, therefore, neces- 
sarily saw more of the peculiarities of the life of the 
people of this part of Polynesia than had Charley or 
Harold. Consequently, he was able to obtain a variety 
of valuable information, some of which will be given* 
here, since it will undoubtedly interest the readers of 
this book. 

In the first place, the captain observed that not only 
were all the houses of the valley built on pi-pis, or plat- 
forms of elevated stones, but that the pi-pis appeared 
to be of very ancient origin. There were more pi-pis 
in the valley than there were houses. When the peo- 
ple wished to erect a new house they picked out a va- 
cant pi-pi nearest the place where they wished to build. 
Moreover, the remains of large pi-pis, consisting of 
great stone terraces, the successive layers of which 
sloped gradually from the top to the bottom, in steps, 
were to be found in different parts of the valley. As 
the captain learned from Waheatoua, these larger pi- 
pis were the taboo pi-pis, or the holy places. 

‘"Did your people build these pi-pis, Waheatoua?” 
inquired the captain. 

No, not my people. Another people. Many, many 
lives ago.” 

“Were there houses built on these large pi-pis?” 
inquired the captain, pointing to a pi-pi much larger 
than those on which the houses were built. 

“ Waheatoua not certain. People say not made for 
houses, but for maraes/' 

240 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


As well as the captain could understand Waheatoua, 
the word marae meant a sacred enclosure or kind 
of temple or house for their idols. (See Appendix.) 

Although the captain looked closely for traces of 
houses or buildings on the deserted pi-pis, yet he was 
not able to find any. He, therefore, came to the conclu- 
sion that the pi-pis were not erected by any of the im- 
mediate ancestors of the people of the valley, but were 
the remains of a long-forgotten race. 

During their stay on the island. Jack had many in- 
structive conversations with the captain, who himself 
learned considerable from Waheatoua; for Wahea- 
toua spent most of his time with the white men who 
had saved his life. 

One day, when the captain and Jack had been taking 
a walk through the valley, and were sitting in the shade 
of a large breadfruit tree that they had been examining. 
Jack turned to the captain and said : 

Have you any idea why it is that Otoa seemed 
more pleased with the gift of the spikes and nails than 
with either the hatchet or the printed calico? What 
do they do with the nails and spikes ? ” 

“ I think,” was the reply, “ that depends on the 
character of the person receiving the gift. If warlike, 
he would probably use them for the heads of spears. 
If a fisherman, he would use them for the manufacture 
of fish-hooks ; but for whatever purpose spikes or nails 
are employed by the people, I understand from my 
reading, that they are among the articles most highly 
prized by the savages.” 

Q 


241 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


‘‘If these people put so high an estimate on fish- 
hooks,” said Jack, “ would it not be well for vessels 
visiting the island to bring the more highly finished 
European or American fish-hooks ? ” 

“ One would think so. Jack,” replied the captain, 
“ but I understand that, as a rule, the natives prefer 
hooks of their own make to those of European manu- 
facture. The European fish-hooks are better tempered 
and have sharper points, but except for the taking of 
certain kinds of fish, the natives prefer the hooks they 
make for themselves. They work patiently with a 
wrought-iron nail by bending and hammering, sharp- 
ening and polishing, and by rubbing it against stones, 
until the desired shape and finish have been obtained.” 

“ What do they do for fish-hooks when they cannot 
get any nails ? ” inquired Jack. 

“ They make excellent hooks either out of properly 
fashioned pieces of shells, or mother-of-pearl, or more 
frequently out of the little roots of the breadfruit 
tree. These are slender and variously curved, so that 
by properly selecting, cutting, or shaping them, they 
are able to make excellent hooks. Jack,” continued 
the captain, “ I remember reading a story about fish- 
hooks that I am sure will interest you.” 

“ Let me hear it please, captain,” said Jack. 

“ It is about a number of savages who, for the first 
time in their lives, had received presents of spikes and 
nails, some of which had been used and were there- 
fore bent. Since both in color and shape the nails 
somewhat resembled the rootlets of the breadfruit tree, 
242 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


they believed they were the roots of an improved 
species of tree. After consultation, therefore, they 
determined to divide the spikes and nails into two 
parts, one of which they presented as a gift to their 
idols, and the other they carefully buried in the ground 
and watered, with the hope of being able to produce 
a new species of breadfruit tree whose roots were es- 
pecially suitable for the manufacture of fish-hooks.” 

The story pleased Jack so much that he said to the 
captain : 

“Now tell me, please, how they can make hooks out 
of shells.” 

“ I’ll tell you that with pleasure. Jack,” he replied. 
“ But, Jack, he continued smiling, “ it is a more matter- 
of-fact story than the planting of the nails. The Poly- 
nesians employ two kinds of fish-hooks ; towing-hooks, 
corresponding to our squid-hooks, and hooks like those 
we use on fishing-poles. The squid-hooks are made as 
follows: The shank is formed of a piece of mother- 
of-pearl, the pieces of shell selected for this purpose be- 
ing those that are the glossiest and shine most brightly 
in the light. Hooks are attached to these pieces of 
shell, and back of them tufts of hair in such a manner 
as to cause them to resemble the tail of a fish. These 
hooks are tied to long lines that are thrown over the 
stern of their boats, just as you and Harold did when 
you were squidding in the waters of the North Pacific 
off the Aleutian Island Chain.” 

Do they have any difficulty in catching fish in this 
way? ” inquired Jack. 


243 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


“ I believe they are generally successful,” replied 
the captain. But let’s ask Waheatoua. He’s a great 
fisherman.” 

“ Yes, Waheatoua catch many fish with wittee-wittee 
(the Polynesian word for a towing fish-line), but first 
watch birds. When birds see big lot fish and commence 
catching them, then Waheatoua takes his canoe and 
uses wittee-wittee, and catch heap fish.” 

You understand. Jack,” said the captain, “ that 
when the birds see a shoal of fish they follow it. When 
the squid-lines are drawn through the water the pieces 
of shining mother-of-pearl shell on the shank of the 
hook resemble the silvery scales of the fish, so that the 
larger fish, which are in pursuit, bite at the hooks and 
are thus caught.” 

“ I should think the birds would sometimes be 
hooked,” said Jack. 

Waheatoua, who heard the remark, smiled and said: 

‘‘ Yes, catch birds sometimes. Not often. One day, 
Waheatoua caught big bird this way. Good to eat. 
Use feathers for headdress.” 

Living as they did in the valley, they had the oppor- 
tunity of studying the peculiarities of the natives as 
regards the color of their skin, shape of the head, the 
hair, etc. 

The Polynesians who inhabited Otoa’s island were 
so nearly covered with tattooings that at first the cap- 
tain and his companions, like Charley and Harold, be- 
lieved them to be black men. Charley had, therefore, 
written in the note, sent by Rompey, that they had been 
244 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


taken away by black men in a war canoe. A closer ex- 
amination of the people, however, especially of the 
women and children, who were not so much tattooed, 
showed that the color of the skin was naturally a brown 
or yellowish-brown. One day, at Jack’s special re- 
quest, the captain commenced talking about some of 
the peculiarities of the race of men who inhabited Poly- 
nesia. 

‘‘ To what race of men do the Polynesians belong? ” 
inquired Jack of the captain. 

‘‘ Do you know how many races of men there are. 
Jack?” inquired the captain. 

I remember studying at Eton, sir,” was the reply, 
that there are three principal races ; namely, the white, 
or Caucasian ; the black, or Negro race ; and the yellow, 
or Mongolian. I was also taught that these races are 
believed to be the descendants of the three sons of 
Noah — Ham, Shem, and Japhet; that the Caucasians 
are the descendants of Shem; the Mongolians are the 
descendants of Japhet; and the Africans the descend- 
ants of Ham; that from these have arisen three sec- 
ondary races. The Australian race, a modification of 
the African race; the Malay, or brown race; and the 
American Indian, or red race.” 

“ That is right, Jack,” said the captain. “ When I 
went to school we were taught that there were five races 
of men namely, the Caucasian, or white ; the Ethiopian, 
or black; the Mongolian, or yellow; the Malay, or 
brown; and the American Indian, or red race. The 
division of the human race into primary and secondary 

245 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


races as you were taught at Eton is, I believe, now 
more generally employed.” 

'' Captain, do all the people of Polynesia belong to 
the Malay race ? ” 

I am not sure that I can answer your question. 
Jack,” replied the captain. When Captain Cook 
visited Polynesia, in 1769, during the first of his three 
famous voyages around the world, he came to the con- 
clusion that there were two distinct races inhabiting 
this part of the world; namely, people resembling the 
Malays by their light brown or copper-colored skin, 
their bright glossy hair and countenances, and a people 
of a herculean frame, with black skin, woolly or crisp 
hair, descendants probably of the Negroes. 

“ Generally speaking, the Negroes and the Malays do 
not live together. Most of the Malay races inhabit the 
eastern part of Polynesia, and the Negro races the 
western part. The people of eastern Polynesia speak 
a language that, although comprising a number of dis- 
tinct dialects, has evidently descended from a single 
race. It appears that the language of this part of Poly- 
nesia is of a much higher order than might have been 
expected of people so low in the grade of civilization. 
All this, however. Jack,” added the captain, would 
seem to show that the people of eastern Polynesia de- 
scended from a more powerful and highly cultivated 
race than its present inhabitants, as, indeed, the ruins 
of this valley would seem to prove.” 

As in the Island of Captivity, the liberality of nature 
in supplying the food products appeared to discourage 
246 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


any marked habits of industry among the people. With 
the exception of a variety of vegetable cloth, known as 
tapa, and the building of war canoes, there were com- 
paratively few industries. 

There are three kinds of native cloth made in Poly- 
nesia. All these are made from the bark of different 
kinds of trees, the paper mulberry, the breadfruit tree, 
and the bark of a tree resembling the wild fig tree of 
the West Indies. The paper mulberry produces the 
finest cloth and, moreover, a cloth that is the most 
highly esteemed because it takes the dyestuffs with 
which the natives color it. The cloth made from the 
breadfruit tree comes next in point of excellence, be- 
ing inferior in whiteness and softness. The cloth pro- 
duced by the other tree is coarse and harsh, and of 
the color of dark brown paper. It possesses an ad- 
vantage over the other cloths, however, in that in- 
stead of being pervious to moisture it is waterproof. 
For this reason the cloth produced either from the bark 
of the mulberry or the breadfruit tree is more suitable 
for clothing, since, by permitting the evaporation of 
moisture from the skin, it is much cooler than the im- 
pervious cloth. 

In the Marquesas the paper mulberry is almost ex- 
clusively used in the manufacture of cloth, this tree 
receiving the name of auti, or cloth tree. 

The process of manufacture is the same with all 
three trees. In the Marquesas Islands, the process is 
substantially as follows: The outer layers are sepa- 
rated from the young branches of the trees, wrapped in 
247 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


leaves, and placed for a few days in running water. 
When, in this manner, the fibers have been sufficiently 
softened, the fine fibers of the inner coating of the 
branches are separated from the others and placed side 
by side, on a smooth board in fairly considerable lengths, 
until the bundles are a foot in breadth and two or three 
layers in thickness, care being taken that the pile is of 
equal thickness throughout. It is permitted to remain 
on the board for the next day, when most of the water 
it contains is either drained off or turned into vapor. 
The separate fibers are now found to adhere to one 
another, so that the entire piece of cloth can be raised 
from the board. 

The strips are then removed and placed on the side 
of a long piece of wood and beaten by the women with 
a piece of hard wood. The four sides, or faces, of this 
wooden mallet are covered lengthwise with parallel 
grooves or furrows of gradually increasing fineness. 
The coarsest are wide and deep enough to receive 
a small piece of packthread, and the last about equal 
to the thickness of a piece of sewing silk. The 
coarsest sides of the mallet are employed first. The 
beating is performed by a number of women on the 
same piece of cloth, all of whom keep time with the 
strokes of the mallet. Under this beating the cloth 
spreads, mainly in breadth; the grooves giving to it 
the appearance of thread. It is only after it has been 
successively beaten by all four sides, ending with the 
side containing the finest groovings, that it is fit for 
use. 


248 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


When made from the paper mulberry the cloth is 
white, but is increased in whiteness by being bleached in 
the air. Some of the tapa thus made is dyed various 
colors, yellow and red being those most frequently 
employed. 


249 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


CHAPTER XXI 

Boat Number Twenty-three Blown Away 
Marooned on a Small Island 

T HE taboo placed by Otoa on the boat had kept every- 
thing in it safe. The superstition of the people was so 
great that none dared even to come into its neighbor- 
hood. The captain had filled his water-barrels with 
fresh water, had taken on supplies of the fruits of 
the island, especially oranges, pineapples, bananas, and 
also a limited supply of fresh cocoanuts, since they 
still had plenty left of those they had brought from 
Harding Island. 

They had now been on the island for nearly two full 
days. It may surprise some of my readers that the 
captain could have been willing to take up so much of 
his time in the search for the boys as the two days he 
had spent on the island; for, not knowing the char- 
acter of many of the savages, he had reason to fear 
that they might have been killed and eaten. But as 
he had explained to Hiram and Jack, there were many 
advantages to be gained by spending a few days with 
Otoa’s people. In the first place the people of the Mar- 
quesas, and the islands in their neighborhood, all speak 
practically the same language. It would be, therefore, 
of much advantage if, during their stay on the island, 
250 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


they could learn a few of the more important words 
of these people; moreover, a still greater advantage 
would be obtained by getting some idea of their cus- 
toms and peculiarities; but, above all, he thought it 
would be advisable to remain for a short time on the 
island so that he might obtain before leaving as much 
information as possible concerning the relative posi- 
tions of the different islands. 

He had talked this matter over with Hiram and Jack 
before accepting Otoa’s invitation to remain with him 
as long as they felt disposed. When he put the ques- 
tion to Hiram as to whether they had better go on the 
next day or remain a few days, Hiram replied : 

“ Wall, cap’n, I allow Fm wery anxious to git off 
so as to look fer the boys, yet I say stay here fer a few 
days. Ye see, there be so many islands in the Marque- 
sas, and sence we don’t know whar to look fer our 
boys, we hed better pick up what little information we 
kin before leaving. We sartinly don’t know on which 
island these fellows landed. We don’t even know 
whether they hev not gone on to some island still fur- 
ther off; fer they kin git over a sight of water in 
sech canoes as we saw from Harding Island. Even 
their small canoes hed six men paddling and six 
others to take their places, so as to keep the boat mov- 
ing both night and day. Therefore, the more we larn 
about the islands in this here part of the world the bet- 
ter will ye be able to search fer them.” 

‘‘And what do you think. Jack?” inquired the 
captain. 


251 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


‘‘ While I am anxious to get off as soon as possible 
to continue looking for Harold and Charley,” replied 
Jack, “ yet I think from what you and Hiram have 
said, that it is best to remain here a short time.” 

Rompey greatly surprised them on reaching the 
island by immediately running from house to house, 
as if searching for his young masters. He finally dis- 
appeared completely, nor did they see him until the 
end of the second day, when he returned showing signs 
of great exhaustion. He had evidently been all over 
the valley in the hope of finding the missing boys, and 
had only returned when convinced they were not there. 
Probably the dog’s absence had no little to do with 
their willingness to remain, since they were not only 
greatly attached to the animal, but were convinced that 
he would be of great aid in finding the boys. More- 
over, they knew how greatly Charley and Harold were 
attached to Rompey, and were therefore loath to leave 
until he returned. 

But besides the above there was still another rea- 
son for waiting. The short time Waheatoua had 
been with them showed the captain the great advan- 
tages that would be derived if they could persuade him 
to accompany them in their search for the boys. They 
had learned that Waheatoua spent most of his time in 
his canoe, made frequent visits to the different islands, 
and had acquaintances on nearly all of them. He 
hoped, therefore, that some opportunity might pre- 
sent itself which would help him to persuade Wahea- 
toua to accompany them. This opportunity occurred 
252 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


in the afternoon of the second day, when the captain 
and his two companions, who had been taking a walk 
in the valley with Waheatoua, were resting in the 
shade of a breadfruit tree asking and answering ques- 
tions. Waheatoua suddenly changing the subject of 
conversation, turned to the captain and said : 

Why you come so many days in small boat to 
place where you took Waheatoua out of water? Lost 
your ship ? ” 

No, Waheatoua,” replied the captain. We came 
to try to find two white boys who were carried away 
in a war canoe from an island on which we had been 
living.” 

Must like boys heap to come so far in boat for 
them.” 

Yes, Waheatoua,” was the reply, ‘‘ we like those 
boys very much.” 

‘‘ How long you keep looking for boys ; suppose 
you don't find them soon? ” inquired Waheatoua. 

The captain was carefuHo explain at length that they 
were so attached to the boys that they would continue 
looking for them even if it took many years. 

'' Don't you think I can find them? ” anxiously in- 
quired the captain. 

The encouragement received from the Polynesian 
was indeed very small. 

Heap islands over there,” replied Waheatoua, 
pointing in the direction of the Marquesas. How you 
find where boys are ? Can't go over all islands. Take 
heap time.” 


253 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


I know how hard it will be,” said the captain, es- 
pecially as I have never been in this part of the world, 
nor can I speak with the people of the islands. But I 
shall keep on looking for the boys until I find them. 
I ought to find them if I look long enough. Ought I 
not? ” he again inquired. 

“ Heap trouble to find them. You don’t know dif- 
ferent islands, or best way to find them.” 

That’s true,” said the captain. But I will do the 
best I can.” 

Suppose Waheatoua go with you and help find 
boys. You like that? Waheatoua has lost his boat. 
Can no more go on the ocean. If Waheatoua go with 
you, maybe you will let him keep some of the fish and 
things he gets from the water to give them to his 
family.” 

“We would very much like to have you go with us, 
Waheatoua,” replied the captain. “ If you go we will 
help you provide for your people. You may keep all 
the fish you catch, and we will make you presents of 
spikes and nails from our boat which you can give to 
your people to help to keep them while you are away.” 

“ Then Waheatoua will go with the white men and 
help them find boys. White men good friends of Wa- 
heatoua. But must first ask Otoa can I go with white 
men. If Otoa say Yes, Waheatoua will go. If he say 
No, Waheatoua cannot go. Must do what Otoa says.” 

“ Then,” said the captain, “ let us go now and try 
to get Otoa to say Yes. If our dog comes back, we will 
start to-morrow. If he does not come back, we will 
254 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


start the day after to-morrow. Are you ready to go 
with us? ” 

‘‘ Waheatoua go any time Otoa says Yes.” 

Waheatoua explained to Otoa that he had come 
at the request of the white men to ask permission 
to go help them look for two white boys who had 
been taken in a war canoe from an island very many 
days’ journey toward the southwest; that since the 
white men had never been in this part of the ocean be- 
fore, they wished Waheatoua to go with them so as 
to find the different islands and talk to the people for 
them. 

In reply, Otoa entered into a long conversation with 
Waheatoua, during which it appeared to the captain 
that he did not at first wish to have him leave the 
island ; that the latter was earnestly endeavoring to per- 
suade him to give his consent. At last Waheatoua, 
turning to the captain said : 

Otoa sorry to have white men go away so soon. 
But better go soon, since sometimes people in these 
islands get hungry and eat prisoners. He says white 
men can’t find islands, but Waheatoua know them all, 
.and goes there two or three times between each sum- 
mer and winter.” 

Then,” replied the captain, much pleased at what 
he had heard, “ Otoa says you can go, does he ? ” 

“ Yes,” replied the wily Polynesian, if he sure 
Waheatoua get enough to keep his family while he 
gone.” 

‘‘ We will attend to that,” replied the captain. Say 

255 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


to Otoa that white men are glad you can go, that they 
are great friends of Otoa, and ask what can they do for 
him when they visit some of these islands ? ” 

When this was explained to the king he thanked 
them, and said that he had intended sending Wahea- 
toua to carry some messages to certain of the islands; 
that he employed him for this purpose, but since the 
destruction of the boat he was looking for another 
messenger. He hoped, therefore, the white men would 
permit Waheatoua to carry these messages. 

The captain thanked Otoa and asked him to come to 
their boat. He told him they had a few small presents 
for him, and wished also to give Waheatoua something 
for his family. 

On reaching the boat the captain gave Waheatoua 
a number of presents, such as he thought would be of 
greatest value for exchange. To Otoa, himself, he 
gave, besides a number of spikes and nails, a splendid 
hatchet. 

Otoa was so much pleased with these things that 
taking a dagger he always carried with him, the handle 
of which was beautifully carved, he presented it to the 
captain as an especial mark of his good feeling, saying 
through Waheatoua : 

Take Otoa’s war dagger. Otoa has many friends 
among chiefs of the islands you will visit Perhaps 
some day some of them will see this dagger and say: 
‘ How you get that ? ' then you say, ‘ Otoa, my great 
friend, he give it me,’ and then you and he will be 
friends.” 


256 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


Rompey had returned that afternoon and had gone 
and lain down in the boat, as if he had no more use for 
the island, and would remain in the boat until they 
went elsewhere. Somehow or other, he appeared to 
have reached the conclusion that they would soon leave, 
and intended to wait for them. 

They left early the next morning accompanied by 
Waheatoua. As the boat was pushed off from the 
shore of the river Rompey began barking with delight, 
as if he knew that they were now going elsewhere to 
look for his young masters. Many of the people of the 
island, who had assembled to see them off, brought 
with them presents of fresh food. 

Otoa accompanied them for several miles in his war 
canoe. Then bidding them farewell, he said : 

Maybe you see Otoa again some day in the islands 
that Waheatoua will show you.” He then turned back 
to the island, while boat No. 23 continued on its search 
for the boys. 

The advantages of having a man like Waheatoua 
go with them were great. He had spent so much of his 
life in these parts of the ocean, that he was not only 
intimately acquainted with the best routes from island 
to island, but also knew the best places for using their 
squid-lines, and when it was best to throw them over- 
board and troll them after the boat. He knew too, the 
different sea-birds that they could frequently see flying 
in large flocks over their heads. While not knowing 
the difference between these birds, as a scientific man 
would have known, yet Waheatoua had the practical 
R 257 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


knowledge that enabled him to divide them into two 
great classes; namely, in one class that he declared 
were : “ Heap good to eat,” and another class that 
were: “ No good to eat.” 

‘‘ That bird,” he said one day, pointing directly over- 
head, “ heap good to eat. That one,” pointing to 
another, “ no good. Bad taste. Make Waheatoua 
sick,” pointing to his stomach. “ Suppose you kill 
good bird with make-thunder ” — for the captain of 
course had his gun with him, an article that Wahea- 
toua had often seen before — “ then we cook bird and 
have plenty to eat.” 

Like many of those of the Polynesians who spend the 
greater part of their lives on the ocean, Waheatoua 
was deeply skilled in the signs of sky and water, by 
means of which he could predict coming changes in the 
weather. He was especially able, from an examina- 
tion of the sky, to predict the quarter or direction 
from which the wind would probably next blow. 

Waheatoua knew the direction in which to steer the 
boat by means of the sun by day, and the stars by night. 
He knew the principal stars by name and, moreover, 
the portions of the heavens in which they could be seen 
during different months of the year. And then too, 
from the position of the sun by day, or of the stars by 
night, he could manage to come fairly close to the hour 
of the day or night. 

There was, however, one belief of Waheatoua that 
greatly amused the captain. He declared that the di- 
rection from which the wind would blow the next day 
258 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


could be told from the peculiar changes he claimed he 
could detect in the curvature of The Milky Way. On 
several occasions his predictions came true, although, 
perhaps, in the majority of cases they failed. Wahea- 
toua, however, like many other weather prophets, was 
not at all disconcerted by failures ; he was always ready 
with extended explanations of why it was in this case 
that his predictions had not been fulfilled. 

There surely can be nothing in this method of 
telling the weather, captain, can there ? ” inquired 
Jack. 

Of course not. Jack,” answered the captain laugh- 
ing. The Milky Way, as you know, is the name 
given to a peculiar appearance in the heavens, due to 
the almost innumerable stars or constellations that are 
scattered through certain portions of the realms of 
space. They are so far off that instead of appearing 
as separate stars, they give to the skies a hazy appear- 
ance that makes it look as if some one had been spilling 
milk over the blue vault of heaven.” 

Do you mean,” inquired Jack, ‘‘ that the appear- 
ance of The Milky Way is caused in the same manner 
as that of nebulae ? ” 

‘‘ That’s exactly what I mean,” was the reply. “ In 
The Milky Way, as in many of the nebulae, though not 
in all of them, the whitish appearance is due to the 
stars being so far off that they cannot be seen sepa- 
rately by the unassisted eye, although, as is now gen- 
erally believed, many of them are even larger than 
our sun.” 


259 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


“ Then,” said Jack, “ they must be very far off, and 
there must be very many of them.” 

“ Very many of them, indeed,” was the answer. 
“ Jack,” continued the captain, take my glasses and 
look through them at different portions of The Milky 
Way.” 

Jack did this and, although the glasses were not in- 
tended to be employed as telescopes, yet owing to the 
size of the lenses, he was greatly surprised at the in- 
crease in the number of the stars that now became 
visible to him. 

I always knew, sir,” he replied, that there were 
many stars in the skies. I see now that their number is 
greater than I had supposed.” 

Had you a large telescope to look through. Jack, 
you would find their number still more greatly in- 
creased,” replied the captain. There is no doubt,” 
he continued, “ that the stars that are too far off to be 
seen at all, greatly exceed in numbers those that are 
visible even through large telescopes.” 

‘‘ And I suppose,” replied Jack, that the number of 
these stars in the direction of The Milky Way is far 
greater than in other directions.” 

‘‘ Far greater,” was the reply. Sir William Her- 
schel, the well-known English astronomer, made an es- 
timate that in one portion of The Milky Way no less 
than one hundred and sixteen thousand stars passed 
through the field of his telescope in a quarter of an 
hour; for, of course. Jack, you know that the motion 
of the earth on its axis makes the stars as well as the 
260 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


sun to appear to rise in the east and set in the west. 
In another part of The Milky Way, the same astrono- 
mer estimated that two hundred and fifty-eight thou- 
sand stars passed across the field of his telescope in 
forty-one minutes. You can see, then, how very great 
must be the total number of stars in this part of the 
heavens.” 

‘‘ And I also see,” replied Jack laughing, that the 
direction of the wind could not possibly affect the posi- 
tion of the stars in The Milky Way.” 

“No,” said the captain; “and yet it is just possi- 
ble, though perhaps improbable, that currents pro- 
duced in large masses of the air might cause the ap- 
parent position of the stars to somewhat change.” 

Hiram, who had been listening to the conversation 
while he was examining The Milky Way through the 
captain’s glasses, now turned to the captain and said: 

“ I hev been a listening, sir, to what ye hev been 
yarning to Jack. Thar sartinly be many stars in this 
part of the sky. I would not hev believed it unless I 
seed it as I do now.” 

On the afternoon of the second day after leaving 
Otoa’s island, Waheatoua, pointing to a peculiar ap- 
pearance in the clouds in the southwest, said to the 
captain : 

“ Bad weather coming, no many hours off. Maybe 
be big storm. Guess we better take boat to small 
island near here. If big storm come boat may sink.” 

Hiram, who heard what Waheatoua said, turning 
to the captain remarked : 

261 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


“ I reckon he’s right, cap’n. I hev been watching 
them clouds fur some time, fearing that wery bad 
weather was back of them. Better take the boat to the 
island.” 

The captain had the same opinion, so they changed 
the direction of the boat, and in a few hours they came 
to a small island. Unlike the larger islands of this 
part of the ocean, it was of the regular atoll shape, with 
a miniature lagoon in which a fairly high though rocky 
island could be seen. There was a good entrance 
through the reef to the lagoon, so that when Wahea- 
toua said that he knew this island well, and that there 
was a big cave on it, they took the boat through the 
passage into the lagoon and landed on the shore of the 
island. In order the better to protect the boat, they 
drew it some distance up the beach where they secured 
the anchor firmly in a crevice of a big rock. 

Hiram was much pleased with what he thought to 
be the undoubted security of the boat. 

Thet’ll hold, cap’n,” he replied. I reckon the 
rope will hev to break afore thet boat kin be moved.” 

They then started for the cave which was situated 
near the highest land of the island. It was a cave that 
had been formed in the limestone of the island, and 
was of the same general character as the limestone 
caves they had examined on Harding Island. 

It was indeed fortunate that they were so near 
shelter and that they had reached the island, for 
shortly after entering the cave one of the most furious 
storms that Hiram had ever experienced began. It 
262 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


was of the whirling or cyclonic type ; the wind rapidly 
increased in velocity and soon formed huge waves in 
the ocean that swept completely over the lowest parts 
of the reef. Indeed, some of the waves entering the 
lagoon dashed against the coast with sufficient force to 
shake the island severely. 

The storm was so severe that the captain attempted 
to go and examine the boat to see if it was safe, but 
the force of the wind was so great that they could 
only keep their feet while crawling. They therefore 
gave up the attempt, and again sought the shelter of 
the cave. The storm continued for two whole days. 
They were anxious days, for despite the manner in 
which they had secured the anchor, the wind was so 
furious that they feared the boat might be blown bodily 
from the island into the ocean. 

At last the storm was over. Anxiously reaching the 
place where they had secured the boat they found their 
forebodings correct. The boat had disappeared. The 
anchor still remained wedged in between the rocks, but 
the wind had been so strong as to snap off the strong 
rope where it had been secured to the anchor. 

It was a terrible misfortune. Here they were ma- 
rooned on a small island without any means for leaving 
it. All their supplies had been carried away with the 
boat. It required a great effort to bear up under this 
misfortune. Although they searched the island over 
and over, examining every part of the coast during the 
next two weeks, yet they were unable to find any traces 
of the missing boat. It had completely disappeared. 

263 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


CHAPTER XXII 

A Chance Visitor to the Island Greatly Sur- 
prises THE Captain 

They were now not only marooned on an island, but 
on the isolated island in the lagoon. Their boat had 
gone, and they had no means for reaching the coral 
reef of the island, which was at a distance of nearly 
the fifth of a mile. 

The heavy winds had blown down and broken sev- 
eral screw-pines, and stripped them of their branches. 
Selecting a few of the trunks, after considerable work, 
they succeeded in rolling them down to the shore of the 
island when, under the direction of Waheatoua and 
Hiram, who was as skilful as Waheatoua at this work, 
they finally fastened them together with a number of 
trailing vines, and thus formed a raft by means of 
which they were able to reach the coral reef, employing 
for this purpose long bamboos as pushing poles. 

It was a clumsy contrivance, especially since, when 
they reached the deeper water of the lagoon, they were 
unable to employ their bamboo poles. But when Wa- 
heatoua and Hiram, by their combined ingenuity, 
roughly split the logs of one of the screw-pines into 
boards and fashioned them into paddles, by the aid of 
the captain and Jack’s pocket-knives, they managed to 
pass between the reef and the island. 

264 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


What made their position all the worse was the fact 
that there was too little wood on the island with which 
to build a boat, even if they had tools for the purpose. 
Nor did they get much encouragement from Wahea- 
toua, who informed them laconically : 

“ Heap bad. Must stay here. Maybe, if canoe pass, 
and we make signs, it come take us off. If not, we 
stay here a long time. Maybe always.” 

“ We’ll make the best of it,” said the captain. “ So 
let us carefully examine the island so as to see what 
food and water we can get here.” 

Fortunately, they were able to find a fair abundance 
of fresh water which, however, had been made slightly 
brackish by the high tides. A small stream, however, 
on the slopes of the high island in the lagoon gave them 
sufficient water until the brackishness of the lower 
springs disappeared. The vegetable products of the 
island were limited to a few cocoanuts and screw-pines, 
such as they had already seen on Harding Island. 

Had it not been for the food they were able to obtain 
from the waters of the ocean, especially from those of 
the lagoon, they would have fared poorly. 

The aid Waheatoua could give them now became 
more and more apparent. In their present condition 
the difference between the white and the brown people, 
or between the civilized and uncivilized races, became 
smaller and smaller. Indeed, Waheatoua was better 
able to obtain food for the party than were any of the 
others. He made fishing-lines from the fibers of the 
cocoanut palms, and fashioning rude but effective fish- 
265 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


ing-hooks from the roots of trees, they were able to 
keep themselves supplied with fish. He also ingen- 
iously fashioned spears from some of the bamboo canes 
growing on the island in the lagoon, and tipping them 
with sharp fragments of shells or stones, was able to 
spear some of the larger fish of the lagoon when they 
came near the shore, as he induced them to do by 
throwing into the water the entrails of the fish they had 
caught. 

There were two sources of food that proved of great 
value. One of these was the great robber crabs — the 
land crabs they had met with on Harding Island. 
When Waheatoua first discovered one of these animals 
he was greatly pleased. 

“ Plenty to eat,” he said grinning. And kindling a 
fire he soon had the huge animal roasting in the em- 
bers. The meat was delicious, and the blue fat of the 
huge tail possessed a taste not unlike that of butter. As 
Waheatoua informed them, the oil obtained by melt- 
ing this fat was an excellent remedy for rheumatism. 

But it was the great turtles that came to the beach of 
the lagoon island to lay their eggs that furnished the 
best food. Not only did they obtain great numbers 
of the eggs the animals deposited in shallow holes in the 
sand, but they had no difficulty in capturing the huge 
animals themselves. It was only necessary to turn 
them on their backs to prevent them from escaping. 
Their meat as well as their eggs formed highly nutri- 
tious food. Since it was then the breeding season, this 
latter variety of food was large. 

266 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


Though very unhappy at being thus obliged to leave 
their dear boys with their savage captors, they sensibly 
determined to follow the captain’s advice and make the 
best of their surroundings. They began, therefore, to 
fix up their cave so as to make it more habitable. This 
was a work that especially appealed to Hiram. The 
ingenious contrivances he was able to devise for their 
comfort in the cave were greatly admired by Wahea- 
toua, so that during the many months they were on 
the island they greatly increased the comfort of their 
abode. Their cave extended a far greater distance 
underground than Waheatoua had supposed. Their 
experience in the limestone grottoes of Harding Island 
had led the captain and Jack to make an extended 
exploration that had resulted not only in the discovery 
of a much larger and better situated cave, but one, 
moreover, that possessed the advantage of a stream 
of excellent drinking-water only at a short dis- 
tance from the part they had selected for their sleep- 
ing and living-room. 

Probably Rompey was far less satisfied than the 
captain or any of his companions. The poor animal 
continued his search for the boat long after his human 
friends had abandoned it. He never appeared to give 
up hope, however, and spent much of his time in watch- 
ing the ocean. 

One day, while all four were fishing in the waters 
of the ocean off the reef, with Rompey as usual closely 
scanning the ocean, they were surprised by the dog sud- 
denly beginning to bark. Waheatoua quicker than the 
267 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


others, looked in the direction indicated by Ronipey, 
and exclaimed excitedly: 

“ Canoe coming. Light fire, make canoe see us.” 

They had collected a pile of cocoanut husks, pieces 
of broken screw-pine, and chips of wood, with the idea 
of firing should they be so fortunate as to see a passing 
canoe or ship. Quickly setting it on fire, as soon as 
it began to blaze they raised a column of smoke by 
throwing small quantities of water on it. In this 
way they succeeded in attracting the attention of the 
canoe. The captain, who was looking at it with his 
glasses, was able at last to give his companions the 
following information : 

It is a canoe paddled by one man, and is coming 
this way.” 

Waheatoua,” he continued, ‘‘ it is shaped like your 
canoe. Take the glasses and look.” 

‘‘ Waheatoua thinks he knows canoe. Soon be sure.” 
And continuing to watch the approaching boat, he at 
last handed the glasses to the captain and said : Me 
know man. Named Kapiau. Lives on Otoa’s island. 
Great friend of Waheatoua.” 

The approach of the canoe so greatly excited the 
white people that they began shaking one another’s 
hand, and this being insufficient to satisfy Hiram, he 
gave vent to his enthusiasm by executing a hornpipe 
or dance on the shore. Waheatoua simply grinned and 
said : 

White men heap glad canoe come. Waheatoua 
heap glad too.” 


268 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


By this time the canoe had landed, and Kapiau, leav- 
ing his boat, approached Waheatoua and expressing 
his joy at seeing him, commenced rubbing his nose 
against that of his friend. The two men then entered 
into a long conversation which was translated by Wa- 
heatoua as follows : 

Kapiau says he saw you leave Otoa’s island many 
moons ago. But Kapiau knows why you here. You 
lose boat.” 

‘‘Ask him how he knows that, Waheatoua?” ex- 
claimed the captain. 

After considerable talking, Waheatoua turned to the 
captain and said : 

“ Kapiau say he see boat one day from here over 
there,” pointing to the northwest. “ Boat alle right, 
floating in water of sunken island.” 

“ But why didn’t he take the boat ? ” exclaimed the 
captain. 

“ Otoa make boat taboo. Kapiau afraid to touch it.” 
Waheatoua then again turned to his friend, and after a 
long and earnest conversation at last succeeded appar- 
ently in obtaining a reluctant consent to something he 
wished Kapiau to do. At last, Waheatoua, turning to 
the captain, said : 

“ Waheatoua and Kapiau afraid to touch boat, cause 
boat taboo. Maybe taboo not hurt us to touch it now, 
you think ? ” he asked of the captain. 

“ No,” replied the captain, “ it’s all right now. See,” 
he said, displaying the dagger with the carved handle 
which Otoa had given him, “ Otoa white man’s 
269 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


friend,” and then holding the dagger before the men : 
“ Otoa say get boat. Taboo no hurt. I will go with 
you.” 

“ No room in canoe for three. Waheatoua go with 
Kapiau.” 

Saying this, Waheatoua accompanied by his friend 
ran toward Kapiau’s canoe, put it in the water, and 
were already at some distance from the island before 
the captain and his companions had a clear notion of 
what they were doing. 

As if to assure the captain, Waheatoua called out 
while the canoe was speeding away from the island : 

Waheatoua still white man’s friend. He come 
back soon with boat.” 

This behavior greatly incensed Hiram. 

‘‘ The varmint hez gone back on us, captain, I think. 
Ye can’t trust these fellows. I reckon thet even ef he 
calc’lates now to come back he may change his mind 
afore long.” 

“ I think not, Hiram,” was the reply. “ I hope not, 
anyhow.” 

Fortunately the captain was correct. After being 
absent a day and a half, Waheatoua and his companion 
were seen approaching the island with boat No. 23 
towing back of their canoe. 

They found the boat in good condition, except that 
all their fruit and other perishable products had rotted. 
Their guns, pistols, and Hiram’s saber were con- 
siderably rusted, but the canned goods, the presents 
they had brought for distribution among the savages, 
270 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


and their supply of powder were but little injured. 
The water supply too was in good condition, but this 
did not trouble them, since they had now an abundance 
of fresh water in the limestone cave. 

It is needless to say that on their return the two men 
were warmly greeted by the captain and his friends. 
As soon as a thorough examination had been made of 
the boat, Waheatoua said excitedly to the captain : 

“ Kapiau say he been to Marquesas Islands. He 
hear people talk about two white boys taken there by a 
great chief, Mahinee, in war canoe. How old boys 
you looking for? ” continued Waheatoua. 

This question greatly excited them. The captain at 
once questioned Waheatoua as follows: 

‘‘ Say to Kapiau, white man asks why you ask the 
age of the white boys.’' 

Kapiau says,” exclaimed Waheatoua to the cap- 
tain, that two white boys he hear about not so old 
or tall as this one,” pointing to Jack. 

“ What has he told you about these boys, Wahea- 
toua? ” anxiously inquired the captain. 

‘‘ Kapiau says he hear much talk about white boys. 
White boys great magicians. Big white priests.” 

They must be Charley and Harold, captain,” said 
Jack anxiously. Don’t you think so ? ” 

I do,” was the reply; but let me question Wahea- 
toua further. Ask Kapiau if he heard the names of 
the white boys,” inquired the captain. 

Waheatoua put this question to his friend and re- 
ceiving the reply, said : 


271 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


Kapiau say white boys called Charleyo Mahinee 
and Harealdo Mahinee.” 

Hurrah ! ” cried Jack. They’re our boys. They 
must be our boys. I imagine that Charleyo and Har- 
ealdo were the nearest the savages could come to pro- 
nouncing our boys’ names.” ^ 

“ But,” inquired Hiram, how did they come to 
tack Mahinee onto them names? ” 

Don’t you remember, Hiram,” exclaimed Jack in 
astonishment, “ that Mahinee was the name of the 
chief who brought the boys captives to the island. 
Captain,” he continued anxiously, “ please ask Wa- 
heatoua if he heard the direction of the island from 
which Mahinee obtained these boys.” 

“ I will. Jack,” said the captain, “ and I will also en- 
deavor to ascertain the number of canoes Mahinee took 
with him.” On asking this question and receiving the 
answer from Kapiau, Waheatoua pointed in the direc- 
tion of Harding Island and said : 

“ Me hear Mahinee went with one, and one, and one, 
and one war canoes, and a big war canoe, and brought 
the boys from an island many days in that direction,” 
pointing toward the southwest. 

Did you hear, Waheatoua,” inquired the captain 
excitedly, how many warriors were in Mahinee’s 
canoes ? ” 

Kapiau tell me,” said Waheatoua, '' that Mahinee, 
great chief, take heap warriors with him.” He then 
continued to tell them in his imperfect English the 
number of men in each of the smaller canoes and in the 
272 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


large canoe. As far as they could understand it was 
exactly the number they had counted through the 
glasses from the edge of Parker Cliffs, on Harding 
Island, when all the canoes had come together. There 
were twelve men in each of the small canoes, and 
twenty-four in the large canoe. 

If Waheatoua and his friend had occasion for sur- 
prise at the conduct of the white men, and particularly 
of Hiram, when they returned to the island with boat 
No. 23, they had still greater reason for being as- 
tonished at what happened when it became practically 
certain they had at last located their dear boys. Now, 
not only Hiram began to dance madly on the beach, but 
Jack, and even the captain, joined in, and not satisfied 
with repeatedly shaking one another’s hand, they gave 
cheer after cheer. 

Waheatoua and his friend again grinned, Wahea- 
toua remarking : 

'' White men big heap glad. Dance war dance. 
Glad you find white boys. Waheatoua and Kapiau 
heap glad too.” 

It’s all plain now,” said the captain to his com- 
panions. Everything agrees with what we already 
knew. You remember how the appearance of Charley’s 
and Harold’s faces, as we saw them in the canoe when 
near Harding Island, led us to the conclusion that the 
lads had succeeded in gaining the good-will of their 
captors, as their note by Rompey said they intended try- 
ing to do. And this not only with the chief of the party 
in the canoe that captured them, but also with the chief 
s 273 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


of the expedition whose name we now hear is Mahinee. 
We saw the two boys get into Mahinee’s canoe, as 
we are now almost certain on the invitation of the 
chief. We now learn that the name of Mahinee has 
been added to their name. Does not this mean,’' said 
the captain continuing, turning to Waheatoua, that 
the two boys have been adopted into Mahinee’s 
family ? ” 

“ Yes,” replied Waheatoua, Charleyo Mahinee and 
Harealdo Mahinee now Mahinee’s half-sons.” 

‘‘ Ask Kapiau,” said the captain to Waheatoua, 

whether Mahinee and his people are kind to the 
boys.” 

On putting this question to his friend, Waheatoua 
replied to the captain : 

Kapiau hear that Kooloo, Mahinee’s son, great 
friend of white boys. With them alle time.” 

“ Then,” inquired the captain in the same way, you 
think the white boys are safe with Mahinee ? ” 

‘‘ White boys heap safe,” was the reply. “ They now 
taboo; great taboo. No one dare hurt them.” 

The two men entered into a long conversation. 
^Kapiau was evidently endeavoring to persuade Wa- 
heatoua to ask the captain some questions. 

‘‘ What does Kapiau want to know ? ” asked the 
captain of Waheatoua. 

“ Kapiau say may he go with you in his canoe to 
Mahinee’s island ? ” 

Tell him,” said the captain, ‘‘ that we will be 
pleased to have him go.” 


274 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


Arrangements were soon made for leaving the 
island. They washed out and refilled their water-casks, 
loaded up the canoe with cocoanuts and what other 
food products they could obtain, and started off for the 
Island of Captivity, or Mahinee’s island ; not, however, 
before they made the heart of Kapiau glad by liberal 
presents, especially of wrought-iron spikes and nails. 
It is unnecessary to say that from the time of the ar- 
rival of boat . No. 23, Rompey showed great delight, 
and took up his abode in the boat as though he feared 
it might get off without him. 


275 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


CHAPTER XXIII 

Captives in the Western Valley 

But let us return for a while to the Western Valley 
of the Island of Captivity. The news of the return of 
the expedition, as well as of their but partial success, 
had spread so rapidly that when the warriors reached 
the village in the lower part of the valley, they were 
met by a crowd of angry people, who at once began 
heaping reproaches on them. The number of Mahi- 
nee’s men on the mountain was so small that all had 
confidently expected their warriors would take the 
entire party captives. At last, they said to themselves, 
we will be avenged on the great warrior Mahinee, who 
has so often beaten us. But when, instead of this, they 
learned that the expedition had returned with only 
three captives, and two of them mere boys, they shouted 
in derision. They were angry and took no pains to 
conceal it. On the contrary, they ran toward the 
prisoners threatening to kill them. Seeing this, as 
soon as the people approached to lay their hands on 
them, the leader of the party cried out in great alarm, 
‘‘ Taboo, taboo.’’ 

The people drew back in alarm at those dreaded 
words. Taking advantage of this, the leader hurried 
his prisoners toward the king’s house lower down in 
the valley. 


276 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


People much angry because their warriors bring 
only three prisoners, two dead bodies, and no spoils,” 
said Marbonna to Charley, seeing the bad feeling of 
the people. Maybe they kill and eat us. But again 
maybe not, because of great taboo.” 

It looks bad,” said Charley. Can we do any- 
thing? ” he inquired of Marbonna. 

‘‘ Not now,” was the reply. “ Perhaps after a while 
Charleyo will show the king and his priests big magic 
to scare them. Now people too angry. Must wait” 

The prisoners were soon brought before Arahu, the 
king, who stood outside his house, talking with some 
of his priests. The king was a ferocious-looking man, 
fully six and a half feet in height, and of unusual 
strength. His face was closely covered with tattoo- 
ings, arranged so as to give him an extremely cruel 
and ferocious appearance. Not that he needed tattoo- 
ing for this purpose. Nature had already clearly 
stamped his character on his face. It needed nothing 
to increase its cruel appearance. During the entire 
time he had been with the savages on the Island of 
Captivity, Charley had never before seen such an 
awful face. 

Arahu carried in his right hand a huge spear, the 
handle of which was carved with curious faces. But 
the most conspicuous thing about him was something 
intended as an ornament; this was a carved piece of 
wood that had been stuck in a hole through the carti- 
lage between the two nostrils. It was of sufficient 
length to reach entirely across his face from ear to 
277 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


ear. He must have suffered no little by reason of that 
ornament. It so nearly closed his nostrils as to compel 
him to breathe through the open mouth. But kings 
must not object to such trifling inconveniences. The 
ornament he firmly believed increased his natural 
beauty. He would, therefore, continue wearing it. 

As the captives were led before him, Arahu, seeing 
that Charley’s hands were not bound, pointed angrily 
at them and said something to the leader of the war- 
riors, asking why this had not been attended to, and 
then apparently gave orders to have Charley’s hands 
bound like the other captives. When one of the king’s 
men approached Charley for this purpose, the leader 
explained in an excited manner why this had not been 
done. He assured the king that the young white lad 
was great taboo. The king did not appear to be much 
impressed with this statement, and was apparently 
about again commanding Charley’s hands to be bound, 
when one of the priests, turning to the king, said some- 
thing to him in a low but earnest tone, and Charley’s 
hands remained unbound. 

Stay with us,” said Marbonna in a low tone. 
'' Charleyo safer with king and priests than with peo- 
ple.” 

People much angry,” said Kooloo. ‘‘ Would kill 
Charleyo but priest say No.” 

Arahu now began speaking in a loud and angry tone 
to the leader of the expedition against Mahinee’s men. 
As he was talking, Marbonna, in a low tone, told Charr- 
ley what he was saying. 

278 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


King say to chief, Why you no take all people we 
saw on the mountain? Not many, yet you only take 
three captives. Heap bad.” 

The leader, wishing to show the king that his men 
had done something, now commanded that the dead 
bodies of Mahinee’s warriors be shown to the king. It 
evidently pleased him that some of the men of Mahi- 
nee, his great enemy, had been slain. Now, he and 
some of his warriors could eat them. 

After a short conversation with the high priest, the 
king began an address to the people in which he told 
them that the news brought them of the failure of his 
men were not true. They had routed Mahinee’s men, 
and had brought some of the dead bodies, so that they 
could now have a feast. The address had a great effect 
on the people, who shouted with delight and crowded 
around the king and the priests, asking that they might 
be present when the feast took place. 

Arrangements were soon made, and commanding 
some of his warriors to bring the dead bodies, the king, 
priests, and his warriors led the way at a rapid gait, 
followed by a great crowd of men, women, and chil- 
dren. 

They stopped, about a half a mile from the king’s 
house, near a large branch stream that emptied into 
the river from the eastern side of the valley; that is, 
from the side next to the valley of Mahinee. Here, as 
Charley afterward learned, was the Hoola-hoola or 
holy ground. Before actually reaching this place, the 
greater part of the people stopped on account of a great 
279 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


taboo that had been placed on the ground. They dared 
go no farther. 

The Hoola-hoola ground was an elevated piece of 
land located in the neighborhood of a huge pi-pi, that 
was much larger than any that Charley had seen in 
the Eastern Valley. This pi-pi was almost completely 
covered with huge trees, in which respect it resembled 
some of the pi-pis they had seen in Mahinee’s valley. 
The stones of which it was built were however much 
larger than those employed in the pi-pis of Mahinee’s 
valley, and were, moreover, fitted more closely to- 
gether. 

The Hoola-hoola ground was a sacred place where 
sacrifices were offered. On reaching it they at once com- 
menced the kindling of fires, on which the dead bodies 
of Mahinee’s warriors were placed. Before long the 
foul smell of burning flesh could be detected, and soon 
pieces of the dead bodies were distributed among the 
men. While this was going on the men began a 
drunken orgy. 

For some reason that Charley and his companions 
could not then understand, the priests wished, at least 
for the time-being, to protect them from the people. 
Fearing that in their drunken fury some of them would 
be killed, they sent them to their House of the Idols on 
the pi-pi. This building was of the same type as the 
priests’ house in Mahinee’s valley. Here they were 
left in charge of some of the priests who were charged 
to guard them at the peril of their lives. 

Being now free to talk with one another, Charley at 
280 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


once entered into a long conversation with Kooloo and 
Marbonna, in order to see if some plan could not be 
formed for escaping. Remembering the lava cave he 
and Harold had discovered near the summit of the vol- 
canic mountain at the head of Mahinee’s valley, Char- 
ley thought that if they could only manage to reach that 
cave they might readily hide in it until Mahinee, get- 
ting his men together, would come to their aid. He 
therefore urged them to attempt to escape with him, 
but did not then say anything about the cave. Both 
Kooloo and Marbonna were opposed to any attempt to 
escape, at least for the time-being. 

People too angry now,” said Marbonna. Crazy 
drunk. Maybe try to escape after while. Not now.” 

There was one thing Charley had been puzzling over 
at great length. It was evident that the priests were 
their friends; that had it not been for their interfer- 
ence they would have been killed long ago. He was 
therefore anxious to know if Marbonna could tell him 
the reason for this action of the priests. 

Marbonna not know,” was the reply. ‘‘ Maybe be- 
cause they want to keep us for sacrifices. Maybe afraid 
of great taboo. Maybe wish to have the great white 
priest serve in the House of the Idols.” 

'' Kooloo,” inquired Charley, ‘‘ do you think the 
king would kill you if he knew you were Mahinee’s 
only son ? ” 

Kooloo hope king don’t know. Think king would 
kill Kooloo if he knew.” 

But why should he kill you ? ” inquired Charley. 
281 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


“ Cause it would make Mahinee heap sorry,” was 
the reply. 

Do you think Kooloo is right, Marbonna ? ” in- 
quired Charley. 

Almost certain the king would kill Kooloo. But 
we won’t let him know Kooloo is Mahinee’s son,” was 
the reply. 

Then,” said Charley, '' I suppose if the king knew 
that my name was Charleyo Mahinee he would also kill 
and eat me.” 

Yes,” cried both Marbonna and Kooloo, but we 
no tell him.” And then Marbonna added, turning to 
Charley : 

“ You only Charleyo; and you,” turning to Kooloo, 
only Kooloo.” 

But thinking that Charley would be greatly fright- 
ened at the thought of being killed and eaten, Mar- 
bonna turned to him and said : 

Marbonna think Charleyo not be killed. Priests 
afraid of Charleyo’s magic.” 

Yes,” added Kooloo. Maybe eat Kooloo and 
Marbonna, but not Charleyo.” 

The information Charley thus obtained was not 
satisfactory. He saw it was necessary that they try to 
discover what was to be done with them. If it was 
certain they were to be killed, they would of course be 
warranted in taking any risks in trying to escape. If 
not, it would be better to wait for a good opportunity. 
Thinking it would be well for Marbonna and Kooloo 
to know that if they could manage to reach the lava 
282 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


cave near the top of Mahinee’s valley they would be 
safe, he turned to his companions and said : 

Charleyo knows a fine place to hide in if we can 
reach the top of the mountain.” 

“Where?” inquired both his hearers. “No place 
on top of mountain ! We there many times, but see no 
place to hide in. Charleyo says he knows fine place ? ” 

“ Yes,” was the reply. “ Charleyo found good hi- 
ding-place.” He then gave them a description of the 
lava cave, explaining how it extended a great distance 
below the ground; that it was difficult to find its en- 
trance, and that if they could only succeed in reaching 
it they ought to be able to hide there until they could 
see the great chief Mahinee and his warriors coming to 
punish the people of the Western Valley. 

Charley’s description of the size of the cave, and the 
character of its entrance greatly pleased Kooloo and 
Marbonna, especially when Charley explained to them 
that there was an abundant supply of good drinking- 
water in the cave itself. 

“ Take food to cave. Live there heap time till Mahi- 
nee come,” exclaimed Marbonna. 

“ Good place to hide,” exclaimed Kooloo. “ Maybe 
after while we get chance we run away and hide there.” 

But while both his companions were aware of the 
chance the cave offered as a temporary hiding-place, 
they did not see how it would be possible to reach it 
just then. The priests with whom they had been left 
in charge were keeping a careful watch. They knew 
they would be killed if the prisoners escaped. 

283 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


It was now Charley’s turn to encourage his friends. 
He again called their attention to the fact that Mahi- 
nee had of course heard that his son had been taken 
prisoner and carried into captivity to the Western 
Valley; and since, moreover, he knew that the king of 
that valley was a wicked man who would probably kill 
and eat them, he would, of course, get his warriors 
together quickly and come and release them ; that 
perhaps he was even then on his way for this purpose ; 
that the distance between the cave and the Western 
Valley was not great, so that if they could only manage 
during the night to reach the cave they would be safe 
from their enemies. 

Marbonna and Kooloo listened carefully to what 
Charley said to them, when Kooloo told Charley some- 
thing that greatly discouraged him. It was that the 
day before their capture he had received a message 
from his father saying that he was going with his five 
canoes and warriors on a visit to a neighboring island, 
and would not return for five or six days. They could 
not count, therefore, on any aid from Mahinee until at 
least that time. 

“ Then,” said Charley, it is all the more necessary 
that we keep on the lookout for means of escaping. If 
Mahinee cannot help us we must help ourselves.” 

The orgies of Arahu and his warriors continued 
through the night and even into the early hours of the 
morning. The captives would not therefore again be 
taken before the king and his chiefs for some time. 

As it is with white people it is, perhaps, even more 
284 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


so with savages, one feels worse after a debauch 
than before. As was therefore to be expected, the tem- 
per of the king and his warriors had not been improved 
by what they had been doing during the night. 

When the prisoners reached the royal presence it was 
evident that there was still a difference of opinion be- 
tween the king and the priests as to what should 
be done with them. The king demanded that they 
should be killed so as to permit another cannibal feast. 
His warriors were of the same opinion. The priests, 
however, were determined, at least for the time-being, 
that the lives of the prisoners should be spared. Dur- 
ing the night they had heard still further particulars 
concerning the wonderful magic of the young white 
lad, and had now concluded to have him serve in their 
public worship. If the young white man could make 
some of the wonderful things happen at their House 
of the Idols it would strengthen their influence with 
the people, and would thus greatly increase the value 
of the gifts brought to the temple. The priests argued 
this with the king, and had at last obtained from him 
a reluctant assent, when something happened that com- 
pletely turned the scale against the prisoners. 

So far Arahu believed that Kooloo was merely one 
of the young lads of Mahinee’s valley, and that Char- 
leyo was only a white lad from the same place. It ap- 
peared, however, that one of the king’s men knew that 
Kooloo was the only son of the great chief, Mahinee, 
and that Charleyo was the adopted son of the same 
king, and was named Charleyo Mahinee. 

285 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


When Arahu learned what distinguished prisoners 
he had before him, he was more determined than ever 
to have both of them killed and eaten. He knew that 
by doing this he could greatly avenge himself and his 
people for the many times they had been defeated by 
Mahinee. An opportunity for vengeance was now 
offered that might never again present itself. Mahinee 
would be deeply afflicted not only by the death of the 
two boys, but especially by the thought that they could 
never be happy after death; for the savage people 
believed that being eaten by their enemies would pre- 
vent them from entering the happy land to which all 
good Polynesians go when they die. 

To make matters still worse, it seemed that most of 
the priests agreed with the king. As soon as they 
heard that both Kooloo and Charleyo were of the 
king’s household they determined that the two boys, 
together with the other prisoner, should be offered up 
in sacrifice to their gods, and they began to demand that 
this plan be followed. 

A few of the priests, however, continued to oppose 
this action. Fortunately, among these was the high 
or great priest, as well as the priest next in authority to 
him. The chief priest at once commenced an address 
to the king, the warriors, and the priests who were 
opposed to saving the lives of the prisoners. He said 
that he was willing the prisoners be offered as a sacri- 
fice if the gods so wished. He assured them, however, 
that he had received a communication from their gods 
that they should be careful what they did to the prison- 
286 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


ers. He had asked the gods whether they wished the 
prisoners sacrificed, and they had promised to give 
him a definite reply in a day or two. He, therefore, 
demanded that the prisoners should be placed in the 
care of the priests for at least two days, until the gods 
finally determined what was to be done with them. 
The king hesitated, for his mind had been set on the 
sacrifice of the prisoners. 

Fortunately this uncertainty of the king was at last 
removed by the action of the priest that was next in 
authority to the high priest. Charley had noticed that 
from the very first this man was opposed to any injury 
being done to them. Thus far he had contented him- 
self with listening to what was said by the others. 
Now, however, he began a long and impassioned ad- 
dress to the king and his warriors, and especially to 
those of the priests who had gone over to the king. 
He declared he had heard himself from all their gods 
that the prisoners were taboo. That the young white 
lad was taboo-taboo, or the very great taboo. That the 
gods had declared to him again and again that should 
any injury befall the prisoners, especially the white 
lad, they would bring awful punishment on the people. 
He urged, therefore, that nothing should be done until 
the gods themselves had been heard from. That a day 
should be appointed, the day after the morrow, when, 
in the presence of the king, his warriors, the priests, 
and all the people, the gods should be questioned as 
to what they wished done with the prisoners. 

This eloquent address impressed both the king, his 
287 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


warriors, and the rest of the people to such an extent 
that it was agreed that this should be done. 

The high priest was greatly pleased at the result 
thus gained and, turning to the people, said : 

‘‘ What Miconareo says is true.” (Miconareo, they 
afterward learned, was the name given to the priest 
whose impassioned address had carried the day in 
their favor. ) Not only have the gods told me, but 
you see they also told him that the three prisoners are 
taboo-taboo, especially the young white prisoner. If 
the other priests think they know better, let them ask 
the gods the day after to-morrow what they wish. I 
am willing there should be a sacrifice if the gods wish 
it, but if they do not wish it, which of you will dare 
to act against their commands ? ” 


288 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


CHAPTER XXiy 
Miconareo and Charley 

As we have already seen, on many occasions, Charley 
had shown that he was a shrewd observer. He had 
carefully watched Miconareo as he made his impas- 
sioned speech to the king, his warriors, the priests, and 
especially to the high priest. Although he spoke flu- 
ently, never seeming to be at a loss for the proper 
word, yet there was something about his speech that 
gave Charley the impression that the man was not em- 
ploying the language he had employed for the greater 
part of his life, but one he had mastered in after life. 
Then too, the general shape of the man’s head, the 
shape of his eyes, and the character of his hair differed 
markedly from those of the men around him. Indeed, 
Charley found himself making a careful examination 
of the man’s skin as if he expected to find in it a marked 
difference from that of the savages. But here he was 
disappointed. As far as he could see, except that it was 
a lighter shade of brown, it presented the same dark or 
almost black color as did the skins of the savages. 
This, as he knew, might have been due to the tattooings 
that not only entirely covered the man’s body, but also 
all of his face, neck, and even a considerable portion of 
his head that had been purposely shaved. 

As Charley watched Miconareo he soon made 
T 289 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


another discovery. Miconareo was watching him al- 
most as intently as he was watching Miconareo. He 
appeared, however, to do his watching covertly, as if 
afraid the king, his warriors, and the priests would de- 
tect him. At last Miconareo finished speaking, and 
had, as we have already seen, succeeded in having the 
matter of the sacrifice left to a decision to be reached by 
the gods on the next day but one. 

When Arahu in answer to the demand of the high 
priest turned the prisoners over to his care, accom- 
panied by the priests, they were taken back to the house 
in which they had spent the first night of their captivity, 
where they were again left in charge of the same priests 
who had then watched over them. 

As soon as they were alone, Charley turned to Mar- 
bonna and said : 

I suppose, Marbonna, we will be safe until at least 
the day after to-morrow. Neither the king nor his 
warriors will dare to touch us now. Am I not right? ” 

All right till day after to-morrow,” replied Mar- 
bonna. And then turning to Charley he inquired in 
an anxious tone : Perhaps to-morrow in the House of 
the Idols the gods will speak and say that the three 
prisoners must not be hurt because they are taboo- 
taboo.” 

“ They very probably will, Marbonna,” said Char- 
ley. ‘‘ Do you think everything will be right if they 
did.” 

If Charleyo show the priests and the people some 
great magic then the priests will not let any one hurt 
290 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


Charleyo or Kooloo or Marbonna, because fear of 
taboo-taboo.” 

‘^You think gods will speak, Charleyo?” inquired 
Kooloo anxiously. 

‘‘ I hope they will speak, Kooloo, and speak so as to 
keep the people from killing and eating us,” was the 
reply. 

They sat talking together for more than an hour, 
when one of the priests came into the room and said 
something to Marbonna who, turning to Charley, said : 

“ High priest and Miconareo want to speak to Char- 
leyo. Go to him, Charleyo.” 

''Won’t you and Kooloo come along?” inquired 
Charley. 

"No, priest say only Charleyo come, not others. 
Better go. High priest and Miconareo our good 
friends.” 

" All right,” said Charley, " I’ll go and hope to come 
back soon with some good news.” 

The priest led Charley to the House of the Idols 
where he was taken before the high priest, Miconareo, 
and two others of those priests who had sided with 
them in their opposition to killing the prisoners. 

As soon as Charley entered the house the high priest 
began to talk to him, asking questions as to what had 
happened in the House of the Idols in Mahinee’s valley. 
By this time Charley had become sufficiently acquainted 
with the language of the Polynesians to understand 
fairly well what was asked him. But while he could 
understand the priest’s questions, it was more dif- 
291 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


ficult to give the desired information. There is a 
great difference between being able by understanding a 
word here and there, to gain the general import of a 
conversation, and being able to employ the proper 
words of that language that are necessary for giving 
the answers. However, Charley did his best, and when 
he had any difficulty he was able, by means of the pad 
of drawing paper and a lead pencil to convey his an- 
swers to the high priest and Miconareo, both of whom 
appeared greatly pleased at the ease with which he was 
able to express himself by the use of the proper Poly- 
nesian word here and there, backed up as they were by 
his sketches. 

The high priest showed Charley the idols, and said, 
as well as Charley could understand, that the day after 
to-morrow would determine whether he and his friends 
should be offered in sacrifice to the gods, or whether 
their lives should be spared on condition that they 
would serve in their House of the Idols. That perhaps 
the gods might say they should not be sacrificed because 
they were great taboo. If they should say this then 
everything would be right. If they should not say it, 
then nothing could prevent Charley and his friends 
from being sacrificed. 

It was evident, ho wever, , that what the high priest 
was endeavoring to discover was whether Charley 
thought there was any chance or probability of the gods 
speaking out loud as they did in Mahinee’s valley. 
Understanding now that they wished this to occur, 
Charley replied : 


292 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


Perhaps the gods might give an answer now if the 
priest should ask the question. And even if they did 
answer it would not prevent their giving an answer on 
the great day when all the people came to hear them.” 

Miconareo, who during all this time had said noth- 
ing, now gave Charley a look as if he was greatly 
pleased with his answer. Turning to the high priest, 
he then began speaking to him in Polynesian, and re- 
quested the priest to ask their principal god whether it 
was his wish that the three prisoners should be sacri- 
ficed or if he wished that their lives should be spared, 
so that they could serve in their temple. He even sug- 
gested the form in which this question should be put : 

Ask the god,” he said, ‘ Do you wish the lives 
of the prisoners to be spared ? ’ ” 

The particular idol which Miconareo had referred to 
as their principal idol was about eight feet in height. 
It consisted of wood carved so as to represent a huge 
man with a stern, forbidding countenance. Unlike the 
idols Charley had seen in the House of the Idols in 
Mahinee’s valley, it was not formed of a solid log of 
wood, but was hollow, the priests being in the habit 
of placing recently carved idols inside its body so that 
they might, as it were, be endowed with its supernatural 
powers. 

The high priest, addressing the god by its name, now 
inquired in a loud voice : 

Do you wish that the lives of the three prisoners 
taken from Mahinee shall be spared ? Speak out loud 
that your priests may know what you wish done.” 

293 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


Charley now made another use of his great powers 
of ventriloquism, so that when the high priest who, 
when he had finished asking the question, held his ear 
near the mouth of the idol, believed that he heard it 
speak distinctly the words : 

“ Aa, Aa. Charleyo Mahinee taboo-taboo. Kooloo 
Mahinee taboo-taboo. Marbonna taboo-taboo. Taboo- 
taboo.” 

The fact that the idol was hollow greatly added to 
the deception ; for the air contained in its body was set 
into intense vibrations by Charley’s voice. The words 
seemed to come directly from the lips of the idol, that 
up to this time had been quite dumb except in the imagi- 
nation of the priests. 

Although while he was holding his ear near the idol’s 
* mouth the high priest kept his eyes on Charley, he was 
unable to detect any motion of Charley’s lips that might 
have made him suspect that it was Charley who was do- 
ing the talking. Nor, indeed, could Miconareo, who 
stood quite near to Charley, detect that he was talking, 
although he seemed to suspect it. 

When this astonishing result was achieved, the high 
priest, turning to Miconareo, said something that as 
well as Charley could understand meant that there 
could now be no doubt as to what the gods wanted, and 
that if they would speak this way on the day of the 
trial there could be no doubt that the prisoners’ lives 
would be spared. He then turned to Miconareo and 
said : 

“ Wait here with the white lad. I will be back in a 
294 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


few minutes,” and motioning all the priests, except Mi- 
conareo to follow him, Miconareo and Charley were 
left alone in the room. 

Miconareo, apparently waiting until he heard the 
footsteps of the high priest and the others growing 
fainter and fainter until they ceased to be heard, turned 
to Charley and said in excellent English : 

‘‘ My lad, that’s the best piece of ventriloquism I ever 
remember hearing in all my life, and I have heard 
good ventriloquism too. Do that the day after to- 
morrow and you and your friends are safe. But take 
care you are not detected; for the king and his war- 
riors would only be too glad to have you killed. But 
where did you come from ? ” 

As soon as Charley recovered from his great sur- 
prise, he said: 

I came from Australia. But who are you who 
speak such excellent English and yet can talk so elo- 
quently in the language of the savages. Are you an 
Englishman or an American ? ” 

‘‘ I am an American,” was the reply. I came origi- 
nally from Boston, United States. But tell me what 
you can do in the way of magic besides ventriloquism. 
We must agree between us what you are to do the day 
after to-morrow.” 

You want to know what I can do to show that I 
am a white priest ? ” said Charley smiling. Suppose 
I begin by telling you your name ? ” 

‘‘ Do that,” said Miconareo in an incredulous tone, 
and I will believe anything you choose to tell me.” 

295 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


Then,” said Charley, ‘‘ Til begin by saying that 
unless I am greatly mistaken you are Dr. Charles B. 
Parsons, of Boston, Mass.” 

It was now the doctor’s turn to be greatly astonished. 
Turning to Charley, he said : 

“ Is it possible that the world has gone back to the 
age of wizards and soothsayers? How you have 
guessed my name I do not know, but that is my name.” 

‘‘ I thought so,” said Charley. You were swept 
overboard, were you not, from a brig, the Fanny Wat- 
son, bound from Liverpool to Melbourne, Australia? 
The brig was wrecked off the southwestern coast of 
South America after passing through the Straits of 
Magellan.” 

“ My lad,” said Miconareo — or as we shall now oc- 
casionally call him, Doctor Parsons — “ I don’t know 
how you obtained your information, but it’s straight 
all right, only, as you see, I was not drowned. But 
we have no time now to talk over our adventures. I 
have had mine. From the information you appear to 
have of me, I ‘judge that you have passed through 
many wonderful adventures. Some other time we 
will talk these over. Just now we must get an early 
opportunity to lay plans for what must be done at the 
time of the great meeting in the House of the Idols. I 
hear the high priest coming with probably all his as- 
sistants. Don’t let him know we have spoken. I will 
arrange matters to-night so that we can converse 
freely.” 

As the high priest entered the room with nearly all 
296 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


the other priests, it was evident that he had told them of 
the wonderful things that had occurred. Their princi- 
pal god had broken his long silence. He had spoken in 
a loud distinct voice that could be heard all over the 
room, and had declared that the lives of the prisoners 
must be spared on condition that they were willing to 
serve in their House of the Idols. He had evidently 
promised the other priests that they should have an op- 
portunity of hearing this great miracle for themselves 
if, indeed, their god would be willing to again speak to 
them in a loud voice. 

As in the House of the Idols in Mahinee’s valley, the 
principal god was placed at the center of a semi-circle 
with three smaller idols on each side, thus making seven 
in all. 

Miconareo then entered into a conversation with 
the high priest, and said to him : 

“ Beseech the gods that they will, one after another, 
speak and tell us whether they wish the lives of the 
prisoners spared. Bid your priests stand near the 
gods, and let six of them bend their ears near the 
mouths of the gods so as to hear what they say. Let 
the others stand near them, and do you,” he continued, 
turning to the high priest, ‘'place your ear near the 
mouth of the principal god.” 

As soon as this was done the high priest again ad- 
dressing their seven gods, successively by name, asked 
that they should, one after the other, answer this ques- 
tion: 

“ Shall the lives of the prisoners be spared? Would 
297 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


you prefer that they be spared rather than offered as 
sacrifices ? 

Again Charley caused the idols to speak apparently 
one after the other, and, moreover, in different tones 
or voices, so that each cried out : 

Aa, Aa. Taboo, taboo-taboo.” 

The priests were both greatly surprised and pleased 
at the wonderful exhibition of the power of their gods. 
They were now certain that neither the king nor his 
warriors would dare set at naught commands expressed 
in so wonderful a manner. 

That night, when sleeping with his companions on 
mats in the house of the priests, Charley was aroused 
by a light touch. Looking up, he saw Miconareo, who, 
placing a finger on his lips as if cautioning him to 
silence, motioned Charley to follow him, and left the 
room. 

Miconareo led Charley to a small house situated at 
the extreme eastern end of the pi-pi farthest from the 
Hoola-hoola ground and the House of the Idols. Here, 
he had built for himself a house more after the 
manner of European houses; or, more correctly, ar- 
ranged in the interior like a European house ; for, when 
looked at from the outside, it had the same sloping, 
thatched roof, and was surrounded by the same open 
screen of woven bamboo. The interior, however, was 
divided into separate compartments by woven bamboo 
curtains that permitted the air to blow freely through. 
One of these compartments was arranged with a rough 
table and chair for a study, and on a shelf on one of the 
298 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


walls was a large bundle of sheets of specially prepared 
tapa cloth covered with English writing. The doctor 
was evidently continuing his studies in the natural sci- 
ences, for the remains of dried animals, hanging from 
the walls and ceiling, gave to the air of this room an 
odor that reminded Charley of the awful smell the cap- 
tain and his companions on the derelict brig had told 
him they had encountered in the cabin when they first 
opened the door. 

Observing the sheets of tapa manuscript, Charley 
said to the doctor : 

Are you still busy at your great work, doctor, ‘ The 
Physical Geography of the Sea ’ ? 

‘‘ Young man,’' said the doctor, you seem to have 
my life down pretty fine. Tell me how you know so 
much about a man who is supposed to have been dead 
these many years. What’s your name, anyhow, and 
where did you come from? ” 

My name is Charles Young Pleasanton,” was the 
reply. I was wrecked in the Pacific Ocean, and after- 
ward picked up in an open boat by a party who had 
boarded a derelict brig, the same Fanny Watson from 
which you had been swept overboard. This party, that 
had been on the brig for many months, consisted of two 
men and two boys. The brig, in its turn, was wrecked 
on a coral island, about six hundred miles to the south- 
west of the island on which we now are. Another boy, 
Harold Arthur Harding, and myself, were captured 
by the war canoes of Mahinee, the king of the valley 
on the east. The men there treated us very kindly, so 
299 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


that both Harold and myself were adopted by the king 
as his half-sons.” 

Wait a moment,” said Doctor Parsons, interrupt- 
ing him, I think I heard a footstep. It would never 
do to let the people know we are talking together. It 
would render them suspicious and keep them on the 
watch, and that we especially wish to avoid.” 


300 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


CHAPTER XXV 

The Decision in the House of the Idols 

Doctor Parsons was only gone for a few minutes. 
When he returned he said to Charley : 

I thought I heard some one approaching. If the 
high priest or, indeed, any of the priests should see us 
together, they would think we were plotting against 
them. But you were telling me when I left you about 
your companions. I understand that there were three 
boys on the brig, that is, two besides yourself, and two 
men. Tell me now something about the brig. In 
what condition did you find it? Was the cabin left, 
and if so, did you find any of the things in the cabin 
in good condition? Were any of the books and scien- 
tific apparatus remaining?” 

The people on the brig told me that they found 
most of the things in the cabin in good condition,” 
replied Charley. The books were all right, except 
that some of the bindings had been injured by water. 
Some of the apparatus was in good condition.” 

And how about my specimens ? ” asked the doctor. 

Were they all right? ” 

If you knew the condition of the specimens,” re- 
plied Charley, I think, doctor, from what the people 
on the brig told me, you would not be surprised when I 
tell you they were obliged to throw them overboard. 

301 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


The alcohol in which you had placed them had all 
dried up. They told me the specimens were in an awful 
condition.” 

I imagine from what you said about ‘ The Physical 
Geography of the Sea/ that you found at least some 
traces of the manuscript on which I liad been working 
for many years, and on which I have even here done 
some little work. Did you find much of that in good 
condition? ” he inquired anxiously. 

‘‘ The entire manuscript was found complete, and 
in such excellent condition that Lieutenant Harding, 
one of the two men who were on the brig, com- 
menced reading it, and considered it so important a 
work that he has been adding to it ; for, in addition to 
what I have told you about the brig, I must tell you 
that when it was wrecked on a coral reef and split in 
two, the part containing the cabin remained firmly 
wedged between two large rocks on the reef. Before 
this half of the brig went to pieces, we were able safely 
to transfer to the island your library, scientific instru- 
ments, and especially your manuscript. All five of us 
lived on that island for over half a year, and unless 
my companions have left the island in search for Har- 
old and myself, three of them are there yet.” 

What is Lieutenant Harding’s first name ? ” in- 
quired the doctor, interrupting Charley as he was about 
to continue the narrative. 

‘‘ Arthur,” was the reply. “ By the way, doctor. 
Lieutenant Harding, or Captain Harding, as we have 
been calling him since he took command of our little 
302 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


party, was an old acquaintance of yours. I was in- 
formed that when he read your name in the brig’s 
papers as its only passenger, he told his companions 
that you and he were old college chums, having both at- 
tended the same department at Oxford University, 
England, where you were taking a course in geographi- 
cal physics. I remember, doctor, they told me how 
deeply affected the captain was when he afterward read 
that you were swept overboard the day before the ves- 
sel was abandoned at sea.” 

“ Yes,” said the doctor, “ swept overboard but not 
drowned, as you can see. How strangely things hap- 
pen,” continued the doctor ; so it is my old friend, 
Arthur Harding, into whose hands my manuscript has 
fallen. I am not surprised that Harding should have 
been interested in it, for he was greatly interested in 
the physics of the ocean. But go on,” he continued, 
“ tell me something about your life on the coral island. 
Is it a large island ? Is it of the lagoon type ? Did you 
have plenty to eat, and were you comfortably fixed ? ” 

“ The island,” replied Charley, ‘‘ is of the lagoon 
type, and is about twelve miles in diameter. There 
are several smaller islands in the lagoon on which, 
as well as on the coral island itself, there are many 
cocoanut palms. On one of the islands in the lagoon we 
found a large clearing that had been abandoned long 
ago by a shipwrecked man whose skeleton was found 
in the ruins of a hut. 

But besides the natural food of the island we were 
fortunate in being able to transfer from the part of the 

303 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


brig that remained together, a quantity of canned 
goods and such other foods as had not been injured 
by the water. As you know, doctor, the brig was 
laden with large quantities of hardware, household 
goods, as well as with a number of portable houses.” 

Yes, I remember,” said the doctor. ‘‘Then you' 
were in a comfortable condition on the island,” he con- 
tinued. 

“If you could see the comfortable double house, 
which we have erected on the southern shore of Hard- 
ing Island, doctor,” answered Charley, “ as well as the 
single house on one of the islands of the lagoon near 
the clearing, I am sure that you would think we ought 
to have been very comfortable.” He then described 
Jackson House, with its comfortable study and museum 
on the second floor, its shaded porches overlooking the 
ocean at the front and the lagoon at the back of the 
house, together with the specimens they had collected. 

As Charley continued his explanation, the doctor 
became more and more interested. Harding Island 
was just the kind of a place where he would like to 
spend the remainder of his life. Good fortune, backed 
by the intelligence of his old friend. Lieutenant Hard- 
ing, had rescued his cherished manuscript, his valuable 
library, and most of his beloved scientific instruments. 
When Charley finished speaking, the doctor said : 

“ After what I have just heard from you I have de- 
termined what I shall do. Instead of merely aiding you 
and your companions to escape, I shall endeavor to es- 
cape with you. The king of this valley is a bad fellow, 

304 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


and many of the priests are no better. I shall, there- 
fore, try to escape with you ; and, moreover, will do all 
I can to go back with you to Harding Island.” 

“ But even if we escape from this part of the island, 
doctor,” said Charley, “ it will probably be even more 
difficult to escape from Mahinee. I fear he will be op- 
posed to Harold and myself leaving the island. He is 
greatly attached to us, and wishes us to be companions 
of his son Kooloo.” 

“We won’t cross that bridge until we come to it, 
my lad,” said the doctor. “ The most difficult thing to 
do will be to escape from this valley. If we succeed in 
this we will then take up the matter of Mahinee, and see 
what can be done about reaching Harding Island. As 
for myself, I have thoroughly determined to reach that 
island, and will do all that I can to help you and your 
friends to go there with me.” 

“ Hurrah for that ! ” cried Charley. “ I hope you 
will succeed. Indeed, I believe you will succeed.” 

“ If we succeed in reaching Harding Island,” said 
the doctor, quite as much or more, indeed, to himself 
than to Charley, “ I shall be able to complete ‘ The 
Physical Geography of the Sea,’ and can go on with 
my studies, and in connection with my old friend. Lieu- 
tenant Harding, who I know is an exceedingly learned 
man. Then I shall not care how long I remain on 
Harding Island. Indeed,” he added, “ since the sav- 
ages have covered me with these horrible tattooings, I 
would be ashamed ever to go back to civilization.” 

“ That’s all right for you, doctor,” said Charley, 

U 305 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


“ but both Harold and myself have a father and mother 
living, and we intend trying to get back home the first 
opportunity.” 

They kept on talking for some time longer. But 
they had not yet agreed as to what should be done in 
the House of the Idols, in order to place it beyond 
doubt that the gods wished the lives of the three pris- 
oners to be spared. 

“ Now, my lad,” said the doctor, we must stop 
talking about everything except as to what we are to 
do to-morrow, when the great test is to be made in 
the House of the Idols. Before we go any further, I 
wish to say that none of the people in this valley know 
that I speak English and, until we make our escape, I 
wish this fact kept secret. I have only been on this 
island for one year, and I think it best to let none of 
them know that I am an American. I will afterward 
explain to you what has happened to me since the 
time I was washed overboard from the brig, so let us 
now make plans as to the part you are to play as the 
great white priest.” 

I will do all I can,” replied Charley. “ I suppose 
ventriloquism will play the principal part in what I am 
to do.” 

Unquestionably,” replied the doctor. It is most 
fortunate that you are able to do this so well.” 

'' Then,” said Charley, “ let us first determine as to 
the questions that are to be put to the gods by you. I 
know very little of the language of this people, and 
should the questions be put by the priests in such a 
306 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


manner that I could not make the proper answers, the 
result would of course be unfavorable.” 

“ That’s just what I want to talk about,” said the 
doctor. The little you know of the language is for- 
tunately well pronounced, so that I think there is no 
danger of any one suspecting you are doing the 
talking. Indeed, I very much doubt if these people 
have ever heard of such a thing as ventriloquism. As 
to the character of the questions put to the gods, I 
think I can so arrange matters that the high priest 
will only put questions to which you can give good 
answers.” 

The doctor then arranged with Charley a number of 
questions, and went over these questions a number of 
times so that he would know just what was being 
asked. He then taught Charley the proper answers and 
made him repeat them. Charley did this so quickly 
and properly that he greatly pleased the doctor. 

If I can arrange it,” said the doctor, “ I shall en- 
deavor that the questions asked be such that you can 
answer in the same words you used in the House of 
the Idols to-day. And now, my lad,” continued the 
doctor, tell me about the story I have heard of your 
being able to command the sun to send down a part of 
his body to kindle a fire almost immediately.” 

Charley so greatly prized the lens-shaped piece of 
volcanic glass, that he had carried it with him ever 
since the day he was taken prisoner by the warriors 
of the Western Valley. Taking it from under his coat 
he showed it to the doctor, saying: 

307 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


It is only an unusually large burning-glass. Koo- 
loo and I were captured with the king’s interpreter, 
Marbonna, when we had been sent out by Mahinee to 
obtain specimens of this volcanic glass for use by Mahi- 
nee’s people.” 

The doctor examined with great interest the moon- 
shaped piece of mineral that Charley handed him. 

“ It’s a splendid specimen of obsidian, and of such 
a shape as to make a most excellent burning-glass. 
How long does it take to kindle a fire when the sun is 
shining brightly in a clear sky ? The use of this is very 
clever, Charley. Were you the first to think of it? ” 

“ No,” replied Charley, it was my companion, 
Harold, who first suggested it. He is a very bright 
boy.” 

But,” continued the doctor, ‘‘ you have not told me 
how rapidly you can kindle a fire with this piece of 
glass.” 

“ It kindles almost instantly.” 

‘‘ Then,” was the reply, ‘‘ I think I can do no better 
than to arrange matters so that the people can be shown 
this great thing. It will certainly cause the king and 
his warriors to regard you as a most powerful white 
magician. They will, therefore, be afraid to do you 
any harm. The answer of the gods, the people of 
course suppose comes from them ; but if you show them 
the kindling of the fire from the sun, they will be able 
to see that you are a priest.” 

Charley and the doctor then continued to talk over 
matters, arranging for some additional magic should 
308 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


this be necessary. In such case the doctor suggested 
that he might call on Charley to show magic pictures 
on sheets of paper. This matter having been fully dis- 
cussed, he then turned to Charley and said : 

‘‘ Suppose we reach the summit of the mountain that 
stands at the head of Mahinee’s valley. Is there any 
place there where we could hide ? 

When Charley explained to the doctor the wonderful 
lava cave he and Harold had discovered on that side of 
the volcanic cone farthest from the Western Valley, 
he said : 

‘‘ This makes our escape a much simpler matter than 
I feared it would be.’’ He then added, after a few 
moments’ thought: ‘‘ You see, my lad, we may be kept 
in the cave for some time, and should, therefore, take 
with us enough food and water to last several days. 
Now, I think we can manage the food, but I do not 
see how we can carry enough water. You see,” he 
continued, ‘‘ I am assuming that Mahinee will at once 
get his warriors together and march to the Western 
Valley for your rescue. As I said, we can manage the 
food, but I don’t see how we can manage the water.” 

I am glad to say,” said Charley, that there is a 
fairly large stream of good drinking-water that flows 
through the lower portions of the lava cave.” 

Then, my lad,” said the doctor, “ I am sure I can 
arrange for our escape. But you must get rest. There 
is much for you to do to-morrow, and our success de- 
pends largely on you. Come, I will lead you back to 
your companions. As soon as you reach them lie 

309 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


quietly down and get to sleep as soon as possible. As 
for me, there is much to be done. I must see the high 
priest and make arrangements for the questions.” 

Leading Charley quietly back to the house of the 
priests, they found Kooloo, Marbonna, and all the peo- 
ple in a sound sleep. To a great extent the cautious 
steps with which the doctor and his companion entered 
the room were unnecessary; for, as Charley afterward 
learned, the doctor had mixed in their drink an opiate 
that threw them into a profound but safe sleep. This 
the doctor had prepared from his knowledge of botany 
from some of the native plants of the Western Valley. 
While the doctor was certain it would throw them 
into a deep slumber, yet he took no chances of some 
of them failing to drink it, and therefore both entered 
and left the room cautiously. 

The next day was spent quietly by Charley, Kooloo, 
and Marbonna. Acting under the advice of the doc- 
tor, Charley had said nothing as to what had happened 
during his interview with the doctor and the high 
priest and his associates, except that he thought every- 
thing would go well to-morrow, and that they might 
expect the favor of the gods. Also that he was glad to 
say they had the favor of the high priest and Micona- 
reo, who were still their good friends. 

That afternoon the doctor, who had obtained from 
Charley a piece of paper from his writing-pad, taking 
an opportunity when no one was looking, slipped into 
his hand a little ball of paper, giving Charley a look 
that he understood to mean : 

310 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


Read it when no one is looking.” 

Charley did this, and read the following lines : 

Be sure you don’t eat anything to-night just before 
retiring.” 

Acting under this advice, when several luscious 
pineapples were brought into the room where Charley 
and his companions had been left in the keeping of the 
priests, just before they were all about to turn in for 
the night, Charley refrained from eating, and was not 
surprised that all the inmates of the room except him- 
self soon fell into a deep sleep. Shortly afterward, 
Miconareo came into the room and touching Charley 
on the shoulder beckoned him to follow him, when he 
led him again to his house at the far end of the pi-pi. 
Here, they completed their plans as to what should be 
done on the morrow. 

The great day of the trial, when the gods were to be 
entreated by the priests to tell in tones that might be 
heard by all, just what they wished should be done 
with the prisoners, had at last come. Like nearly all 
days in the tropics, the sky was almost entirely free 
from clouds, and a pleasant breeze came in from the 
ocean a few hours after sunrise. 

There were great preparations in the House of the 
Idols. The priests, attired in their best robes, had 
gathered around the different idols, each priest and his 
attendants standing in front of the particular idol to 
the service of which he had been appointed. Candle- 
nuts were burning and shedding their fitful blue light 
on the idols, as well as on the altars in front of them. 

311 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


The king and his warriors were given a place where 
they could see and hear all that was going on. In 
order to permit the people to enter the house and lay 
their gifts on the altars, a passageway was left be- 
tween the king and his warriors so that they could 
mount the steps of the pi-pi and thus enter the room. 

The screen or curtain of woven bamboo was rolled 
up to near the roof of the house, thus permitting the 
people who had gathered in front of the pi-pi to look 
into the House of the Idols and, indeed, to hear what 
was going on. 

At last the high priest gave notice that if there were 
no others who wished to lay their gifts to the gods 
on the altars, he would now begin to entreat the gods 
to tell what they wished to be done with the prisoners, 
cautioning the people to keep silent while this was being 
done. 

The high priest then began a long prayer to the gods, 
calling each in turn by name. He related just what had 
happened during the last few days concerning the three 
prisoners; he told about the battle on the mountain, 
and so described it that one might suppose it was a 
great victory over Mahinee. He explained the dif- 
ference of opinion that existed between the king and 
his warriors and some of the priests as to what should 
be done with the captives. He informed them that 
they had agreed to leave the decision of this question 
to the gods themselves ; that, moreover, these questions 
should be asked the gods by Miconareo, since the high 
priest himself would be required to keep his ear near 
312 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


the lips of the principal idol in order to hear what was 
said, and that the same thing should be done by each of 
the principal priests of the other idols. He told them 
he hoped the gods would speak in tones so loud that 
they could be heard not only by the priests themselves, 
but also by the people. Still, he added, no man could 
tell what it would please the gods to do. He entreated 
them, however, to answer in loud tones. The high 
priest then, placing his ear near the lips of the princi- 
pal idol, asked Miconareo to put the question. 

Miconareo then began a wonderful prayer to the 
different gods, in which he entreated them to answer 
the questions put to them. He said the king and priests 
wished to do whatever they wanted done; that he 
would, therefore, put the same question to each of 
them in regular order, first to the principal god and 
then to each of the others. 

Never before in the memory of the people had the 
priests asked the gods so to speak that they could be 
heard by all in the temple. Ordinarily, the priests only 
were supposed to hear. 

The silence of the people was so great that many of 
them could actually hear their hearts beating. Micona- 
reo then asked this question in a voice strong enough to 
be distinctly heard by all in the great assembly. 

“ Tell us, we implore thee, do you wish the prisoners 
to be left unharmed ? Tell us so that we can hear your 
command.” 

Then Charley, who had been placed by Miconareo 
with his face toward the idols so that none of the 

313 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


assembly could see the motion of his lips, gave the 
answer : 

Aa, Aa. Charleyo Mahinee taboo-taboo. Kooloo, 
taboo-taboo. Marbonna, taboo-taboo. Charleyo ta- 
boo-taboo. Aa, Aa.” 

Charley produced a greater effect on the great as- 
semblage of people than he had before the few priests 
on the preceding day. The words came with wonder- 
ful distinctness apparently from the lips of the idol that 
Miconareo was speaking to. 

The people were so excited that, despite the caution 
of Miconareo, they began to talk with one another, 
first in low tones that, however, rapidly became so loud 
that the high priest had again to warn them to keep 
silent. 

The same question was then put to each of the gods 
in succession, Miconareo each time indicating to 
Charley the exact position of the idol from which it 
was hoped the answer would come. 

Everything went on successfully. In each case the 
words apparently came directly from the lips of the 
idol spoken to and, moreover, Charley was able to 
cause each god to speak in a different tone of voice. 

When the intense excitement had slightly subsided, 
the high priest addressing the king and his warriors as 
well as the people, said: 

The gods have expressed their wishes. What will 
you do? Shall the gods be obeyed or not? Do you 
dare to question their commands ? ” 

As will be seen, the high priest put these questions to 

314 



He held the piece of glass between the sun 
and the wood which . . . hurst into 
dame ” 


315 



1 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


the king and his warriors in the form of a threat rather 
than a question. What had occurred had produced so 
strong an impression on all that there came from the 
king, the warriors, and the people a simultaneous shout 
that they would obey the wishes of the gods expressed 
in this so wonderful a manner. 

The high priest then again addressed the people, say- 
ing that he had received a communication from the 
gods instructing him to ask the young white priest, 
the “great taboo-taboo,’’ to show them how the gods 
had taught him so to bring down the sun from on high 
as instantly to kindle a fire in the huge pile of wood 
they saw had been collected in an open space before the 
pi-pi. 

There was again great excitement among the people. 
Some of them had heard from the warriors of the won- 
derful manner in which the white lad had done this on 
the day of his capture, but most all of them appeared to 
doubt whether it was possible for any one to perform so 
great a feat as to cause the sun to send down a part of 
his sacred body from the skies to kindle a fire on the 
earth for a mere mortal. 

Charley now approached the pile of wood and pre- 
tending to entreat the sun to help him do this great ^ 
piece of magic, he held the piece of glass between the 
sun and the wood which almost instantly burst into a 
vigorous flame. 

This feat appeared to be of such a wonderful 
character that the people were even more surprised 
than they were at the apparent answering of the gods. 

315 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


Indeed, the people seemed to draw back from the neigh- 
borhood of Charley as if they stood greatly in fear of 
him. 

The high priest again taking the opportunity, turned 
to the people and said : 

“ Have not our gods properly called the young white 
priest the ' Great taboo-taboo ’ ? Be careful, there- 
fore, how you even think of harming him. If you do 
this the gods will certainly greatly punish you.” 

Miconareo had arranged a number of additional 
pieces of magic for Charley should they be necessary, 
but what they had done proved so successful that he 
concluded to close the meeting with one additional 
piece of magic only. So, addressing the king, he said : 

“ O Arahu, ruler of our valley, the gods send this 
message to you. It is, that if the young white priest is 
willing to do so, that he will make a magic picture ap- 
pear on a sheet of white cloth as a present the gods send 
to you to show that they are your great friends.” 

When Arahu heard this he turned to Charley and 
asked him to make for him this magic picture, so that 
he might have it as a gift from the gods. 

Charley, who had been ^ warned by Miconareo that 
this would be asked of him, now began making a rapid 
sketch on a piece of paper with his lead pencil. The 
sketch represented the sun in the heavens sending down 
from above, a part of himself, thus kindling a fire in 
the pile of wood, while immediately underneath this 
he made another rapid sketch of the king in his war 
dress receiving the picture from Charley. 

316 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


This picture was done in so short a time and, more- 
over, was done so well that when the warriors crowded 
around the king after he had received it, they looked on 
Charley with increased horror. He must, indeed, be a 
great taboo if the gods would at his command cause so 
wonderful a picture to appear on the sheet of white 
paper. 

As for Arahu, turning to one of his warriors, he 
bade him untie the hands of Kooloo and Marbonna 
and, turning to the high priest, said : 

‘‘ Take them with you for service in the House of the 
Idols.^’ 


317 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


CHAPTER XXVI 

The Escape From the Western Valley 

It was a grand triumph for Miconareo when the terror 
of the king, at the powerful magic he had witnessed, 
led him in this public manner to order the unbinding 
of the hands of Kooloo and Marbonna, and give them 
with Charley over to the keeping of the priests for 
service in the House of the Idols. 

But Miconareo was not yet satisfied. He entered 
into a prolonged conversation with the high priest, in 
which, as Marbonna afterward informed Charley, he 
asked that Charley and his two companions be assigned 
to his house during such times as they were not needed 
for work in the House of the Idols. He had some 
difficulty in obtaining this permission of the high priest, 
but at last was successful, for the high priest, turning 
to Miconareo, said: 

“ I place in thy keeping these three people. Take 
them to thy house in order that my people come not 
near them and so be injured.’’ Then turning to the 
people he said : I declare Miconareo’s house to be ta- 
boo, and not only the house but all the ground around 
the house,” and then accompanied by Miconareo he 
placed rods in the ground at a considerable distance 
from the house, wrapping a piece of white tapa-cloth 
around them as signs of the taboo. 

318 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


Marbonna and Kooloo were greatly pleased at what 
had happened. At the same time, what Charley had 
done appeared to them to be of such a wonderful nature 
that they evidently stood in great fear of the lad. 

“ No one kill us now,” said Marbonna. “ Too great 
taboo.” 

‘‘ Yes,” said Kooloo, “ afraid Charleyo, great white 
priest. But Charleyo no hurt us, will he ? ” he in- 
quired, as if standing in great awe of him. 

“ I certainly will never hurt either you or Mar- 
bonna,” Charley replied. 

Kooloo turning to Miconareo, began thanking him 
for what he had done in saving their lives. 

‘‘ When the great Mahinee, my father, hears this he 
will be your friend. Not only because you save Koo- 
loo’s life, but also because you save Charleyo, his half- 
son, and Marbonna, his interpreter.” 

‘‘ I may ask you to remember that some time soon,” 
said Miconareo to Kooloo. 

The first opportunity Miconareo had of speaking pri- 
vately to Charley he said : 

I think it best not to let either Kooloo or Marbonna 
know that I can speak English, or that I am thinking 
of trying to escape with you. It will be safer not to 
let them know anything about me, at least until we have 
escaped from the valley. I will pretend that I am going 
with you to the cave in order to help carry food. But 
I must leave you now,” he said, there is much to be 
done to make arrangements for to-night, and especially 
to find where the king has placed sentinels on the road 

319 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


leading to the top of the mountain ; for I think it almost 
certain he will place men to watch Mahinee’s valley 
in order to give notice when he begins marching 
against us.” 

Several hours afterward when Miconareo returned, 
he said to Charley : 

I have learned from spies sent to Mahinee’s val- 
ley that the great warrior, who has been absent on a 
visit to a neighboring island, has returned sooner than 
expected, owing to word having been sent him by boat 
that a fight had occurred at the head of his valley with 
the people of the Western Valley, and that his son 
Kooloo, Charleyo, and Marbonna had been taken cap- 
tives; that Mahinee had immediately started for his 
valley whence he intends marching with all his war- 
riors to release the Captives if they are not already killed 
and eaten, and at any rate to punish Arahu severely. 
The spies declare that he will leave his valley about one 
day from now. He declares that if any of the captives 
have been killed he will bring a severe punishment on 
the people of the Western Valley. 

‘‘ Arahu is in great alarm,” continued Miconareo. 

He knows Mahinee can bring a great army against 
him, and has, therefore, determined to retreat with all 
his warriors to a deep ravine near the lower part of his 
valley, where he hopes to escape. He has given orders 
to the high priest to come with all his priests and the 
three captives early to-morrow. We must, therefore, 
escape to-night.” 

Miconareo now told Marbonna and Kooloo about 
320 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


his plans for endeavoring to escape early that night; 
that Charleyo had told him about the lava cave; that 
they would, therefore, try to reach the place and wait 
there until the coming of the great Mahinee ; that Char- 
leyo had also told him there was plenty of water in the 
cave, so it would only be necessary to take enough 
food with them to last several days; that he, Micona- 
reo, was willing to take the risk of helping them by 
carrying this food as well as to show them the way out 
of the valley by a secret path known only to a few. 

Marbonna and Kooloo listened attentively to what 
was said, when the former remarked : 

Warriors are watching the head of the valley to tell 
king when Mahinee and his warriors come. How we 
get past them? ” 

Miconareo then explained that he knew this was 
difficult, but they would have to take risks. He then 
told them about a path leading from his house to the 
plateau, or high plain, separating the two valleys. That 
their greatest danger would begin when they reached 
this plateau, since Arahu would of course have war- 
riors stationed on the edge nearest Mahinee’s valley to 
watch what was going on there. 

They were now ready to begin their dangerous at- 
tempt to escape. Miconareo explained that if any at- 
tempt was made to capture them they would be obliged 
to fight for their lives. If they were caught in the act 
of escaping, he was sure Arahu and his warriors would 
have them killed and eaten ; that not even the influence 
of the high priest and himself could stop this. He 
V 321 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


then explained that besides carrying food they must 
take spears and clubs with them, so that, if necessary, 
they could fight for their lives. 

It was an anxious day for the little party waiting 
for the coming of the time they had fixed for leaving. 
Miconareo gathered together such food as could readily 
be carried in small bulk and, in order to make their es- 
cape the safer, he again drugged the food eaten by 
the priests. 

“ I have given them nothing that will injure them,” 
he explained to Charley. “ It would not do for them 
to see us escape ; for, if they should catch us, they would 
be obliged to give us up to the king and the warriors. 
Indeed, I think we are doing them a kindness in putting 
them to sleep so that they may not see us.” 

There would be no moon that night till long past 
midnight Shortly after sunset, leaving his house at 
the western end of the pi-pi, Miconareo led his party 
quietly toward one of the streams of water that came 
down from the side of the valley situated next to Mahi- 
nee’s valley. Here he led them up a path which ex- 
tended along the side of the stream. 

At first the ascent was easy. But the slope soon in- 
creased in steepness until at last it was necessary to 
climb rather than walk. Indeed, in many places the 
path was so steep that it was necessary to pass the food 
they were cariydng to Miconareo who, knowing the 
road so well, went ahead and waited in the difficult 
places to take what they were carrying, until by hard 
climbing they reached his side. Though the distance 
322 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


was short, they were more than half an hour in gaining 
the plateau or level plain that separated the Eastern 
and the Western Valleys. 

Fearing they might be seen by scouts and war- 
riors from the upper part of the valley, they did not 
dare to walk erect, but crawled along the surface of the 
open ground on hands and feet. This of course made 
their progress slow. After having gone in this way for 
several miles, Marbonna and Miconareo, who had gone 
on before the two boys, suddenly stopped. A short 
distance ahead of them they had seen a huge warrior 
standing erect with a spear in his hand in the act of 
throwing it at them. 

Without any hesitation both Marbonna and Micona- 
reo ran toward the warrior. Marbonna was ahead. 
Quickly stepping aside he managed to escape the spear 
which the man did not throw until he was at a distance 
of only twenty feet. Rushing at the man he killed him 
by a savage blow on the head with his war-club. The 
spy had been stationed on the edge of the plateau imme- 
diately overlooking Mahinee’s valley. Marbonna's 
blow had not only knocked him off his feet, but pre- 
cipitated him down into the valley below. Fortunately, 
there had been no noise save that caused by the spear 
striking the ground back of Marbonna and the crashing 
of the body as it fell from point to point on the side of 
the precipitous cliffs. 

Marbonna grinned with great delight when he saw 
his enemy disappear over the edge of the precipice. 
Turning to Miconareo, he said: 

323 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


“ Marbonna old man but heap good warrior yet.” 

On a motion from Miconareo they all fell at once to 
the ground. He feared the fighting might have been ob- 
served by some of the other spies, so they remained on 
the ground for half an hour when, nothing being heard, 
they again moved slowly, and at last went forward 
again at a rapid gait for nearly six hours continuously, 
until at last, near dawn, they reached the lower slopes 
of the western volcanic cone that were inclined toward 
the river that flowed down into the valley from which 
they were escaping. 

They were now in the most dangerous part of their 
path. There was nothing on the lower slopes of the 
mountain that would afford them a chance for hiding. 
At this place they were almost certain that sentinels 
had been placed; for from it an excellent view could 
be had of both valleys. 

As Marbonna and Miconareo afterward explained, 
the reason they had not already been seen by the spies 
was that the edge of the plateau over which they had 
come could not be readily seen from this part, but now 
they would be in clear view. Moreover, since this place 
was the point over which Mahinee’s men would be- 
obliged to pass to reach the Western Valley, a greater 
number of men would of course be posted there. As if 
to render their position more dangerous, the moon, 
which for the last hour had fortunately been hidden 
back of a dark cloud, began to shine through its thin 
edges. They were now in an exceedingly dangerous 
position. Their safety consisted in reaching the lava 

324 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


cave, but in order to do this they had to pass in full 
view of the upper parts of the Western Valley. 

‘‘ There is nothing to be done,” said Miconareo, 
but to crawl as rapidly as possible without being seen. 
We may succeed in getting somewhat nearer the east- 
ern slope of the mountain that faces Mahinee’s valley.” 

By this time the moon had emerged completely from 
the cloud, lighting up the valley almost as brightly as 
does the sun in the early hours of the morning. Any 
motion on their part could not fail to be seen by the 
sentinels on the slope of the opposite mountain. Mi- 
conareo again made a sign to his companions, and they 
lay quietly on the surface of the earth, keeping as still 
as possible, for they could see another cloud slowly ap- 
proaching the moon. 

It was not unlike the case of the watched kettle that 
never boils. This, however, of course is only another 
way of saying that when one is waiting for a certain 
event to happen it often seems as if a few moments 
stretch themselves out indefinitely. It certainly was 
in the case of these four, who were watching the motion 
of the cloud as it came with majestic slowness to throw 
its protecting shadow on the short strip of dangerous 
land lying between them and the place they wished to 
reach. 

At last, however, the cloud intercepted the light of 
the moon, and darkness again fell on the part of the 
path which they wished to traverse. 

This is our chance ; let’s make a run for it,” said 
Miconareo ; and so they all started. 

325 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


This time they succeeded in reaching a place where 
Charley said the entrance to the cave was only a few 
hundred feet distant. Miconareo, turning to Mar- 
bonna, said to him : 

Ask Chari eyo if he is sure he can find the entrance 
to the cave without any delay.” 

When the question was put, Charley looked at Mi- 
conareo with a smiling face, but gave the answer to 
Marbonna. It seemed odd to him that Miconareo, who 
could speak such excellent English, should pretend that 
he only knew the Polynesian language. 

“ Tell Miconareo,” he said, that Charleyo can see 
from here the entrance. There it is,” he said, pointing 
to a certain part of a lava field near the foot of the 
ash-cone.” 

Kooloo, who looked in this direction, turned to 
Charley and said: 

Kooloo can see no cave. Is Charleyo certain a 
cave is there ? ” 

Yes,” was the reply, Charleyo is certain.” 

Then,” said Miconareo, who all this time had been 
looking back in the direction from which they had 
come, ‘‘ let us make a run for it,” He was so excited 
that he said “ let us make a run for it ” in pure English ; 
but then, as if remembering himself, he added in Poly- 
nesian : “ Look back of you and you will see why.” On 
doing this they saw, less than a quarter of a mile from 
where they then were, a number of savages running 
rapidly toward them. 

It is true there were only six men pursuing them. 

326 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


They might have easily made a stand against them, 
and possibly have succeeded in routing them. But Mar- 
bonna and Miconareo were too shrewd to take such 
chances. They knew that in such an engagement some 
of their party would probably be killed. But they knew 
especially that the noise of the conflict would in a short 
time bring against them a large number of the scouts 
who, they were sure, were watching in this part of the 
valley. They therefore wisely concluded to take Mi- 
conareo’s advice and make a run for it. So all rapidly 
followed Charley who, knowing the exact position of 
the cave, led the way. They had better reasons for 
breaking records than most athletes have, for here their 
lives were the prizes they were striving to win. 

On reaching the lava cave, Charley pointed out the 
entrance to Kooloo and motioned him to enter, and 
then waited on the outside until Marbonna and Micona- 
reo were also inside, when he himself entered, just in 
time to disappear before the pursuing warriors came 
around the side of the cone that hid them from view. 

As the pursuers looked ahead, confident that the 
parties they were seeking could only be a short distance 
ahead, they saw with surprise that they had mys- 
teriously disappeared. It seemed as if they had 
been suddenly swallowed up by the earth, for they 
could see nothing that offered a place for hiding. At 
last in astonishment they stopped almost directly over 
the mouth of the cave, so that the fugitives could hear 
what they were excitedly saying to one another. 

It must be remembered that none of the savages 

327 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


knew the captives had escaped from the care of the 
priests. They were evidently telling one another that 
they distinctly recognized those they were pursuing. 

They were the taboo-taboo captives,” said one. 

Yes,” said another, “ two of them were men. 
Miconareo and Marbonna.” 

And two were boys,” said another. “ I saw the 
great young white priest.” 

^‘Then,” said the fifth man, “ they have escaped from 
the priests, and the great white priest has caused them 
to disappear by his magic.” 

This last explanation appeared satisfactory to them; 
for they exclaimed almost in concert: 

Yes, the young white priest, the great taboo-taboo, 
has taken them into the earth. Better leave this place 
lest he send spirits after us to punish us for attempting 
to catch him,” and with this they could hear the men 
running from the opening. 

Soon, however, they could be heard coming back; 
this time accompanied by ten or twelve additional men. 
Their fears decreasing with this addition to their num- 
bers, they were heard laying plans for making a more 
careful search in the neighborhood to see if, after all, 
the disappearance of the fugitives could not be shown 
to be due to their having discovered some place in 
which they could hide. 

It was near daybreak. The sun would soon be 
seen rising above the eastern horizon. Was that day 
to be their last? This question forced itself into the 
minds of all. 


328 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


CHAPTER XXVII 

Boat Number Twenty-three Reaches Mahinee's 
Island 

Let us now return to boat No. 23 with Captain Hard- 
ing, Jack, Hiram, and Waheatoua, accompanied by 
Kapiau in his canoe, as they were rapidly moving to- 
ward Mahinee’s island. Although there were two at 
the oars in boat No. 23, and only one in Kapiau’s 
canoe, the latter had no difficulty in keeping up. 
Of course this was not entirely due to the skill of 
Kapiau, but to the fact that he was in a canoe that 
could naturally go faster than a boat. Indeed, Kapiau 
had so little trouble in following them that he re- 
mained alongside the boat, keeping up a constant talk 
with Waheatoua concerning what had occurred during 
his enforced stay on the small island. The nature of 
this conversation clearly showed that the supposed dif- 
ferences between the highly civilized and the savage 
races are not so marked as some believe. The conver- 
sation did not appear to be limited to the important 
facts that Waheatoua should know, but consisted rather 
of gossip concerning things that some of Waheatoua^s 
acquaintances had been doing. 

Nothing of interest occurred on this journey until 
toward the afternoon of the second day out, when Wa- 

329 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


heatoua and Kapiau, suddenly stopping their flow of 
gossip, pointed in great alarm to the sky in the west 
Hury, hury, tia mona” exclaimed Waheatoua. 

Looking in the direction indicated by him, they saw 
a dark cloud, of an inverted conical shape, rapidly ap- 
proaching. While they watched it a column of water 
appeared to rise in the ocean immediately underneath, 
and joining the cloud, advanced with it in the shape of 
a cylindrical column thinner at the middle than at its 
ends. 

It is a waterspout,” exclaimed the captain. 

‘‘ It be,” said Hiram; and while I wouldn’t mind it 
ef this boat wuz a strong wessel, yet sence it only be a 
boat, I reckon there’d be little left of it arter thet thing 
struck it.” 

As for Waheatoua and Kapiau the approach of the 
dreaded spout awoke such fears that, abandoning them- 
selves to despair, they threw themselves down in the 
boats as if it were hopeless to endeavor to escape the 
coming death. 

It is not surprising that the poor savages stood in 
mortal dread of the approaching waterspout. It might 
be supposed, with the great power Kapiau had over his 
canoe, that he might easily escape the devouring col- 
umn that he believed had been sent against him by some 
of the many dreaded evil spirits he had perhaps un- 
consciously angered. Indeed, it was more than proba- 
ble that Kapiau might have escaped owing to the speed 
with which he could move his canoe through the 
water. It must not be forgotten, however, that al- 

330 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


though the actual area covered by the spout was com- 
paratively small, yet for considerable distances around 
it the wind rushed in with such velocity that an open 
boat would probably be wrecked long before it could 
be moved out of its influence. 

The differences between the white and the brown 
race here manifested themselves. Instead of yielding 
to what looked like certain death, the captain, turning 
to Hiram, said : 

Load the bronze cannon, Hiram, with balls. We 
might possibly be able to break the spout by sending a 
ball through it.’' 

I reckon ye’re right, cap’n,” said Hiram, pleased 
to get an opportunity for firing off his beloved gun. 
‘‘ She beant so big a gun,” he exclaimed, but I’ll load 
her up to the muzzle with powder and ball and see what 
she kin do.” 

Will that break the spout, captain? ” inquired Jack, 
while Hiram was loading the cannon. 

I am not certain,” was the reply. There is con- 
siderable difference of opinion about this matter. Al- 
though this spout is not very large, and might not 
be dangerous for a large vessel, it would certainly 
swamp our boat. We will, therefore, try the experi- 
ment. I don’t think that in many of the cases in which 
it has been alleged that the firing of a cannon-ball has 
broken a waterspout, the result has been gained so 
much by the passage of the ball through the column as 
by the disturbance of the air caused by the explosion of 
the powder.” 


331 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


The dread of the two savages was great, but their 
curiosity to see the magic of the white men was greater, 
so when Waheatoua inquired of Jack what the great 
white captain was doing, Jack said: 

“ White man’s magic. The captain will kill the evil 
spirit who is bringing that column of water toward us.” 

When Waheatoua received this astonishing intelli- 
gence, he raised himself from the bottom of the boat, 
and calling to his friend Kapiau, told him to look at the 
magic of the white man. 

Meanwhile, Hiram had put a greater charge in the 
bronze cannon than it had probably ever before re- 
ceived. It was loaded fully one-half of its length 
with powder, and the other half with two balls tightly 
rammed into place by a packing of cloth. 

The waterspout was heading directly for the boat 
and the canoe with a hoarse hollow sound, due to the 
roaring of the wind as it blew from all sides toward 
the whirling mass. Heavy billows rushed in all direc- 
tions toward the moving column of water, and dashing 
against one another covered the surface of the ocean 
with foam. The frail boats were tossed to and fro, and 
were beginning occasionally to take in water. As the 
threatening spout approached nearer, the captain cried : 

Now, Hiram, send both balls through the middle 
of the column.” 

Hiram fired the gun, and an almost blinding flash 
like lightning was seen, and a roar like thunder was 
heard. The boat was shaken by the force of the ex- 
plosion, and the balls, scattering, pierced the center 

332 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


of the waterspout at some little distance apart. The 
column was broken and water fell from the cloud in 
such quantities in both boats that they were obliged 
to work hard in bailing them out. 

“ Heap big white priests,” cried Waheatoua. “ Kill 
spirit of huri, huri. Waheatoua no longer afraid of 
huri, huri. Great white priests kill evil spirit that 
brings it.” 

Jack, who had been aiding the captain in bailing out 
boat No. 23, exclaimed : 

Why, captain, the water is fresh. The waterspout 
therefore cannot be formed of a column of salt water 
drawn up from the ocean, as I have read in some 
books.” 

No,” said the captain, it is due almost entirely to 
water drawn down from the clouds above. Indeed, it 
is no longer believed that the column of a waterspout 
consists wholly of water. Probably a large portion 
consists of cloud.” 

Nothing else of interest occurred, and after several 
days they could see several large islands in the distance. 
As before related when describing the approach of Ma- 
hinee’s war canoes, they noted that all these islands 
were characterized by high mountains that came down 
abruptly to the ocean and had but narrow strips of 
shore land that were almost destitute of coral forma- 
tion. 

The appearance of each island was followed by a 
long conversation between Waheatoua and Kapiau. 
At the same time the captain obtained no little informa- 
333 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


tion concerning the names of the distant islands, the 
character of their people, and the names of their kings 
or chiefs. 

Kapiau now began talking earnestly to Waheatoua 
about something he wished to ask the white men. After 
a long conversation, Waheatoua turned to the captain 
and said : 

“ Kapiau say we better go to Mahinee’s island first. 
If we go to other islands the people would follow us to 
Mahinee’s island. The people want to see the white 
boys they hear so much about, and maybe Mahinee 
would not like so many people coming to his island.” 

‘‘What do you think, Waheatoua?” inquired the 
captain. 

“ Waheatoua say go to Mahinee’s island first. If 
we go to other islands, maybe chiefs want you stay 
longer with them, and expect you to give heap presents. 
Better keep presents for Mahinee and his people.” 

“ Cap’n,” said Hiram grinning, when he heard what 
Waheatoua said, “ thet’s good advice they be giving ye; 
don’t ye think so? ” 

“ I do, Hiram,” replied the captain. “ We will not 
only go to Mahinee’s island first, but we will take a 
route which will as far as possible prevent the people 
from the other islands from seeing us.” 

At last Mahinee’s island came in sight as a dim 
speck on the northeast horizon. Waheatoua, pointing 
it out, said in an exulting tone: 

“ Mahinee’s island there. Now we get there without 
any one seeing us.” 


334 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


It was now near the close of the day. They were still 
five or six hours from the island, so they determined to 
row slowly and make no attempt to reach it before sun- 
rise the next day. 

No hurry,” said Waheatoua. Reach island to- 
morrow when sun there,” he continued, pointing to the 
eastern horizon. “ Must climb to the edge of Mahinee’s 
valley. Hard climb. Heap hard reaching valley. Need 
plenty light.” 

The sun was rising next day when they brought their 
boat and canoe to the same landing-place where Mahi- 
nee had taken his war canoes with Charley and Harold. 
They were soon surrounded by a number of people 
from Mahinee’s valley who had come in order to fish. 
These people running up to Waheatoua and Kapiau 
eagerly inquired who the strangers were. When they 
learned that they were coming to see the two white 
boys an excited conversation was at once set up be- 
tween them that lasted for about five minutes. The 
captain, seeing that these people had brought informa- 
tion that had astounded Waheatoua and Kapiau, at 
last succeeded in getting Waheatoua to tell him what 
had happened. 

Heap bad news,” was the reply. Warriors from 
another valley had fight with Mahinee’s men and have 
carried away captives young white priest, Charleyo 
Mahinee, Kooloo, the son of Mahinee, and Mahinee’s 
interpreter, Marbonna.” 

‘‘ What happened to Harealdo Mahinee ? ” anxiously 
inquired the captain through Waheatoua. 

335 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


“ Other boy escape,” was the reply. “ Now safe in 
Mahinee's valley.” 

“ Do you think the prisoners in much danger? ” in- 
quired the captain. 

“ Yes,” was the frank reply. Arahu very bad 
man. Cannibal. Great enemy of Mahinee, because^ 
Mahinee fight many times with his warriors and every 
time makes them run away. Waheatoua thinks Arahu 
will kill and eat captives.” 

‘‘ When did the attack and capture happen ? ” anx- 
iously asked the captain. 

A very unsatisfactory answer came. The two boys 
were carried off several days ago. 

Has not Mahinee already assembled his warriors 
and marched against the king, either to try to release 
the boys or avenge them? ” 

Mahinee away with boats and warriors,” was the 
reply. Only came back last night. Will march to- 
day with his warriors. Getting them all together. 
Many warriors. Mahinee heap angry; say this time 
he kill Arahu and most of his warriors, and give val- 
ley to his son Kooloo if he not killed and eaten.” 

Then,” said the captain to Waheatoua, let us 
hurry to Mahinee’s valley, see the great chief, and offer 
to march with him against his enemies.” 

“ Heap good advice,” said Waheatoua. Think 
Mahinee pleased to see white men. Will white men 
bring make-thunder with them ? ” he inquired, pointing 
to the bronze cannon. 

“ Yes,” was the reply, we’ll take it with us.” 

336 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


While this conversation was going on, the captain 
had arranged that Kapiau should remain to take care 
of the boat. So, starting off, they commenced to climb 
the path leading up to the top of the plateau that 
formed one of the boundaries of the valley. 

As soon as the boat had touched the land, Rompey, 
who had exhibited great excitement, jumped on shore 
and began running around as if endeavoring to find 
some traces of the scent of his young masters. Of 
course he was unsuccessful, because so long a time had 
elapsed since they had landed. As soon, however, as 
they reached the path leading to the brow of the preci- 
pices, Rompey’s excitement increased. He began run- 
ning from one part of the path to another as if he were 
looking for something, and at last when Waheatoua 
led the way, a short distance up the path, Rompey, 
running eagerly ahead from place to place, began bark- 
ing, until at last discovering the crevice of the rock 
where Harold had hid the handkerchief, extracted it 
with his teeth and brought it to the captain, as if to 
say: 

‘‘ Is not this something you have seen before ? ” 

“ It’s Harold’s handkerchief,” exclaimed the captain. 

See,” he said, taking it from the dog, the lad has 
probably stuck it in this crevice in order to attract our 
attention. Good dog, Rompey,” he said, patting the 
dog’s head. 

Waheatoua grinned and said : 

Great dog. Glad he come. Will help find the 
boys in other valley if Mahinee can’t get them.” 
w 337 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


Hurrying along after Waheatoua, the party were at 
last standing on the top of the valley looking down 
into Mahinee’s valley. Like Charley and Harold they 
looked with amazement at the wonderful fertility of the 
place, spread in all its tropical beauty before them. So 
when the captain asked Waheatoua to show them the 
path by which they could reach the valley, he led the 
way. 

Meanwhile, Rompey had again disappeared, and 
hearing him barking excitedly. Jack said : 

‘‘ Rompey has found something else that pleases him, 
captain. You hear that glad bark? ” 

Hurrying forward, they found Rompey standing in 
front of the tree on the white bark of which Charley 
had drawn with his pencil a suggestive picture of 
five war canoes with crude representations of twelve 
men in four of the canoes, and twenty-four men in a 
larger canoe. Jack, who was the first to understand 
the meaning of the drawing, exclaimed : 

‘‘ See, captain, this drawing has been left here by 
Charley. There are the four small canoes and there is 
the larger canoe.” 

‘‘ Yes,” said the captain, who had been following 
him; ‘‘and underneath. Jack, you will see Charley’s 
initials, C. Y. P.” 

“ And here,” said Hiram grinning, “ ye see an ar- 
row that the lad hez left, as much ez to say this is the 
way we went down.” 

“ Waheatoua,” inquired the captain, “ does that ar- 
row point in the right direction of the path.” 

338 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


“ Arrow right,” said Waheatoua grinning. ‘‘ Young 
white lad heap great. Leaves something Waheatoua 
understands. Carried away in five canoes. Goes down 
in the valley that way,” pointing to the arrow. “ But 
one thing Waheatoua no understand. What this? ” he 
inquired, pointing to the initials. 

‘‘ That is the young white priest’s name,” said the 
captain. 

Young white lad heap great,” exclaimed Wahea- 
toua, with increasing admiration. 

“ You will think he’s great, Waheatoua, if we are 
so fortunate as to find him alive,” exclaimed Jack. 

“ Thar’s no brighter lad to be found on this bloom- 
ing island,” said Hiram. ‘‘ See if ye don’t agree with 
me when we find him.” 

They now began the descent on the side of the 
stream that ran through the deep ravine and formed 
one of the tributaries of the river. It was as much as 
they could do to get down safely without attempting to 
carry the cannon with them; but when Waheatoua told 
the natives who accompanied them the wonderful 
things the cannon could do, and how the white men had 
killed or destroyed the spirit that brought the water- 
spout, after being assured that there was no taboo 
about it, they aided in getting it down safely to the 
lower part of the valley. 

Long before they reached it, however, Rompey dis- 
appeared, and shortly afterward they saw him running 
eagerly down the valley toward that part in which the 
house of the great Mahinee was situated. 

339 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


But let us now go back to Harold. As already 
stated, after the boy had seen Charley and Marbonna 
carried away captives, he had run rapidly down the 
valley and had reached Mahinee’s warriors who were 
in full retreat. As he came running up to the warriors 
they rejoiced that one of the lads was saved and, 
crowding around him, eagerly asked questions as to 
what had happened to the others. 

Like Charley, Harold could now understand the lan- 
guage of the people of the valley fairly well. He told 
them what had happened, and urged them to go back 
with him and endeavor to rescue Charley, Kooloo, and 
Marbonna. After a long and excited conversation, 
much of which he was unable to understand, he learned 
that the warriors of the Western Valley so greatly 
outnumbered them that they thought it better to go 
direct to Mahinee, who would of course get all his 
warriors together and at once march against the 
enemy. 

This advice was so sensible that Harold could say 
nothing against it. So he joined the men and was 
soon going with them to Mahinee’s house. 

On reaching the lower part of the valley they were 
met by crowds of people running toward them. They 
had seen that there had been an engagement, but did 
not know the details. When they learned that Arahu’s 
warriors had taken Charleyo, Kooloo, and Marbonna 
captives, and had killed two of their warriors, there 
were great lamentations. 

“ Let us tell Mahinee,” cried Harold. 

340 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


'' Mahinee no here/' said the people. He go in war 
canoe to another island." 

'' When will he come back? " cried Harold. 

Maybe one week, maybe to-morrow," was the 
reply. 

Asking to see the chief whom Mahinee had placed in 
command of the valley during his absence, Harold in- 
quired eagerly as to whether something could not be 
done toward rescuing the prisoners. Without any hesi- 
tation the chief gave orders for all the fighting men of 
the valley to get ready, so that when ordered they could 
march immediately against the enemy. 

If Mahinee come not by to-morrow," said the chief, 
“ we march against Arahu." 

Fortunately, Mahinee returned much sooner than 
had been expected. It appears that he was visiting at a 
near island. Word having been sent by boat as soon 
as they knew of the capture of Kooloo and the others, 
Mahinee immediately returned with the warriors he 
had taken with him, and had marched directly to his 
house in the valley. 

He eagerly inquired of Harold about all that had 
happened. Praising his chief for what he had done 
in calling all the fighting men under arms, he gave 
immediate orders for the assembling of his warriors. 

The first opportunity Harold got he asked Mahinee 
if he thought it probable that the people of the Western 
Valley would kill and eat the prisoners. 

Mahinee not know," was the answer. Mahinee 
hope that Charleyo, the wonderful white priest, will 

341 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


show them some magic and frighten them. But Arahu 
very bad. May kill and eat them.” 

Getting together a large army of warriors took some 
time, so it was several hours after Mahinee’s arrival 
before he was ready to start. It was then shortly after 
sunrise. He might hardly, even by a forced march, 
reach the head of the valley until near sunrise. Since 
there would be no moon until after midnight, Mahi- 
nee hoped that he would be able to be well on his way 
before the enemy knew he was coming. As they were 
about to start, noises were heard from the part of the 
valley that is entered from the ocean, and in a short 
time a number of their people were seen running to- 
ward Mahinee. Before they reached him, however, 
Harold heard the barking of a dog that he at once 
recognized as Rompey. 

That is my dog,” he said, speaking excitedly to 
Mahinee. ** It means that my people have come here 
to see me. They are great fighting men, and I am sure 
will be glad to march with the great Mahinee against 
the people of the Western Valley.” 

Mahinee glad to have their help,” said the chief. 

The dog was seen rapidly approaching, and in a 
short time Rompey reached his young master, jumped 
up and resting his paws on his shoulders began licking 
his face, and by the shakings of his tail and peculiar 
noises clearly showed how delighted he was to see his 
young master again. 

The actions of the dog greatly pleased the savages, 
especially Mahinee. 


342 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


Great dog,” said Mahinee to Harold. Loves 
you much. Does he also love Charleyo ? ” 

'' Yes,” was the reply. “ Quite as much, if not more, 
than he loves me.” 

What name you call dog? ” asked Mahinee. 

His name is Rompey,” was the reply. 

But here again the nearest Mahinee and his warriors 
could come to the name of the dog was Rompeyo. 

'‘If Rompeyo loves Charleyo then we take him with 
us to find Charleyo, Kooloo, and Marbonna,” said 
Mahinee. Then turning to Harold, he inquired : " Who 
you think perhaps Rompeyo come with ? ” 

" With two men and another boy,” replied Harold. 
" The men are Captain Harding and Hiram Higgen- 
botham; the boy is named Jack.” 

"Good fighters?” inquired Mahinee anxiously. 

" Splendid fighters,” replied Harold. " Have great 
make-thunder with them. Kill enemies quick.” 

" Then Mahinee hopes the white people will fight 
with him.” And saying something to some of his men 
they soon left him, running rapidly in the direction 
from which Rompey had come. 

In a short time Captain Harding, Hiram, and Jack, 
together with Waheatoua, were seen approaching at a 
rapid gait. 

When they reached Mahinee, the captain said to Wa- 
heatoua : 

" Say to the great Mahinee that we have come in 
peace. We have heard that he is about to march against 
his enemies who have taken his son Kooloo prisoner, 
343 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


and who have also taken prisoner the boy Charleyo, 
whom we love as greatly as Mahinee does his son. If 
the great Mahinee will permit us, we will march with 
him against his enemies. Will Mahinee let the white 
men fight with him? ” 

“ Where do you come from? ’’ inquired Mahinee. 

‘‘ From an island many days’ journey to the south- 
west,” said the captain through Waheatoua. 

Mahinee, who evidently wanted to know more about 
the captain, now went into a long conversation with 
Waheatoua, but it was soon evident that Waheatoua 
gave Mahinee a glowing description of what he called 
the great white-man priest, explaining, as he did, not 
only to the astonishment of Mahinee, but to his war- 
riors as well, the wonderful manner he had by means 
of a big make-thunder, pointing to the bronze cannon, 
driven away the evil spirits of the huri, huri. 

These statements were carefully listened to by Mahi- 
nee. The captain, however, wishing to convince him 
the more certainly that they were to be trusted, now 
showed him the dagger that Otoa had given to him, 
requesting Waheatoua to tell Mahinee that Otoa was^' 
a great friend of the white man. 

When Mahinee recognized the dagger he was greatly 
pleased, and said to the captain : 

Mahinee glad to have the white men march with 
him against his enemies. We go now,” continued 
Mahinee; and then pointing to the brass cannon that 
Hiram was standing near, he said : “ Bring big make- 
_ thunder along to fight against Mahinee’s enemies.” 

344 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


While this conversation was going on, poor Rompey, 
who had almost devoured Harold with his demonstra- 
tions of joy, would every now and then look into his 
face and make a joyous howl, as if he wished to show 
how pleased he was to meet him. 

As for Jack, the captain, and Hiram, they could 
hardly wait until the important conversation with 
Mahinee had been completed to show how delighted 
they were at seeing Harold again; for Harold fairly 
hurled himself into the arms of the captain and com- 
menced hugging him, and then would leave the cap- 
tain and go through similar huggings with Jack and 
Hiram, and then would go back again to the captain. 

Instead of being jealous that the lad should be so 
pleased to see his friends again, the great chief him- 
self rejoiced and, looking at Harold, said : 

Is Harealdo Mahinee glad to see his friends ? That 
makes Mahinee glad too.’' 

At last the expedition started off at a rapid pace to- 
ward the head of the valley. Mahinee’s picked com- 
pany of warriors led the way, followed by the captain 
and his friends, and they in their turn followed by 
many companies of warriors that Mahinee was lead- 
ing against his enemies; for this time he was putting 
forth a final effort. He hoped that never again would 
there be any necessity for another fight. 


345 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


CHAPTER XXVIII 

■ The Fight at the Lava Cave 

When^ as already related in a previous chapter, the 
savages were running toward them, and Miconareo 
cried to his companions, ‘‘ Let us make a run for it,” 
speaking in English, Kooloo and Marbonna looked at 
each other in surprise. They were then unable to say 
anything, for they had a hard run ahead of them, and 
even after they reached the lava cave, they could not 
speak anything on account of the neighborhood of 
the savages. When, however, the savages, unable to 
find any traces of the fugitives, had gone to another 
part of the mountain to look for them, and they could 
talk freely, they began asking Miconareo in an excited 
manner how it was that he, who could speak both their 
own language as well as Charley’s language, had al- 
ways asked Marbonna to tell Charley what he wished 
to say to him. Miconareo smiled when this question 
was put to him, and answered in Polynesian that he 
had good reasons for doing as he had, which he would 
explain in due time ; but just now they all had as much 
as they could attend to in looking after themselves. 

For now,” he continued, we have a severe battle 
ahead of us, and we must plan how best to fight it.” 

The doctor remained silent for a few moments, as if 
forming plans. Then, turning to Charley, he said ; 

346 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


What do you know about this cave ? We must pick 
out the best place for the fight I feel sure is coming.” 

I have never examined it, doctor,” said Charley. 
‘‘ Suppose we go through it now together? ” 

The particular cave in which they had sought refuge 
had been formed by a great lava stream flowing down 
the side of the mountain. Hardening on the outside, 
the liquid lava had continued to flow in the interior and, 
on the stopping of the flow from above, had almost 
completely emptied itself, thus leaving a long tunnel. In 
lava caves of this character the escaping lava generally 
breaks its way through the lower end of the tunnel, 
continuing to flow down the side of the mountain in 
the shape of the well-known lava fields or streams. In 
this particular case, however, the lower part of the 
tunnel-shaped mass had hardened, and the lava stream 
backing up had exerted a pressure against the sides, 
near the end, sufficiently great to break them, and had 
emptied itself at a number of points through these 
cracks. It so chanced that the principal of these side 
streams, through which so much of the molten rock 
had escaped, becoming mixed with water, had blown 
immense bubbles that, communicating with one 
another, produced a series of bubble caves through 
which one might have considerable difficulty in finding 
his way owing to the very irregular shapes the walls 
had taken during the blowing process. 

Charley and Doctor Parsons walked hurriedly 
through the tunnel portion of the cave for over five 
hundred feet down the side of the mountain. They 
347 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


had no difficulty in breathing the air of the cave, nor 
in finding their way, as soon as their eyes became ac- 
customed to the darkness. The roof of the cave had 
been cracked in several places, letting in an abundance 
of air together with small quantities of light. Reaching 
the end of the tunnel and finding it closed, they slowly 
retraced their steps toward the main opening, but be- 
fore they had gone very far found several places where 
bubble caves had been formed. One of the largest of 
these communicated with the main or tunnel cave by 
means of a fissure that was only wide enough to admit 
the passage of a single man, and which could only be 
entered by stooping. The sides of this passage, where 
it entered the bubble-cave, afforded a place where two 
could stand and deal deadly blows, and at the same 
time be shielded from the blows of their enemies. 

Here,’' said Doctor Parsons, who had been care- 
fully examining the entrance, is a splendid place 
where we can make a stand against our enemies. 
Should we be shut in here there is plenty of good 
drinking-water ” ; for nearly the entire stream which 
they had found flowing through a lower part of the 
tunnel-cave emptied through the channel into the prin- 
cipal bubble-cave. 

Then,” said Charley, let’s go back for our food 
supplies, and bring Kooloo and Marbonna here.” 

The advantages of the bubble-cave were thoroughly 
appreciated by Marbonna. 

Heap good place for fight,” and then turning to 
Miconareo, he said : ‘‘You and I stand on either side 
348 



" A splendid place where we can make a 
stand against our enemies 

Page 348 


- li*’ ;5-^- w- vn^ 'c ■ '- '• ■’ "■ • -> ''• .■• -■ ' ■ 

S*'- ^ ’■' ' '^ ‘ ' ,4 ’ a * *■“ f *- 

•.* • ' » - ^ 'i. -s'^' * -In. 





^ 'j*. > X?' V 

iS V^-L '‘ 







* /F- % ' j ,_ 

' - ' ^ ^ 


K ' f ^ ^ ** 

L i-^H'W 

m - <; . ■ ' • 


‘'‘* » £1 4ir a f* 

‘ ‘v,^ V; ' . *; 

•'• . -’ 'S: !p ‘ .•/ 

-. 4 ^ • ^. 4 1 


V- 




EV '-v v: fj^:li. > 
i<n' : , ' WsTviV^- 


N ^ 




IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


with clubs, and no one can pass us through that/' he 
said, pointing to the passageway. 

‘‘ And Kooloo will also fight,” cried the lad. 

Doctor,” said Charley, “if any of the warriors do 
get through, Kooloo and I will take care of them.” 

“ All right,” said the doctor. “ You understand this 
is a fight to the death. If we are taken I think we 
would have no chance whatever for our lives. I be- 
lieve Arahu and his warriors would claim that since 
you have not remained to give service in the House of 
the Idols, you have disobeyed the commands of the 
gods, and therefore should be destroyed.” 

“ We will not be taken alive, doctor,” said Charley 
gravely. 

“ I wish we knew, Charley,” said the doctor, 
“ whether these bubble-caves have any other entrances 
except through the tunnel-cave.” 

“ I imagine, doctor,” said Charley, “ that there 
are probably many places where the steam has escaped, 
and so openings have been formed. Do you not think 
that probable ? ” 

“ You are quite a philosopher, Charley,” said the 
doctor. “ But I would like to know for certain how 
far these caves extend. Therefore, while Marbonna 
and I keep guard at this entrance, suppose you and 
Kooloo make an exploration and see if there are any 
other large entrances that could easily be reached.” 

“ Come, Kooloo,” said Charley, “ let us see where 
the cave leads to. Let me go first,” he added ; I think 
we may find openings in the floor.” 

349 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


Kooloo will follow Charleyo/' replied the lad. 
“ Charleyo great white priest. Can see much better 
than Kooloo.” 

As they were leaving, Marbonna informed Kooloo 
that should there be any necessity for calling them back, 
he would imitate the sound of a certain bird. 

Charley’s caution to Kooloo as regards the proba- 
bility of their finding openings in the floor through 
which they might fall proved to be not without founda- 
tion. Enough light entered from cracks in the top 
to enable them to see their way fairly well. In this 
way they could see a number of openings in the floor 
through which they might have fallen had they not 
been on the lookout for them. 

The large bubble-cave in which they had left their 
companions communicated with a second cave almost 
as large, and this with a third cave. As they were 
about entering the last cave they heard Marbonna’s 
signal call and hurried back to him and the doctor. 
As they approached, the doctor said in a low tone to 
Charley : 

“ They have discovered the entrance to the tunnel- 
cave. Listen, you can hear them running in this di- 
rection. Keep quiet, it is too dark for them to see 
the entrance readily, so that it may be some time before 
they discover it. Indeed, they may not discover it at 
all.” 

From their position at the entrance of the bubble- 
cave they could see the savages, of whom there were 
now more than six, running in hot haste toward them. 

350 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


As the doctor had hoped, they were unsuccessful in 
finding the small opening communicating with the 
bubble-cave. 

They stood for a few moments directly in front of 
the fugitives when their leader, calling the others 
around him, sent two of them to bring torches, and 
others to get together all the warriors they could find 
near the head of the valley, and then went with the rest 
of his men toward the entrance. 

‘‘ Shall Kooloo follow and see if they stay at the 
entrance ? he asked the doctor. Kooloo walk with- 
out noise.” 

Yes,” said the doctor, ‘‘ but be careful they don’t 
see you.” 

Kooloo hurried off, and in a short time returned, 
saying : 

Two men stay at the mouth of the cave. Others 
run off toward the Western Valley.” 

“ They will get together their sentinels and scouts. 
We may expect a big crowd here in half an hour or so.” 

‘‘ Shall we kill the men at the mouth of the cave? ” 
inquired Marbonna. 

I think not,” replied the doctor. They are not 
yet sure we are in the cave. Unless,” he continued, 
we were sure they had all gone toward the Western 
Valley, for then if we killed them we could make our 
escape down to Mahinee’s valley.” 

‘‘ Not all go,” replied Kooloo. Kooloo see some 
wait near the head of Mahinee’s valley.” 

Then we will remain here,” said the doctor. 

3SI 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


But let us now return to Mahinee. There had been 
no difficulty in collecting all the fighting people of the 
valley; for all were eager to follow their great chief, 
aid him punish the invaders and, if possible, bring back 
the captives. Even the old men of the village, who 
were still able to carry their clubs and spears, asked 
Mahinee as a great favor to let them go along with 
him. Except, however, in a few cases, the chief re- 
plied : 

‘‘ Better stay back and look after the women and 
children.’’ 

The expedition, as already stated, had left at a rapid 
pace for the head of the valley. A short time before 
leaving an advance party was sent out, consisting of 
thirty scouts, so as to prevent any surprise attack by 
the enemy. These men were followed by Mahinee’s 
picked company, led by Mahinee himself; and then 
came the rest of the warriors. They formed a splen- 
did-looking body of fighting men, and, led by so skilled 
a chief as Mahinee, would be difficult to match in fierce 
hand-to-hand fighting. 

Marching alongside of Mahinee were the captain, 
Hiram, and Jack, and Waheatoua. The last acted as 
interpreter. 

Rompey accompanied the captain — now running 
ahead, and now returning and walking alongside of 
Harold, Jack, and the captain. Rompey was greatly ex- 
cited, probably there was no one in the company more 
excited than he. At first Mahinee feared the dog 
would bark and thus disclose their approach to the 

352 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


enemy, but the captain assured him that Rompey was 
well trained and would keep perfectly quiet if so com- 
manded. This was done, and Rompey proved his 
good training by refraining from barking. He 
showed, however, by the quivering of his body and the 
wonderful shakings of his tail, that the excitement was 
there. Rompey’ s conduct greatly pleased Mahinee, 
for he knew the dog would be of great help if they 
were obliged to visit the Western Valley to look for 
the boys. 

Hiram had brought his cutlass with him as a part of 
his equipment. To the savages this appeared a most 
wonderful weapon, and when Hiram would draw it 
every now and then from its scabbard, there were low 
murmurs of admiration at the length and beauty of the 
blade, as well as its apparently great sharpness. This 
so pleased Hiram that he drew the blade from its scab- 
bard perhaps more frequently than was necessary. 

It was a long march to the head of the valley. Al- 
though they had started about noon and had marched 
continuously, at a rapid gait, it was early morning 
when they reached the slopes of the central ash-cone. 

Rompey had now become even more excited than he 
had been at any time since leaving Harding Island. He 
had evidently found slight traces of a trail that had 
been left when Charley and his companions had last 
been in this locality ; for, after following it for a while, 
he would turn to the captain and, resting his paws on 
his shoulders, would look into his face as if vainly en- 
deavoring to tell him something. 

3S3 


X 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


“ Great dog,” cried Mahinee, who had been carefully 
watching the actions of the animal with much appre- 
ciation. Wants to tell you something.” 

Yes,” said the captain, “ it looks as if he had found 
a scent of Charleyo. I will try to find out.” Turning 
to the dog, the captain said : 

Find Charley, Rompey ; find Charley.” 

As if the dog thoroughly understood what had been 
said to him, he at once started off on the trail, still 
running to and fro as if uncertain. At last, however, 
he quickened his gait, and ran in an almost straight 
line toward the mountain. 

Rompey had run some little distance up the cen- 
tral ash cone, where he had struck a trail of the four 
fugitives as they had escaped from the valley and were 
on their way to the lava caves. 

“ O Uncle Arthur,” cried Harold, Rompey is run- 
ning toward a lava cave that Charley and I discovered 
a few days before Charley, Kooloo, and Marbonna 
were taken prisoners. I remember Charley’s advice 
that nothing should be said about this discovery, since 
he thought it might happen that some day he and I, or 
even the captain, Hiram, and Jack would be glad to 
take refuge in it. I believe we will find Charley in the 
cave, and I hope Kooloo and Marbonna. Let us 
hurry. I think I hear signs of fighting.” 

‘‘ I think it very probable, Harold,” replied the cap- 
tain. Hiram,” he continued, ‘‘ let us hurry after him.” 

** Mahinee and his men will go with you,” said 
Mahinee, ordering his company to follow him. 

354 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


But Rompey’s excited condition was such that they 
found it impossible to keep up with him. Indeed, even 
Mahinee and his best runners were unable to reach 
him. 

Waheatoua had kept Mahinee acquainted with what 
Harold was saying, and was about to say something 
to the captain when Harold continued : 

“ Look at the smoke, captain. There’s something 
burning near the cave.” 

As they looked, they saw smoke issuing apparently 
from a hole in the ground. 

Mahinee’s keen eyes had already seen the smoke, 
and his ears had heard the sound of fighting. The 
captain had also detected both of these signs, so that 
the entire party now ran at their best gait toward the 
mouth of the lava cave. 

It soon required neither keen eyes to see, nor keen 
ears to hear, what was going on ; for a number of Ara- 
hu’s warriors were seen running toward the place that 
Harold declared was the entrance to the cave. So in- 
tent were these men on reaching their enemies, who 
they were sure would soon be forced to flee from the 
cave, that they failed to note the quiet, though rapid, 
approach of the rescuing party. 

It was now shortly after sunrise, and the doctor 
and his party had been awaiting events. Their ene- 
mies had remained outside the cave for several hours, 
not only for the j)urpose of obtaining reenforcements, 
but especially to start fires in the bubble-caves they 
355 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


had discovered. In this way they hoped to smoke 
their enemies out of their refuge. From their position 
in the bubble-cave, they could see the approach of a 
large body of warriors with spears and war-clubs. 
They had now no difficulty in recognizing them, since 
two of the men who preceded them carried flaming 
torches. 

Savage joy and exultation were apparent in their 
faces as they hurried toward them. This time they 
had no difficulty in detecting the entrance to the bub- 
ble-cave, for the light of their torches clearly disclosed 
it. So rushing forward they attempted to force their 
way through. But the entrance prevented the passage 
of more than one at a time, and its length was such 
that no more than two could get into it at the same 
time. 

There were two determined men guarding that en- 
trance, the old warrior Marbonna, and the cool, calcu- 
lating Yankee, the doctor. As the savages attempted 
to pass through the narrow entrance, down came their 
war-clubs on their heads, thus not only rendering them 
helpless, but so blocking up the narrow entrance with 
their inanimate bodies as to necessitate their removal, 
and thus the defenders got a short breathing-spell. 
But the cessation of the fighting was short. Again 
they came, more determined than ever, and began 
crawling through the narrow entrance. But Mar- 
bonna and the doctor again met them, again necessita- 
ting the withdrawal of two other bodies through the 
entrance, and this was repeated until six warriors had 

356 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


been put out of the fight. After a short consultation 
the remainder determined to make a concerted attack 
and force their way into the bubble-cave. But the 
stronghold was too well defended, and again two more 
of the warriors were knocked senseless by blows on 
the head from the clubs in the hands of Marbonna and 
the doctor. 

As the enemy retreated, Marbonna and Miconareo 
heard one of the men say to his companions that there 
was no use in fighting there any longer ; that the fugi- 
tives would soon be smoked out by the fire which, it 
seemed, some of their number had built in one of the 
bubble-caves communicating with the tunnel-cave. 

A very dangerous thing if they are successful at 
it,’’ said the doctor, after he had explained to Charley 
what they were talking about. The cave would soon 
be filled with smoke so that we would be compelled to 
take the choice of being suffocated or killed outright 
by the savages as we attempted to escape from the 
entrance.” 

The enemy had not been gone long before thin curl- 
ings of smoke began to pour into the cave. These 
eventually became so strong that they concluded it 
would be necessary to make an effort to escape. If they 
remained they would certainly be suffocated, while if 
they reached the outside they would at least have a 
fighting chance for their lives. 

Going quietly to the entrance of the tunnel-cave they 
rushed out of it, and a severe fight at once began. It 
was a fight for life, and the fugitives fought valiantly. 
357 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


The doctor and old Marbonna wielded their war-clubs 
like veterans. Nor were Charley or Kooloo idle. 
The odds, however, were against them in point of 
numbers and, had it not been for the aid that was 
coming, the fight would soon have been over. And 
even now it seemed as if that long-spread-out line that 
was approaching, with Rompey in the lead, followed 
at a distance of about fifty feet by Mahinee, and then a 
scattering of Mahinee’s warriors, and finally by the 
captain and his companions, would fail to reach them 
in time. 

It was in this condition that the keen eyes of Mahi- 
nee saw that Charley was confronted by a huge war- 
rior standing over him with his war-club about to dash 
out his brains. With all his speed Mahinee could not 
reach Charley in time. But suddenly, like a flash of 
light, he saw Rompey spring at the throat of the war- 
rior, savagely tearing it with his teeth when the man 
fell senseless, only to be almost immediately afterward 
killed by a blow from Mahinee’s club. In a few mo- 
ments, but before the captain and his companions 
could arrive, Mahinee, aided by his men, had killed or 
dispersed the savages who were surrounding Charley, 
Kooloo, Marbonna, and the doctor. 

As soon as Charley had been relieved of his enemy 
he recognized Rompey, crying out: 

“ Why, Rompey, where did you come from ? Good 
dog; you saved my life.” 

Rompey ’s only reply consisted in a series of joyous 
barkings and tail waggings, during which the affec- 

358 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


tionate animal jumping up rested his paws on Charley’s 
shoulders and commenced licking his face. 

** What dog is that, Charley? ” inquired the doctor. 

He’s a full-blooded collie, and is one of the most 
beautiful animals I have ever seen.” 

‘‘ He is my dog,” said Charley. “ He was left on 
Harding Island with your old friend, the captain, and 
his companions, Hiram and Jack. Since Rompey is 
here we may be sure the captain and his friends have 
reached the island. Rompey is probably not far from 
them.” 

But the fight was not yet over. Word having been 
sent to Arahu that the fugitives were shut up in a lava 
cave from which they could not escape, the king, 
rapidly collecting as many of his warriors as he could, 
had marched to the top of the mountain in order to 
share in the glory of capturing the fugitives and offer- 
ing them in sacrifice to their gods. As the doctor had 
suggested, since the captives had disobeyed the com- 
mands of the gods, and had not remained to give serv- 
ice in the House of the Idols, they should be sacrificed. 
The approach of this company had been observed by 
Mahinee’s men who, hiding, had permitted them to 
pass them, and had attacked them in the rear, thus 
renewing the battle. The captain and his companions 
had been kept so busy they had not only failed to reach 
Charley, but had not even been recognized by him. 

Mahinee was at the head of his men fighting his 
enemies. Singling out Arahu as his opponent, he 
rushed toward him, crying out in a mocking tone : 

359 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


‘‘ Slayer of children and capturer of boys, come 
now and fight with a man. It is Mahinee who calls 
you, not mere children and an aged warrior.” 

Whatever else could be said against Arahu, he was a 
brave man. He therefore willingly accepted Mahinee’s 
challenge. Rushing to meet his enemy, the two chiefs 
were soon engaged in fierce conflict. For a long time 
the result was uncertain. They were nearly evenly 
matched; but Mahinee’s foot unfortunately slipping, 
his opponent raising his huge war-club high in the air 
had almost brought it down on the head of Mahinee 
when Kooloo, without a moment’s hesitation, bravely 
rushed in and received the blow. Had it not been that 
it was a glancing blow the lad received he would 
certainly have been instantly killed. As it was, he 
received a severe wound on the head, and fell appar- 
ently dead. As Arahu’s club fell on Kooloo, Mahinee, 
taking advantage of his momentarily unprotected 
condition, quickly raised his club and dashed out his 
brains. 

During this fight the captain, Hiram, Jack, and 
Harold did their share of the work. Hiram especially 
gained the applause of Mahinee’s warriors by dis- 
charging the bronze cannon at some reenforcements 
that came from the Western Valley. It was not that 
the discharge produced such dreadful slaughter, al- 
though the ball with which Hiram had loaded it did 
pass directly through the bodies of two of the warriors 
at a distance of half a mile, thus instantly killing them. 
It was most probably the noise, and the apparent magic 
360 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


that could kill at such a distance, that produced a moral 
effect stronger than anything else. 

During the fight Jack received a slight cut in his 
shoulder from a spear of one of Arahu’s warriors. He 
did not, however, think much of it at the time. 


361 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


CHAPTER XXIX 

How THE Doctor's Medicine Chest was Employed 

When the battle was over, and the combatants had 
time to take breath and look around, the captain was 
greatly surprised when one of the savag-es who, as he 
had noticed, had been fighting on their side, ap- 
proached him and, reaching out his hand, exclaimed 
in the best of English: 

‘‘ How are you, Harding ? Glad to see you again. 
What are you doing in this part of the world ? Acting 
as a missionary, and trying to turn these savages from 
their wicked ways? But no matter what you are do- 
ing, Fm mighty glad you happened to turn up here 
just when you did.” 

Who are you,” said the captain, who look so 
much like a Polynesian, and yet speak such excellent 
English ? ” 

‘‘ I’m your old friend. Dr. Charles B. Parsons, of 
Boston. You probably remember that you and I were 
students in geographical physics at the Oxford Uni- 
versity, London. I am the same Doctor Parsons who 
formerly occupied the cabin of the brig, Fanny Wat- 
son. I was supposed to have been lost overboard dur- 
ing a heavy gale that preceded the storm and finally 
wrecked the brig.” 


362 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


It came all of a sudden to the captain who the doctor 
was ; so, turning to his friend, he said : 

Tm very glad to see you, Parsons ; not only as 
my old friend, but because, as I believe, you have had 
much to do with aiding Charley, Kooloo, and Mar- 
bonna in their escape.” 

The doctor was about to make some other remark 
to the captain, when Charley, who having recognized 
the captain and his companions, turning to the doctor, 
said : 

'' Please wait for me a moment, doctor. It’s my turn 
now.” And rushing into the captain’s arms he com- 
menced hugging and kissing him, crying : 

O captain, how glad I am to see you again ! What 
experiences Harold and I have passed through since 
we were carried away captives in the war canoes from 
Harding Island! Come here. Jack, let me hug you. 
Come here, Harold. It’s your turn now. I don’t 
care who sees me acting in this way. I am so happy 
to see you here again, I am not ashamed to show 
it. And you too, Hiram,” he said, seeing that the old 
sailor was looking affectionately to him as if awaiting 
his turn. So rushing to him the lad again began to 
hug and, as if this was not satisfactory, he ran from one 
to another repeating the operation. “ But,” he said, 
where is Kooloo? ” for he had not seen that part of 
the fight in which Kooloo had been nearly killed. 

“ Kooloo has been very severely wounded, and al- 
most killed,” said the captain. During the fight be- 
tween Mahinee’s men and the reenforcements led by 

363 


IN CAPTIVITY JN THE PACIFIC 


Arahu, Mahinee and Arahu engaged in a single com- 
bat. The fight was long and uncertain. At last Arahu 
gained the advantage and would undoubtedly have 
killed Mahinee had not Kooloo, who was fighting 
alongside his father, rushed in in time to save his life. 
Kooloo, however, received a glance blow on his head 
that I fear may kill him.” 

Doctor Parsons, who had heard what the captain 
said, remarked: 

Don’t talk about Kooloo being killed. Let me see 
the lad. I may be able to do something for him if he is 
not already dead. I have spent the last few days with 
him, and know he is in such splendid physical con- 
dition that he should be able to bear a heavy blow on 
the head without being killed, unless the brain itself has 
been injured.” 

I’m glad to hear you talk that way, doctor,” said 
the captain. “If you can do anything for Kooloo, 
you would become a friend of the great Mahinee ; for, 
savage as he is, his heart is bound up in his son.” 

“ Yes, doctor,” said Charley, “ do all you can for 
Kooloo. Mahinee has been very kind to both Harold 
and myself and, indeed, has adopted both of us into 
his family ; for, as you know, I am Charleyo Mahinee, 
and Harold is Harealdo Mahinee.” 

“ I will do all I can, my lad,” said the kind-hearted 
doctor. “ Come, let us look at him.” 

The doctor accompanied the captain, Charley, and 
Harold, who led them to Mahinee, who was standing 
near the still unconscious boy 

364 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


Mahinee looked up sorrowfully as the captain ap- 
proached with the doctor. Turning to Marbonna, who 
was standing by the side of Mahinee, the captain said : 

“ Tell Mahinee that this man,” pointing to the doc- 
tor, ‘‘ is a wonderful doctor ; that he can cure your son 
if any one can.” 

‘‘ I have sent runners for my medicine men,” said 
Mahinee ; but if you can do anything for him, do it at 
once. I fear he is dying.” 

The doctor stooped down and carefully examined 
the lad. Then looking up at Mahinee said in excellent 
Polynesian : 

The boy has received a severe blow on the head, 
but as far as I can see it is not a dangerous blow, and 
I think I can save his life.” Then turning to the cap- 
tain he said : I say, Harding, if I only had that medi- 
cine chest that was left in the cabin of the Fanny 
Watson, I am sure I could save his life. There has 
been a fracture of the skull. A piece of the bone is 
pressing against the brain. I have a trephining set 
in my medicine chest.” 

‘‘ Why, captain,” cried Jack, ‘‘ don’t you remember 
we put the doctor’s medicine chest in our boat? Ask 
Mahinee to send one of his swift runners for it. He 
will find it in a locker near the bow of the boat.” 

I will. Jack,” said the captain ; “ but how can the 
messenger find it ? I don’t quite see how I can describe 
it to him.” 

‘‘ Let me make a drawing of it,” said Charley ; ‘‘ I 
can show him what it looks like.” 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


When Charley finished the drawing he handed it to 
the captain, who explained the matter to Mahinee. 
Mahinee, calling one of his swiftest runners, gave him 
instructions to go and return as quickly as possible, 
assuring the runner that he need fear nothing from 
the taboo, since both he and the great white priest had 
so declared. Knowing that it was highly important 
to get the medicine chest as quickly as possible, Mahi- 
nee sent relays of runners, stationing them at different 
locations along the valley, so that on the return the 
chest could be brought back more rapidly by the fresh 
runners. By these means he thought the last runner 
should return with it in about a day and a quarter. 

Now,’’ said the doctor to Mahinee, let me look 
again at the young man.” 

After a careful examination he assured the father 
that he believed his son would recover if too long a 
time was not required for the return of the medicine 
chest. 

“ The boy is in excellent physical condition,” he 
said. “ I do not think any inflammation of the brain 
will ensue.” Then immediately after this he turned to 
the captain and repeated in excellent English what he 
had said to Mahinee. 

Mahinee gave a surprised look at this man who so 
much resembled one of his people, could speak their 
language as if he was one of them, and yet could speak 
such excellent English. Turning to Miconareo, he 
said: 

Who are you who resemble one of my race, speak 

366 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


the language thoroughly, and also can talk in English 
so well ? ” 

The doctor then explained fully to Mahinee that he 
was a native of the great country known as the 
United States of America, where the same language 
is employed as in England; that he had been for a 
year among the people of the Western Valley, where 
he acted as one of their principal priests; that when 
the three prisoners were taken and Arahu and his 
warriors wished to offer them as sacrifices to the gods, 
he had opposed it, and had at last assisted the prisoners 
in escaping; that the young white priest, pointing to 
Charley, showing the people of that valley great magic, 
had so frightened them that they had been set aside 
for the House of Idols. He then explained the details 
of the escape; how they reached the lava cave up to 
the time when the fight began at the mouth of the 
large cave. 

‘‘ It was then,’' he added, that the great Mahinee 
with his white allies took part in the fight, so he knows 
for himself all that has taken place.” 

When Mahinee heard the wonderful services that the 
doctor had rendered, not only to Kooloo, Charley, and 
Marbonna, he said: 

‘‘ Mahinee will never forget what you have done 
for him. Save my son’s life, and anything you ask for, 
Mahinee will give it to you.” 

I will remember that,” said the doctor, when the 
time comes.” 

‘‘ Captain,” said the doctor, have you a sharp pen- 

367 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


knife with you? I must shave the hair from the lad’s 
head. It is the pressure on the brain that is causing 
his unconsciousness. I am sure he will be all right 
if I can manage to remove this fragment of bone 
which is causing the trouble, by the use of trephining. 
I think the lad will be able to speak and recognize 
us probably a half-hour or so after the completion of 
the operation.” 

The captain’s penknife was in excellent condition. 
He had an oil stone with which he kept its blades sharp 
and free from rust. By its use the doctor soon re- 
moved the hair from the wound, when he saw that the 
injury was as he had stated. 

‘‘ There is nothing now to do,” he said, ‘‘ but to 
wait for the messenger. How long will this probably 
be ? ” he asked Mahinee. 

When Mahinee told him that it would probably re- 
quire at least a day and a quarter, if not longer, the 
doctor was evidently worried. But during this time he 
carefully fashioned a piece of dry, clean shell, so as 
nearly to fit the opening he expected to make in the 
lad’s skull. 

While waiting, Mahinee’s men had erected a large 
and 'comfortable house, to which Kooloo was carried. 

At last the messenger arrived with the medicine 
chest. Probably never before was this distance in the 
valley covered in so short a time, and never before, 
perhaps, had there been greater reason for breaking 
records. The relays of runners Mahinee had sent, 
had stationed themselves at different distances along 
368 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


the valley and considerably decreased the time required 
for the return. 

The doctor eagerly opened his chest, fearing that 
his trephining instrument-set might not be there. 

‘‘ Ah ! ” he exclaimed with satisfaction, here they 
are, and in excellent order. Now, captain, I will 
show you the manner in which modern surgery 
can perform apparent miracles. In this case we have 
the brain of a healthy lad that is unable to discharge 
its functions only by reason of pressure against it by a 
piece of the skull. How simple a thing then to relieve 
this pressure by removing the piece of bone ! ” 

The trephine is an apparatus employed in surgery 
for the removal of a circular piece of bone from the 
skull. It consists of a cylindrical saw provided with a 
cross handle, not unlike that of a gimlet. As the saw 
is rotated a cut is made through the bone, not by com- 
plete rotations, but by half-rotations made rapidly al- 
ternately to the right or left as in boring with an awl. 

Under the skilful operation of the doctor — whose 
hands, with all their lack of practice, had not yet lost 
their cunning — a small circular piece of bone was re- 
moved from the skull around the depressed part, thus 
relieving the pressure. The operation had required a 
comparatively short time, and the piece of thoroughly 
cleansed shell was soon bound in its place over the 
opening. Mahinee said nothing while watching the 
operation ; but it was evident he was extremely anxious 
as to the result. A few moments after the pressure 
had been relieved by the removal of the bone, Koo- 
Y 369 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


loo opened his eyes and, instantly recognizing his 
father, said: 

“ Then the big king did not kill my father. Kooloo 
come in time. Kooloo is happy. Now he is ready to 
die.” 

There is no necessity for Kooloo dying,” said the 
doctor, interrupting him. “ I have cured you. Do 
what I tell you, you will be all right, although let me 
say it may be some time before you are quite strong 
again. You have had a close call for your life, my 
boy.” 

Mahinee looked with surprise and awe at the won- 
derful manner in which the white doctor had almost 
raised his son from the grave. 

‘‘ White man wonderful doctor,” he said. ‘‘ Mahi- 
nee will not forget what you have done for him.” 

Kooloo must be kept quiet until the sun is again in 
that part of the sky,” said the doctor to Mahinee, 
pointing to the sky. ‘‘ The only danger now is that an 
inflammation or a fever may set in.” 

‘‘ I must now leave you,” said Mahinee in Polyne- 
sian to the doctor, and hasten with my warriors to 
^the Western Valley. This invasion of the enemy must 
be stopped forever. I will march against the rem- 
nants of the enemy, and when I get through, difficulties 
need never again be feared from that quarter.” 

‘‘ That’s all right, Mahinee,” said the captain 
through the doctor ; “ I hope the great Mahinee will be 
merciful to his enemies and spare the lives of as many 
as he can.” 


370 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


Mahinee,” replied the great chief, will not for- 
get what the gods have done for him. He will be as 
merciful as he can.” 

As soon as Mahinee had left with his warriors for 
the Western Valley, he took the precaution to leave a 
body of his warriors more than sufficient to guard the 
place where his son was resting. As soon as he left 
them. Jack, turning to the doctor, said : 

‘‘ Doctor, have you any salve or ointment you can 
rub on my shoulder? I received a slight scratch dur- 
ing the fight from a spear of one of Arahu’s warriors. 
It’s a mere scratch, and I thought nothing of it; but it 
has commenced to swell, and is now very painful.” 

Let me see that arm. Jack,” said the doctor ; and, 
examining it, said to the captain : 

“ This is a more serious matter than you might 
suppose. The spear has been tipped with a powerful 
poison, so that a small puncture almost invariably re- 
sults in death. Fortunately, I have made a study of 
this poison and have discovered an antidote that is 
easily prepared from a mixture of the juices of the 
leaves and roots of plants that are common on the 
island. I will go to that clump of trees half a mile 
down the mountain, where I believe I can find all of the 
plants I need.” 

In about half an hour the doctor returned with a 
bundle of roots and leaves, from which he soon ob- 
tained a mixture of their juices. When this was done, 
he turned to the captain and said : 

“ I must again ask you for the loan of that penknife, 

371 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


captain. I shall hurt you a little, Jack,” he said, as he 
opened the blade and, cleansing it by holding it in the 
fire, made several deep incisions in Jack’s shoulder. A 
quantity of dark-colored blood flowed freely from the 
wound when, pouring the liquid in the open cuts, and 
using a mixture of the bruised roots and leaves as a 
poultice, the doctor bound it on Jack’s arm. What I 
did to the penknife. Jack,” he said, “ by holding it in 
the fire was endeavored to kill any poisonous matters 
or germs that might have collected on it.” 

“ Yes, I know, doctor,” said Jack, ‘‘ you were steril- 
izing it.” 

“ I have certainly struck a scientific crowd of boys,” 
said the doctor smiling. “ I have already heard to- 
day from Charley as to why he thought the bubble- 
caves, in which we had taken refuge, probably con- 
nected with other caves, and now I hear from this lad a 
criticism as to what I had done.” 

Why, doctor,” said Jack blushing, I beg your 
pardon ! I assure you I did not mean to criticize you.” 

“ All right, my boy,” said the doctor, ‘‘ I’m only 
jollying you.” 

Everything went well with the two boys. Kooloo 
soon entirely regained his consciousness, and in a 
few days was able to walk about. He continued weak, 
however, not yet having completely recovered from 
the shock. As to Jack, his recovery was complete ; and, 
except for the gashes made by the knife and the stiff- 
ness of his shoulder, there was nothing left to show that 
he had ever been injured. 

372 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


During the two days they remained in the house that 
the warriors had erected for them, the doctor and the 
captain had long conversations concerning their old 
life at Oxford University, as well as the wonderful 
things that had happened to both of them. The 
doctor was very much interested in the captain’s de- 
scription of Harding Island, of its lagoon, and of the 
islands in the lagoon; especially of the huge limestone 
grottoes and of the earthquake shock that had formed 
a ship channel communicating with the lagoon. 

But the comfortable cottages that had been erected 
on Harding Island especially interested the doctor. 
In his imagination he saw the study communicating 
with the vine-shaded porch. He pictured to him- 
self the splendid times he and the captain might have 
if they could only manage to reach the island. 

At last Mahinee returned after a successful and un- 
expectedly peaceful invasion of the Western Valley. 
When its people heard that their king had been killed 
they joyfully received Mahinee and offered allegiance 
to him. So Mahinee took possession of the valley in 
the name of his son Kooloo, who was duly chosen as 
its king. 


373 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


CHAPTER XXX 

The Return to Harding Island 

So far as the injury to the skull was concerned, Kooloo 
was rapidly improving. Nor did there appear to be 
any injury to the brain itself. While the relief of pres- 
sure following the removal of the bone had resulted, as 
already described, in a complete recovery of conscious- 
ness, and while no fever followed the operation, yet 
the shock to the system had left its impress on the lad’s 
general health. Though he could walk about, yet his 
system did not regain the vigor that had character- 
ized it. 

The air of the valley was wonderfully pure, and 
during the greater part of the day both cool and pleas- 
ant when the sea breeze prevailed, but during the night 
it was often sultry; and being unable to obtain sound, 
refreshing sleep, the lad was not recovering so rapidly 
as they had hoped. Indeed, he was growing worse in- 
stead of better; so that his condition gave the doctor 
considerable anxiety. 

Captain,” said the doctor one day, shortly after 
their return to Mahinee’s valley, ‘‘ if I could get Kooloo 
to Harding Island, where he would have the cool sea 
breeze by day, and the cool breeze from the lagoon by 
night, I am sure he would recover rapidly.” 

374 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


“ Then,” said the captain, ‘‘ let’s see if we can per- 
suade Mahinee to send Kooloo to Harding Island in 
one of his canoes. There we could look after the lad. 
Indeed, we might take Mahinee himself with us, for 
I imagine that affairs are in such a condition in the 
Western Valley that there would be no danger of his 
leaving the people in care of the chief he has tem- 
porarily placed over them.” 

“ I agree with you, captain,” said the doctor ; but 
don’t say anything about it yet to Mahinee. It would 
be better if Mahinee would ask you as a favor to take 
both Kooloo and himself to Harding Island, than for 
you to ask him to permit you to do this. I think I can 
arrange matters so that he will make this request. By 
the way, captain,” he added, I know Hiram is very 
fond of that small bronze cannon. Do you think he 
would care if we left it with Mahinee as a gift? ” 

If I can show Hiram* that any advantage is to be 
gained by so doing, I am sure he would be willing,” 
said the captain. But I don’t see what Mahinee could 
do with the cannon.” 

That may be true, captain,” said the doctor smil- 
ing, but it is not so much what Mahinee actually can 
do with the cannon, as what he thinks he can do 
with it. Ever since the wonderful shot that killed two 
of Arahu’s warriors at a distance of half a mile, Ma- 
hinee has looked on the cannon with longing eyes. 
He regards it as the most wonderful engine of war 
he has ever seen. He once said to me, ‘ Big make- 
thunder is most wonderful,’ and then,” continued the 
375 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


doctor, “ he expressed both surprise and admiration 
at its ability to kill at a distance of half a mile.” 

Did he say anything which led you to suppose that 
he would like to own the cannon ? ” 

‘‘Yes,” was the reply; “he said to me, ‘Do you 
think the great white chief,’ that’s you, captain, ‘ could 
be persuaded to make me a present of the big make- 
thunder? ’ ” 

“ And what did you say? ” 

“ I told Mahinee that I thought I could persuade you 
to do this.” 

“ Now I understand what you are trying to get at,” 
said the captain laughing. “ I will see Hiram about the 
matter. I am sure he will be willing to give up the gun 
if it will aid us in returning to Harding Island.” 

As the captain had imagined, Hiram was pleased to 
do anything that would make their return to Harding 
Island more probable. When the captain told the 
doctor of his success, the doctor said : 

“ I will take an early opportunity of presenting the 
gun to Mahinee. Of course you will understand that 
to a man of Mahinee’s character, it would be ill advised 
even to hint that this present had anything to do with 
our going back to the island.” 

“ You are right, doctor,” was the reply. “ Such 
a course would only weaken us with Mahinee; but if 
we place him in the position of receiving something 
greater than anything he could readily give us, he 
would be disposed to agree to any reasonable request 
we might make. 


376 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


“Let us explain to him,” continued the captain, “that 
if he agrees to go with his son Kooloo, certain parts of 
Harding Island will be put aside for him and any 
people he may wish to take with him. Indeed, for 
that matter, if Kooloo recovers his health, as we be- 
lieve he will, he could live with us for half a year 
or so.” 

Kooloo’s condition did not improve. Mahinee was 
growing daily more and more anxious, and was con- 
tinually asking the doctor why his son did not get well. 
Could he tell him when his son would be cured? At 
last Mahinee asked the question that the doctor had 
been hoping and expecting that he would ask. This 
was : 

“ Is there anything that can be done for the boy 
that has not already been done ? ” 

The doctor then entered into a long explanation with 
Mahinee, saying that what his son needed was a change 
of air. 

“ I don’t mean,” he said, “ to take him from this 
island to another in the neighborhood, but to an island 
at some considerable distance from here.” Then con- 
tinuing, he said : “ Could not the great Mahinee take 
Kooloo with the captain, Charleyo, and his companions, 
in the great war canoe to some great island, say some 
five or six hundred miles from here, where he could 
get a cool breeze both day and night. Now, the island 
of which the great white captain is king is just such an 
island as I would prefer for this purpose.” And then 
he began to describe to Mahinee what he had heard 
377 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


about Harding Island; where, owing to the lagoon 
inside the reef, as well as the ocean on the outside, they 
could generally be assured a cool wind both by day and 
by night.” 

“ If the great white captain went with Kooloo and 
Mahinee to the island, would he take Charleyo and 
Harealdo with him? ” anxiously inquired Mahinee. 

That would be as you wish,” replied the wily doc- 
tor. “ If you say no, the boys would remain. If you 
say yes, they would be pleased to go.” 

“ And would you go along ? ” inquired Mahinee of 
the doctor. 

Yes,” was the reply; I would be compelled to go 
along in order to cure the young man.” 

But do you think the great white captain would be 
willing to do this ? ” anxiously inquired Mahinee. 

‘‘ I am sure he would,” was the reply. Indeed, I 
asked him and he said he would not only be pleased to 
have Kooloo go with him, but that he would like the 
great Mahinee to accompany him, and would like me, 
as the doctor, to go along. Then too,” he added, “ that 
since Charleyo and Harealdo were such great friends 
of Kooloo, he would like them to go with him.” 

When the doctor made his explanation to Mahinee, 
he smiled and intimated that he understood just what 
the doctor was endeavoring to do. He said, however, 
that it was natural the great white captain should wish 
to take back with him to Harding Island Charleyo and 
Harealdo, whom the captain loved quite as much as he 
did Kooloo. He explained, however, that he thor- 

378 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


oughly understood the advantages his son would gain 
from a change of air, and that if under the doctor’s 
care and owing to this change, his son recovered his 
health, he would be willing that the captain and his 
friends should remain on Harding Island if they so 
wished. 

As to you,” he continued, addressing the doctor, 

who have been so kind as to offer to go and take care 
of my boy, you can either remain on the island for ever, 
or I will send my canoes to bring you back, as you may 
choose.” 

“ Then,” said the doctor, let us see the great white 
captain, and hear what he has to say about this matter.” 

The captain eagerly entered into the arrangements 
that had been made between Mahinee and the doctor. 
So Mahinee finally determined to get ready to visit 
Harding Island. 

Calling a meeting of his chiefs, Mahinee informed 
them of the conclusion he had reached; that his son 
Kooloo, who had been injured in saving his life, was 
not growing better; that the great white doctor had 
recommended a change of air; that the great white 
captain had invited him to bring Kooloo to the island 
of which he was king, offering him the gift of a piece 
of land sufficient for the erection of houses for his 
warriors to live in while they were on his island; that 
he would take with him Charleyo Mahinee and Har- 
ealdo Mahinee in order to keep Kooloo company. He 
then appointed one of his chiefs to rule over the island 
during his absence, explaining that the captain had 
379 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


made him a present of the big make-thunder, so as to 
help them drive away any enemies that might attack 
them during Mahinee’s absence. 

The announcement created considerable surprise 
among Mahinee’s followers, but they all agreed that 
the step was a wise one, and were loud in the expres- 
sion of their hopes for the rapid recovery of the lad, 
and the early return of their chief to his own island. 

It was determined that the parties should return 
to Harding Island in the same five war canoes that 
have already been referred to both in the second volume 
of The Pacific Series,” as well as in this book. Be- 
fore leaving, Mahinee, wishing to reward Waheatoua 
for the services he had rendered, made him a present 
of a much better canoe than the one he had lost. 

Kooloo, for whom all these steps were being taken, 
was pleased to learn that Charleyo and Harealdo were 
to go with him, for both of these boys had given Koo- 
loo glowing accounts of the wonderful times they had 
had on Harding Island. The story of the skeleton found 
in the Maddox Clearing, with the cocoanut palm tree 
growing up alongside the bed and extending through 
the roof of the house in which the skeleton was lying, 
greatly interested him. So too did the excursions 
Charley and Harold made in the lagoon in boat No. 13. 
They told him also about the coral-encrusted wreck, 
but Kooloo did not seem to think much of this as a 
matter of fun. 

Kooloo see no fun there. Rather lie under cocoa- 
nut trees.” 


380 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


But when the boys gave Kooloo a description of the 
swimming-pool in the lagoon he was greatly interested. 
It struck him as being a particularly jolly thing to slide 
rapidly down the inclined slope into the deep waters 
of the lagoon. So too, the account of the limestone 
grottoes at Parker Cliffs proved very attractive. 

Already the boy’s health had improved. Mahinee, 
pleased at the change, spoke to him about the good 
times they would have on the island. 

Kooloo entered into a long conversation with his 
father which, however, Marbonna, who was present, 
translated briefly as follows : 

Kooloo have heap good time with Charleyo, and 
Harealdo, and Jackeo. Soon get well now.” 

Everything was at last ready, and the canoes were 
soon moving rapidly through the ocean toward the 
southwest. Waheatoua, in his new canoe, Kapiau in 
his canoe, accompanied them as far as their island. It 
is needless to say that their canoes were carrying with 
them many presents from the captain and Mahinee. 
Before leaving, these men anxiously inquired of the 
captain whether he would object if they brought their 
families with them so that they could settle on Hard- 
ing Island. The captain willingly gave this permission, 
and they promised to come to Harding Island as soon 
as possible. 

Before leaving the Island of Captivity, the captain 
distributed nearly all the things they had remaining in 
boat No. 23 to the people of the island, Mahinee giving 
directions to one of his canoes to tow the boat after it. 

381 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


Rompey was of course taken with them, as was also 
Satan. 

As they were about leaving, Mahinee handed to Wa- 
heatoua a handsome dagger that he was in the habit 
of carrying, saying: 

‘‘ When you see your King Otoa, say to him that 
Mahinee asks him to accept this dagger that he himself 
has carried for many years. He wishes to thank the 
great Otoa for sending him the great white captain and 
his friends to help him in his fight against the people 
of the Western Valley. 

W e will not attempt to describe the voyage to Hard- 
ing Island. The weather was all that could be desired, 
and they at last brought the canoes, not to Jackson 
Harbor, where the captain and his companions had 
been accustomed to bring their boats before the earth- 
quake but, passing through Harding Channel, went 
direct to the landing in the lagoon near Jackson House. 

As they were passing through Harding Channel, 
the four boys, Charley, Harold, Jack, and Kooloo, who 
were seated in Mahinee’s canoe near him, began 
eagerly talking about the different points of interest, 
which they pointed out to Kooloo. 

Kooloo,” said Charley, pointing to the entrance 
to the grotto on the northern shore of the Harding 
Channel, there is the cave in which Harold and I 
hid our boat on the day we left the island.” 

“ Is it a big cave ? ” inquired Kooloo in an excited 
tone. 

Not so very big,” was the reply. ‘‘ But plenty big 
382 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


enough to hide the boat in, but not so big as some 
others.” 

'' Maybe to-morrow or next day,” said Kooloo, we 
go and get boat ? ” 

Yes,” was the reply; ‘‘we will probably go to- 
morrow.” 

It pleased Mahinee greatly that his son was begin- 
ning to take a greater interest in things than formerly. 
He saw that already the change of air had done much 
toward bettering his condition. 

All the other points of interest that they passed on 
their way to Jackson House led to long conversations 
between the boys. 

Mahinee was greatly interested in what he saw on 
the island. Being assured that the water in Harding 
Channel was deep enough to permit the passage of a 
ship, and that the lagoon would afford an excellent har- 
bor, he predicted that in a short time Harding Island 
would be visited by many ships, and would probably 
soon have many people living on it. 

At last the canoes reached Jackson House. Its size 
and comfort excited the admiration of Mahinee, Koo- 
loo, and the warriors. 

Whenever he could do so, that is, whenever what 
he wanted to say was not a matter of special impor- 
tance, Mahinee employed the English language, and 
encouraged Kooloo to do the same ; for he wished that 
both he and his son might learn how to speak English. 
Their first sight of Jackson House therefore called 
forth the following remarks : 

383 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


“ The white king of the island live in big house. Did 
he build it or find it here? ” 

My companions and I built it,” replied the captain. 

‘‘ Great white king,” replied Mahinee in admiration. 

“ Heap big house,” said Kooloo. “ Very funny 
house on top house. How you get up there ? ” he con- 
tinued, pointing to the porch. 

Come,” said Charley to Kooloo, I’ll show you,” 
and leading the way through the house to the stairs, 
they went to the second floor, accompanied by Mahinee 
and the captain. 

The arrangement of the bedrooms was a great sur- 
prise to Kooloo. 

Where you sleep ? he asked. ‘‘No mats?” 

“ On the beds,” explained Charley. “ They are nice 
and soft,” and he asked Kooloo to touch the mattresses. 

They had left the house in good condition, so that 
there was a restful look about the bedroom, and es- 
pecially the porch, shaded as it was by running vines, 
that greatly pleased Mahinee. 

“ Kooloo stay here ? ” he inquired. 

“ Yes,” was the captain’s reply, “ this will be your 
room. You sleep in that bed,” he said, pointing to 
one of the beds in the room, “ and Kooloo in that,” 
pointing to another. “ And the doctor and I in here,” 
pointing to the next room. 

“ And where Charleyo and Harealdo sleep ? ” in- 
quired Kooloo. 

“ We’ll bring in two extra beds and they can sleep 
in the room with you,” replied the captain. 

384 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


There was much to be done in arranging places for 
the warriors. At the captain’s request Mahinee selected 
a piece of ground on the southern side of Harding 
Channel. Here a number of houses were soon erected 
under the supervision of Hiram from the portable 
houses they had obtained from the wreck, so that in 
a few days the warriors were comfortably sheltered. 

It was several weeks before the new conditions of 
life on Harding Island had adjusted themselves to 
the changes required by its marked increase in popula- 
tion. At the captain’s request, Mahinee had given 
strict orders to his people not to destroy any of the co- 
coanut palms, and that when wood was needed the 
screw-pines should be employed. It was not possible to 
supply the visitors with the canned goods, but the 
abundance of cocoanut palms gave them plenty of food, 
while the clearing at Maddox House was now produ- 
cing a great abundance of vegetable products. More- 
over, fish could readily be caught in the lagoon and off 
the shallow waters of the outside reef, so that there was 
no difficulty in providing their visitors with plenty to 
eat. 

There is much in the way of food around a coral 
island of the type of Harding Island. Mahinee’s men 
were far better acquainted with many of these things 
than was the captain. One result of their visit 
therefore was to disclose many kinds of food, and 
many methods of preparing it of which the captain 
and his companions had heretofore been ignorant. 

They had now been on the island four weeks. As 

Z 38s 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


the doctor had predicted, Kooloo’s health was soon 
completely established. Scarcely a day passed that the 
boys did not spend several hours in rambling over the 
island itself, or in trips in boat No. 13 on the waters 
of the lagoon. 

Frequently, entire days would be given to these ex- 
cursions, the nights being passed in the house at Mad- 
dox Clearing ; for the doctor wished to encourage them 
to lead an out-of-door life as far as was possible. 

They were happy days the captain and the doctor 
spent in the library and the reading-room at Jackson 
House. It is needless to say that much of this time 
was devoted to learned discussions as to the views ex- 
pressed in many of the chapters of the doctor’s ‘‘ Phys- 
ical Geography of the Sea.” In some cases the doctor 
did not agree as to the changes suggested by the cap- 
tain; in some cases the captain was convinced by the 
doctor’s arguments; in still other cases the doctor 
agreed to the changes. Indeed, the doctor’s greater 
experience, since the wrecking of the brig, led him to 
suggest many changes himself. As this pleasing work 
went on both men became enthusiastic over the im- 
portance of the book. 

“ Of course you expect to have it published. Par- 
sons, do you not ? ” asked the captain. ‘‘ I mean, of 
course, if we are ever taken off this island.” 

“ I certainly hope to publish it,” was the reply. As 
to being taken off this island, I think there is very little 
doubt about that. Now that so excellent a channel 
has been formed by the earthquake, the deep waters of 
386 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


the Harding Lagoon will afford a most excellent har- 
bor for ships. You can be assured that it will soon be 
a regular stopping-place for vessels; for your supply 
of fresh water is sufficiently great to make Harding 
Island an admirable watering-place.” 

“ Of course, doctor,” said the captain, when the 
day does arrive for taking us off the island you will 
return with us, will you not? ” 

“ Look at these horrible tattooings on my face, 
Harding,” answered the doctor, “ and then ask your- 
self would you like to go back to civilization had you 
been so awfully disfigured? No, I shall not return 
with you, but shall spend the rest of my life on Hard- 
ing Island, which I assume the king of the island,” 
turning to the captain and laughing, authorizes me to 
do.” 

I don’t blame you. Parsons,” said the captain. 

Indeed, if it were not for the boys, whom I feel 
bound to return to their parents, I would remain on 
the island with you.” 

‘‘ That would certainly be very pleasant for me,” 
said the doctor. But what is to prevent your coming 
back to the island when you have safely placed the 
boys with their parents?” 

That’s exactly what I’ve been thinking of doing,” 
replied the captain. ''Let me show you something,” 
he continued, bringing to the doctor the box of pearls 
they had obtained from the cabin of the coral-encrusted 
wreck. " I know you are a judge of pearls, doctor. 
What do you say to these ? ” 

387 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


“ They are magnificent,” he said, examining them. 

I should say these would bring in the market many 
thousand pounds. To whom do they belong? To 
you, captain, or are they joint property of you and 
your companions? ” 

“ They are joint property,” replied the captain, who 
then explained the terms of the Maddox letter that was 
found with the box of pearls, leaving them to be jointly 
distributed among those who found them, provided 
they would give his remains a Christian burial. 

“ Let me show you now what I have obtained dur- 
ing my wanderings on the different islands, since my 
escape from drowning when I was washed overboard 
from the brig.” 

With this the doctor showed the captain a number 
of most beautiful pearls, most of which were much 
larger than any of the Maddox pearls. 

“ Where did you get these. Parsons ? ” inquired the 
captain. 

“ I obtained them in various ways,” replied the doc- 
tor, “ from the different islands I have visited. It is 
surprising how far a few trinkets will go to purchase 
these things from the savages. Then too,” he added, 
“ I have spent much of my time among the priests of 
the different islands, and have obtained from them 
many remarkably fine pearls.” 

What are you thinking of doing with the money 
the sale of these pearls will bring ? ” 

That’s just it, Harding,” was the reply. “ Should 
you carry out your plan of returning to the island after 
388 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


you have placed the boys with their parents, take these 
pearls with you; sell them as advantageously as you 
can, and expend the money so received in the purchase 
of the best books you can find, especially the modern 
books and periodicals referring to geographical physics. 
Then bring back with you the best physical instruments, 
together with whatever you can think of that would 
render life on the island both more comfortable and 
more profitable. 

'' Parsons,” replied the captain, I will do this, 
should the opportunity ever present itself.” 

It happened that Hiram, who was in the room while 
the conversation had taken place, fixing up some little 
contrivance for the doctor, said to the captain : 

Cap’n, ef the day comes fur you and the boys to 
leave Harding Island, Hiram is going with ye. But 
when he gits his share of money from the sale of the 
pearls and calls on some of his people, ef ye do not 
mind it, Hiram Higgenbotham will come back and 
spend the rest of his days in this here place.” 

“ I should be delighted to have you do so,” replied 
the captain. 

And so would I,” added the doctor. And now,” 
he continued, let me tell you briefly about some of my 
adventures after I was swept off the deck of the brig.” 

I would like to hear and have often intended to 
ask about them,” said the captain. 

During the storm that, as I have learned from you, 
wrecked the Fanny Watson,” began the doctor, and 
shortly before the brig was abandoned, I was swept 

389 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


off her deck by a huge wave. At least, this was what 
Charley told me you saw entered in the log-book of 
the brig when you succeeded in boarding her. By 
good fortune, I soon regained consciousness. I do 
not know how long I was swimming in the water, 
but I know it was for several hours. Ordinarily, I 
could have kept up for half a day or more; for, as 
you know, I am an excellent swimmer, but the storm 
continuing made it more difficult for me to keep up. 
At the last moment, when I had concluded it was im- 
possible for me to keep up any longer, I spied floating 
in the water a piece of a mast which I succeeded in 
reaching. 

Harding,” he continued, I shall never forget my 
experiences on that mast. I remained on it for many 
days, how many I do not know. Fortunately, the 
heavy rain accompanying the storm supplied me with 
a little drinking-water ; but having nothing to eat, after 
a while I became so exhausted I lost consciousness. 

I do not know what happened, but when at last 
I opened my eyes and was capable of understanding 
what was going on around me, I was on an island 
surrounded by a number of tattooed savages. As you 
know, Harding, I have made an extended study of 
the Polynesian language, believing it would be of use 
to me on the trip I had long planned to take over 
different parts of the Pacific Ocean in the brig. I 
could, therefore, understand the savages when they 
asked me how long I had been in the water. I had no 
difficulty in gaining their good-will, for they were a 

390 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


kindly disposed people. Showing them some simple 
experiments, which my knowledge of physics and 
chemistry made easy, I succeeded in soon having them 
regard me as a wonderful white priest. They insisted 
on my joining their tribe, and acting as one of their 
priests. To do this, however, I was obliged to submit 
to the tattooing. I refused to permit this being done 
as long as I safely could ; but at last, seeing that I must 
either have this done or lose my life, I permitted them 
to cover me as you can now see with these awful 
markings that disfigure my body and face. 

I will not attempt to give in detail my after life. 
After remaining some time with these people, I suc- 
ceeded in escaping, and visited a number of islands. 
My tattooings, as well as my ability to speak the Poly- 
nesian language, made it comparatively easy to get 
on good terms with the people of the different islands. 
In this way I have gradually passed from island to 
island until, about a year ago, I reached the Western 
Valley of the island the boys call ‘ The Island of Cap- 
tivity,’ one of the Marquesas. There, for about a year, 
I was only exceeded in rank by the high priest.” 

Shortly after the above conversation, a special mes- 
senger, sent from Mahinee’s island to the great chief, 
reached Harding Island. It contained a request from 
the chief left in authority, that Mahinee should return 
as quickly as possible in order to quell a disturbance 
that had arisen between the people of the Western Val- 
ley and the chief he had temporarily left in control. It 
seems, as far as the messenger knew, that these disturb- 

391 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


ances were not so much the fault of the people of the 
island as because of the foolish manner in which the 
temporary chief had acted. 

Kooloo had now so completely recovered that he 
could safely return with his father. Mahinee explained 
matters to the captain, with the doctor acting as an in- 
terpreter. When Mahinee explained the nature of the 
message, and his determination to return with Kooloo 
to his island, he said to the captain : 

‘‘ Shall I take Charleyo Mahinee and Harealdo Ma- 
hinee back with me ? ” 

Let me answer that question, Harding,” said the 
doctor. So turning to Mahinee, he said : That shall 
be as the great Mahinee wishes. If he says Charleyo 
and Harealdo must go with him they will go. But the 
great white captain asks me to say that he hopes you 
will not take them. That he loves the boys as much 
as Mahinee loves Kooloo.” 

It was evident that Mahinee was disappointed that 
the request should have been formally made to him 
to leave the two boys to whom he had become so 
greatly attached. Seeing he was hesitating, the doctor 
said: 

The great Mahinee will not forget his promise to 
me. He said that if his son should recover he would 
grant anything I should ask. Now,” said the wily 
Yankee, I will not ask you to do this, but I will never 
forget Mahinee’s kindness if, of his own will, he tells 
the boys to stay with us on the island.” 

The adroit manner in which the request was framed 

392 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


resulted in Mahinee granting it; for, turning to the 
doctor, he said : 

“ Tell your captain that Mahinee says keep your boys 
with you. Mahinee will now go home with Kooloo. 
Perhaps sometime soon Mahinee come back again and 
bring Kooloo with him.^^ 

Arrangements were soon made, and Mahinee and 
his warriors were ready to leave the island on their 
long journey toward the northeast. Kooloo and the 
boys were very sorry to leave one another, but it was 
agreed that as soon as it could be done, Kooloo should 
return to the island either with some of his warriors 
only or possibly with the great Mahinee himself. 


393 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


CHAPTER XXXI 
Conclusion 

The scene shifts. We are again in the waters of the 
Kuro Sivo, about six hundred miles east of the port 
of Yokohama, Japan. But it is no longer on the dere- 
lict brig that so long withstood the buffetings of the 
winds and waves and at last yielded to the wrathful 
sea. It is on a stately ship that, under full sail, is 
forging rapidly due west toward Yokohama. 

It is the lunch-hour. In the vessel’s comfortable 
dining-room all the first-class passengers are seated 
around a long table. At the head of this table .is one 
we have seen before. It is our old friend Capt. 
William M. Parker, the former commander of the 
Ketrel. Shortly after the wreck of his vessel he was 
placed in command of a passenger ship, plying be- 
tween Melbourne, Australia, and Yokohama, Japan. 

The captain is engaged in conversation with a lady 
and gentleman seated next to him on his left. The 
captain has evidently been telling his companions 
about some of his many experiences in shipwrecks, as 
well as stories he had heard from others of almost in- 
credible rescues from drowning. 

So you see,*' he continued — it was to the lady he 
was now talking — ‘‘ one can never be certain, because a 
vessel has entirely disappeared, that some of its pas- 
394 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


sengers may not again be heard from. At any time, in 
the most unexpected way, news may come that some of 
them may have been able to reach any of the almost 
countless islands of the ocean, where they are anxiously 
awaiting an opportunity again to reach home, or at 
least to let their friends know they are still in the land 
of the living.’’ 

‘‘ That’s just what I’ve been telling my wife, Mrs. 
Pleasanton,” said the gentleman. 

Then I’m only too glad, Pleasanton,” answered the 
captain, “ that what I have just been saying agrees so 
closely with what you have told her.” 

‘‘ I am sure you believe all you have told me. Cap- 
tain Parker,” said Mrs. Pleasanton. While I know 
that there is a chance that my only son, Charley, is still 
living, I know only too well that such a chance is very 
remote. I suppose,” continued the lady, with a sad 
smile, it is natural for parents to believe their children 
are unusually bright and lovable, but I am sure that if 
you had ever seen my Charley you would agree with 
me that he was far beyond the average. I cannot but 
feel that I will never again see him alive.” 

While as you say the chances are against your 
seeing Charley again,” said the captain, yet I cannot 
but express my belief that it is not at all impossible. 
He may still be alive, and some time or another you 
may unexpectedly hear from him. But,” he continued, 
“ it now my watch on deck. I must take my place on 
the bridge.” Saying this, the captain left the dining- 
room, and was soon afterward followed on deck by 
395 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


Mr. and Mrs. Pleasanton; for the cool outer air was 
far more agreeable than the air of the dining-room or, 
indeed, of any other place below deck. 

The captain had not been long on the bridge before 
a lookout reported to one of the other officers on deck : 

Something in the water, sir, on our larboard quar- 
ter. Looks like a bottle.” 

Going immediately to the captain, the officer said : 

“ Lookout, sir, reports floating object on the lar- 
board quarter. Says he thinks it is a bottle.” 

'' Tell the boatswain to lower one of the ship’s boats, 
take a crew, and pick it up,” said the captain. 

In passenger ships there are always many of the 
passengers on deck on pleasant days. The unusual ex- 
perience of stopping the ship and sending out a boat 
to pick up something was a welcome break in the mo- 
notony of life on shipboard. The passengers there- 
fore gathered together and leaned over the rail of the 
vessel where they could have a view of the boat as it 
was lowered from the davits and rapidly rowed to- 
ward the distant object. 

It took but a short time to pick up the bottle, bring it 
on deck, and hand it to the captain. As the officer did 
this, he said to the captain : 

‘‘ It is a sealed bottle, sir. You can see a letter in- 
side.” 

Unsealing the bottle, the captain took out the letter 
and began reading it. As he did this an expression of 
mingled joy and amazement came into his face. Call- 
ing another officer to take his place on the bridge, he 

396 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


immediately went with the letter to Mr. and Mrs. 
Pleasanton who, with the other passengers, when they 
heard that a sealed bottle had been picked up, had 
crowded to the neighborhood of the bridge. 

Turning at once to Mr. and Mrs. Pleasanton, but 
speaking so that all the passengers could hear him, the 
captain said : 

“ I have wonderful news for you. Listen while I 
read the letter I have just taken out of the sealed bot- 
tle.” The captain then read the following: 

The ship Ketrel, from Liverpool, bound for Yokohama, 

Japan, was wrecked on the [giving the date and year], 

in the China Sea in [giving the latitude and longitude]. 

The ship’s sides being badly damaged by the rigging 
and masts that were blown overboard during a severe 
storm, let in water, and the ship commenced rapidly to sink. 
All on board were safely transferred to the boats that, after 
seeing the ship sink, made for the China coast. The largest 
boat, commanded by the captain, Wm. M. Parker, was in 
the lead, and the last boat in charge of Lieut. Arthur Hard- 
ing followed. During a second storm, which lasted for about 
five days, the boats were separated. The boat in command 
of Lieutenant Harding was struck during a dark night on the 
fifth day by a derelict brig. Two of the people in this boat 
were swept overboard, but the remaining four — Lieutenant 
Harding, Hiram Higgenbotham, the boatswain of the Ketrel, 
Harold Arthur Harding, a nephew of Lieutenant Harding, 
and John Parker Jackson, a ward of Capt. Wm. M. Parker — 
reached the brig in safety, on which they are now comfort- 
ably located with an abundance of food and water. We have 
thrown this bottle overboard from the brig. If found, please 
forward to the English embassy, Yokohama, Japan, to George 

Harding. 

(Signed with date). 

Lieut. Arthur Harding. 


397 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


And to this the following was added : 

It has now been several months since we began throwing 
overboard bottles containing the above message. Since that 
time the brig has picked up at sea a boat containing a lad from 
Australia named Charles Young Pleasanton, aged thirteen and 
a half years. The lad is with us on the brig, and is in excel- 
lent health. 

Thank God,” said Pleasanton. At last I have 
tidings of my dear boy. How odd it is, captain,” he 
continued, that this bottle should have been picked 
up so shortly after the statement you made — that at 
any time, in some unexpected way, word might be re- 
ceived from those who disappeared on shipwrecked 
vessels so long ago that they have been counted as be- 
ing among the dead.” 

This is a happy day for us, captain,” said Mrs. 
Pleasanton. 

‘‘ It is also a happy day for me,” said Captain Parker. 
“ As the letter informs you, the ship on which were 
Lieutenant Harding and three others was under my 
command at the time it was wrecked. All its other 
passengers were saved. It was only Lieutenant Hard- 
ing’s boat that was missing. Now, with the exception 
of the two of the crew who were swept overboard, I 
am happy in knowing that all have been saved. But it 
means even more than this to me, madam. One of 
these boys, John Parker Jackson, is my ward. Lieu- 
tenant Harding, my lieutenant or first mate, is one 
of my closest friends; and the boy, Harold Arthur 
Harding, is a nephew of Lieutenant Harding. I am, 

398 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


therefore, doubly happy to be assured that all these 
people were not drowned on the wrecking of the ship, 
but are probably still living.” 

A prolonged conversation then followed between the 
captain and Mr. and Mrs. Pleasanton, in which the 
probabilities of the derelict remaining afloat, were 
discussed, as well as the best plan for finding her and 
thus rescuing the party. 

‘‘ How far are we from Japan, captain ? ” inquired 
Mrs. Pleasanton. 

“ Only about five hundred miles,” was the reply. 

“ Will you send the letter found in the bottle to Mr. 
George Harding, or will you take it to him?” in- 
quired Mr. Pleasanton. 

I will take it to him,” was the reply. I know Mr. 
Harding intimately.” 

If you do not object,” replied Mr. Pleasanton, 
Mrs. Pleasanton and myself will accompany you.” 

“ I should like very much to have you do so,” was 
the reply. 

‘‘ Then we will go,” replied Mr. Pleasanton. You 
see,” he continued, I wish to talk the matter over 
with Mr. Harding, so as to ascertain what steps he in- 
tends taking for sending a vessel in search of the dere- 
lict brig. By the way, captain,” he continued, is 
Harding a well-to-do man ? ” 

Oh, fairly so,” was the reply. “ He is probably 
worth a few hundred thousand pounds.” 

“ I don^t know that that matters much,” replied 
Mr. Pleasanton. ** But we must plan to charter a ves- 
399 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


sel and go in search of the brig. It will be no easy task, 
in the great Pacific Ocean, to find a derelict vessel 
whose movements are dependent solely on the direction 
of the winds and the currents. My dear,” he said, 
turning to his wife, “ would you like to go with us, or 
shall I put you in care of some captain bound for Mel-^ 
bourne? ” 

“ I will go with you, of course,” said Mrs. Pleas- 
anton. 

While the vessel was steaming toward Yokohama, 
Captain Parker pointed out to his passengers that the 
first thing to be done in this search was to put them- 
selves in communication with the admiralty offices in 
Japan and other parts of the world, in order to see 
whether any news of the derelict brig had been re- 
ceived. Failing in this. Captain Parker advised the 
chartering of a swift steamer for the purpose. 

“ It will be much more satisfactory to you,” said the 
captain, ‘‘ to have this vessel under your own com- 
mand.” 

‘‘ The advice is excellent,” said Mr. Pleasanton, 
and I shall count on you for aid in purchasing or 
chartering such a vessel.” 

While Mr. Pleasanton had said nothing about the 
matter, the captain knew that he was an exceedingly 
wealthy man owning a number of large sheep ranches 
in Australia, besides valuable real estate at Melbourne, 
Sydney, Adelaide, Brisbane, and other cities in Aus- 
tralia. 

Yokohama was reached in due time, and the happy 
400 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


news was carried to Mr. and Mrs. George Harding 
by Mr. and Mrs. Pleasanton and Captain Parker. 

Without entering into details it is sufficient to know 
that arrangements were soon made by which a yacht- 
steamer was purchased, a competent sailing-master 
engaged, a crew selected, and stores of all kinds placed 
on board, and the yacht was soon steaming toward the 
east from Yokohama across the ocean. It was a long 
voyage, and we will not attempt to follow them in their 
many months of wandering over all parts of the Pacific. 
Mr. Harding had obtained permission from the home 
office in England, by cable, to leave his office in the 
hands of a successor, and had started in company with 
Mrs. Harding and Mr. and Mrs. Pleasanton on the 
yacht. Before leaving, cablegrams were sent to the 
principal ports of the world, especially of the Pacific, 
requesting all steamers and sailing vessels to keep on 
the lookout for the derelict brig. 

A few weeks after the time when Mahinee and Koo- 
loo had left Harding Island with the war canoes, the 
yacht-steamer was moving through a portion of the 
Pacific Ocean about midway between the Marquesas 
and Harding Island, when the lookout reported in sight 
two small canoes, each containing a Polynesian moving 
toward the southwest. 

A vessel on a mission like that of the yacht was not 
apt to pass by any possible source of information, so 
hailing the canoes, it was soon in conversation with its 
occupants. 

Fact is stranger than fiction. The two Polynesians 
2 A 401 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


were our old friends Waheatoua and Kapiau. It did 
not take long for the captain of the yacht to let them 
know they were searching for a partially wrecked brig 
containing three white boys and two white men. Nor 
did it take long for Waheatoua to explain to them that 
he knew all about the people for whom they were 
searching. 

‘‘ What you name boys ? ” he inquired of Mr. Hard- 
ing and Mr. Pleasanton, who were soon questioning 
him. You call them Charleyo, Harealdo, and Jackeo? 
Waheatoua know them; you find them on Harding 
Island. Waheatoua go there now.” 

Arrangements were soon made for taking the canoes 
on board the yacht and steaming rapidly toward Hard- 
ing Island. 

At last, under the guidance of the Polynesians, Hard- 
ing Island could be distinctly seen over the bow of the 
yacht, and soon the steamer had passed through Hard- 
ing Channel and was steaming through the lagoon to- 
ward Jackson House. 

Captain Harding, Doctor Parsons, and Jack were 
seated on the porch outside the study at Jackson 
House; Harold and Charley who had gone in boat No. 
1 3 to the Maddox Landing, were inside the house when 
Charley, suddenly turning to Harold, said : 

** That sounds like the puffing of a steamer, Harold.” 

‘‘ It does, indeed, Charley,” said Harold, “ and that 
sounds still more like it ” ; for, as the steamer had en- 
tered the lagoon, she blew her steam-whistle in order 
to notify the people of her approach. 

402 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


Rushing out of Maddox House they saw the yacht- 
steamer flying the English ensign. 

“ Hurrah ! ” cried Charley. “ Now, Harold, we’ll 
get back to our homes and see our mothers again.” 

“ There is no danger in boarding that yacht if we 
can do so,” said Harold; ‘‘she flies colors that are 
safe.” So rushing to boat No. 13 they were soon pull- 
ing toward the yacht. At the same time hailing it at 
the top of their voices. 

Of course all on the yacht were on the lookout, 
for they were now near what they hoped would be the 
happy termination of their long hunt. The shouts 
were heard, and as the boat was pulled through the 
waters of the lagoon toward the yacht, the yacht 
stopped her engines and awaited them. 

Long before the boat reached the yacht, by the means 
of glasses, Mr. and Mrs. Pleasanton and Mr. and Mrs. 
Harding had recognized the boys. 

“ Look ! look ! ! George, there is Harold,” said Mrs. 
Harding excitedly. 

“ There’s our Charley,” said Mrs. Pleasanton, with 
equal excitement. 

We will not attempt to describe in detail the happy 
meeting between the two boys and their parents. A 
full half-hour was insufficient for the hugging and kiss- 
ing, momentarily stopped every now and then for ex- 
planation. Despite the convict-looking clothes they 
were wearing; despite the condition of the clothes; de- 
spite the change in the appearance that more than a 
year had produced, there had been no difficulty on the 

403 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


part of the parents in recognizing their children. Of 
course, Charley was unknown to the Hardings, and 
Harold to the Pleasantons, but it did not take them 
long to become almost as well acquainted with one 
another as if they had been together for many years. 

There was one party in the boat we must not pass 
by. That party recognized Mr. and Mrs. Pleasanton 
instantly. This was our old friend Rompey, who was 
almost wild with joy at seeing their faces again. Nor 
will we stop to attempt to describe the meeting of Jack 
with Mr. and Mrs. Harding, or the joy of the Hardings 
at finding the captain alive and well. 

In the meanwhile, Waheatoua, who had been away 
from the island in his canoe, and had been sighted by 
the steamer on his return, informed the captain he had 
heard that Mahinee, accompanied by Kooloo, had 
started with his five canoes on a visit to the island. In- 
deed, toward the close of the day on which the yacht 
had reached Harding Island, Waheatoua brought ti- 
dings of the approach of Mahinee and his war canoes, 
and in due course of time they had landed on the island. 

We will not stop to explain the sensible way in 
which Mahinee acted when he learned that the people 
of the yacht had come to take Charley, Harold, and the 
others back to their own country again. In this 
matter he showed his great superiority over the aver- 
age savage. Instead of endeavoring to persuade 
Charley, Harold, and the rest of the party to remain 
with them, he said, through Waheatoua : 

‘‘ Mahinee heap sad that Charleyo, Harealdo, are 
404 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


going away in the big canoe. But Mahinee glad that 
Charleyo’s friends have come for him. Mahinee and 
Kooloo sorry to lose their friends. But maybe some- 
time Charley o and Harealdo will come back.” 

When the captain assured him that it was not at all 
an improbable thing, he was indeed greatly pleased. 
Nor was this statement mere talk. The short time 
the Pleasantons and the Hardings had been on Hard- 
ing Island had been sufficient so to please them with 
the beauties and conveniences of the place, that they 
had agreed to return in six months for a short sojourn. 

Events followed one another rapidly on Harding 
Island, and soon the yacht, under full steam, was pass- 
ing out of Harding Channel with Doctor Parsons and 
Mahinee standing on the southern shore of the channel 
waving them adieu. 

As had been arranged, the captain took with him the 
pearls they had obtained from the cabin of the coral- 
encrusted brigantine, as well as the pearls the doctor 
had succeeded in collecting during his wanderings over 
the islands of the South Pacific. 

In due time the yacht reached Melbourne, where 
Mr. and Mrs. Pleasanton and Charley left for their 
home, and from which Captain Harding and Hiram, 
after a short visit, took a steamer for London. The 
yacht with its party then headed for Yokohama, which 
was also reached in due time. 

It is now six months from the time we left Doctor 
Parsons standing with Mahinee on the southeastern 

405 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


corner of Harding Island. He is again on the top of 
Parker Cliffs examining, through a powerful glass, a 
steamer that is approaching from the northwest. He 
recognizes it as the yacht-steamer, and knowing from 
arrangements he made with Captain Harding, that he 
would probably return with the boys about this time, 
he watched it with great satisfaction as it approached 
the island. In due time the steamer entered Harding 
Channel, and Doctor Parsons in boat No. 23 soon 
boarded it. To his great delight it contained not only 
Captain Harding and Hiram, but also Charley, Harold, 
and Jack. 

These were, so to speak, but the advance guard of 
others who had promised to follow in a few months. 
Mr. Pleasanton and Mr. Harding had been talking the 
matter over with their wives, and had concluded that 
instead of sending the boys to public schools and col- 
lege in Australia and Japan, they would send them 
to what, for want of a better name, they agreed to 
call, the Harding School, on Harding Island, one of 
the Pamutos. Mr. Pleasanton had bought the yacht, 
and being a very wealthy man determined that he 
would employ it for frequent trips between Australia 
and Harding Island. Mr. Harding having resigned his 
position in the English embassy at Yokohama, had ac- 
cepted another consulate in Melbourne, so this arrange- 
ment suited all. 

Shortly after this time they received another visit 
from Mahinee and Kooloo, who had visited the island 
with the bare hope that they might find their friends 
406 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


there ; for both he and Kooloo, especially the latter, had 
greatly missed Charley and Harold. When Mahinee 
heard of the plan of founding the Harding School, he 
at once asked, as a great favor, that his son Kooloo 
might be enrolled as one of the scholars. 

Harding School flourished to an extent that at first 
sight seemed almost incredible. But when it is re- 
membered that it had for its head master such a mag- 
nificent teacher as Captain Harding, and for an as- 
sistant teacher a man of the ripe learning and varied ex- 
perience of Doctor Parsons, it is not at all surprising 
that it rapidly attained great notoriety. A limited num- 
ber of students were admitted both from Melbourne 
and London, while Mahinee, having finally sent a 
colony of the people of the Eastern Valley to settle on 
the island, persuaded the captain to admit to the school 
a few of the sons of his chief warriors. 

The captain had made an unusually satisfactory 
sale of the pearls, and had brought back with him on 
the yacht a magnificent library, twenty or thirty times 
the size of the doctor’s old library, and had, moreover, 
brought with him a great variety of the highest type 
of physical apparatus. We will not attempt, however, 
to describe these things. They had an abundance of 
money to spend, and could not spend it more satisfac- 
torily than in thus making it possible for them to con- 
tinue their own private studies while on the island. 

Hiram had also returned, and this time, to the boys’ 
great astonishment and amusement, he brought a wife 
with him. And so on the island on which so many 
407 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


pleasant things occurred, which we have recorded, we 
leave our friends to the larger life which may lead to 
things we may imagine, but of which we cannot tell. 

What happened because of all these changes, how 
the school grew and flourished, and the amusing, ex- 
citing, and in some cases dangerous experiences they 
had will be told in the fourth volume of the Pacific 
Series ” — The Harding School.’’ 


THE END 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


APPENDIX 

I. The Breadfruit Tree. “Edible fruits, roots, 
and vegetables are found in plenty and variety. The 
breadfruit, artocarpus, is the principal, being produced 
in greater abundance, and used more generally, than 
any other. The tree on which it grows is large and 
umbrageous; the bark is light-colored and rough; the 
trunk of the tree is sometimes two or three feet in 
diameter, and rises from twelve to twenty feet with- 
out a branch. The outline of the tree is remarkably 
beautiful, the leaves are broad and indented somewhat 
like those of the fig tree, frequently twelve or eighteen 
inches long and rather thick, of a dark green color, 
with a surface glossy as that of the richest evergreens. 

“ The fruit is generally circular or oval, and is, on an 
average, six inches in diameter; it is covered with a 
roughish rind, which is marked with small square or 
lozenge-shaped divisions, having each a small eleva- 
tion in the center, and is at first of a light pea-green 
color; subsequently it changes to brown, and when 
fully ripe assumes a rich yellowish tinge. It is attached 
to the small branches of the tree by a short thick stalk, 
and hangs either singly or in clusters of two or three 
together. 

“ There is nothing very attractive or pleasing in the 
blossoms; but a fine stately tree, clothed with dark, 
shining leaves, and loaded with many hundreds of 
409 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


large, light green or yellowish-colored fruit, is one of 
the most splendid and beautiful objects to be met with 
among the rich and diversified scenery of a Tahitian 
landscape. Two or three of these trees are often seen 
growing around the rustic native cottage, and em- 
bowering it with their interwoven and prolific branches. 
The tree is propagated by shoots from the roots; it 
bears in about five years, ,and will probably continue 
bearing for fifty. 

The breadfruit is never eaten raw except by pigs. 
The natives, however, have several methods of dress- 
ing it. When traveling on a journey they often roast 
it in the flame or embers of a wood-fire and, peeling off 
the rind, eat the pulp of the fruit ; this mode of dress- 
ing is called tuna pa, crust or shell roasting. Some- 
times, when thus dressed, it is immersed in a stream of 
water, and when completely saturated forms a soft, 
sweet, spongy pulp or sort of paste, of which the na- 
tives are exceedingly fond. 

The general and the best way of dressing the 
breadfruit is by baking it in an oven of heated stones. 
The rind is scraped off, each fruit is cut in three or four 
pieces, and the core carefully taken out ; heated stones 
are then spread over the bottom of the cavity forming 
the oven and covered with leaves, upon which the 
pieces of breadfruit are laid; a layer of green leaves 
is placed over the fruit, and other heated stones are laid 
on the top ; the whole is then covered in with earth and 
leaves, several inches in depth. In this state the oven 
remains half an hour or longer, when the earth is 
410 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


cleared away, the leaves are removed, and the pieces 
of breadfruit taken out; the outsides are in general 
nicely browned, and the inner part presents a white or 
yellowish cellular, pulpy substance in appearance, 
slightly resembling the crumb of a small wheaten loaf. 
Its color, size, and structure are, however, the only 
resemblance it has to bread. It has but little taste, and 
that is frequently rather sweet; it is somewhat farina- 
ceous, but by no means so much so as several other 
vegetables, and probably less so than the English po- 
tato, to which in flavor it is also inferior. It is slightly 
astringent and, as a vegetable, it is very good, but is a 
very indifferent substitute for English bread. 

To the natives of the South Sea Islands it is the 
principal article of diet, and may indeed be called their 
staff of life. They are exceedingly fond of it, and it 
is evidently adapted to their constitutions, and highly 
nutritive, as a very perceptible improvement is often 
witnessed in the appearance of many of the people a 
few weeks after the breadfruit season has commenced. 
For the chiefs it is usually dressed two or three times 
a day, but the peasantry seldom prepare more than one 
oven during the same period, and frequently tihana, or 
bake, it again on the second day. : 

During the breadfruit season the inhabitants of a 
district sometimes join to prepare a quantity of opio. 
This is generally baked in an immense oven. A large 
pit, twenty or thirty feet in circumference, is dug out ; 
the bottom is filled with large stones, logs of firewood 
are piled upon them, and the whole is covered with 
411 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


other large stones. The wood is then kindled, and the 
heat is often so intense as to reduce the stones to a 
state of liquefaction. When thoroughly heated, the 
stones are removed to the sides; many hundred bread- 
fruit are then thrown in, just as they have been 
gathered from the trees, and are piled up in the center 
of the pit; a few leaves are spread upon them, the re- 
maining hot stones built up like an arch over the heap, 
and the whole is covered, a foot or eighteen inches 
thick, with leaves and earth. In this state it remains 
a day or two; a hole is then dug in one side, and the 
parties to whom it belongs take out what they want, 
till the whole is consumed. Breadfruit baked in this 
manner will keep good several weeks after the oven is 
opened. 

Although the general or district ovens of opio were 
in their tendency less injurious than the public stills, 
often erected in the different districts, they were usually 
attended with debauchery and excess, highly injurious 
to the health, and debasing to the morals of the people, 
who generally relinquished their ordinary employment 
and devoted their nights and days to mere animal 
existence of the lowest kind — rioting, feasting, and 
sleeping — until the opio was consumed. Within the 
last ten years very few ovens of opio have been pre- 
pared, those have been comparatively small, and they 
are now almost entirely discontinued. 

‘‘Another mode of preserving the breadfruit is by 
submitting it to a slight degree of fermentation and 
reducing it to a soft substance, which they call mahi. 

412 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


When the fruit is ripe, a large quantity is gathered, 
the rind scraped off, the core taken out, and the whole 
thrown in a heap. In this state it remains until it has 
undergone the process of fermentation, when it is 
beaten into a kind of paste. A hole is now dug in the 
ground, the bottom and sides of which are lined with 
green ti leaves; the mahi is put into the pit, covered 
over with ti leaves, and then with earth or large stones. 
In this state it might be preserved several months ; and, 
although rather sour and indigestible, it is generally 
esteemed by the natives as a good article of food dur- 
ing the scarce season. Previous to its being eaten it is 
rolled up in small portions, enclosed in breadfruit 
leaves, and baked in the natives’ ovens. 

‘‘ The tree on which the breadfruit grows, besides 
producing three, and in some cases four crops in a 
year, of so excellent an article of food, furnishes a 
valuable gum or resin, which exudes from the bark, 
when punctured, in a thick mucilaginous fluid, which is 
hardened by exposure to the sun, and is very service- 
able in rendering water-tight the seams of their canoes. 
The bark of the young branches is used in making sev- 
eral varieties of native cloth. The trunk of the tree also 
furnishes one of the most valuable kinds of timber 
which the natives possess, it being used in building their 
canoes and houses, and in the manufacture of their 
articles of furniture. It is of a rich yellow color, and 
assumes, from the effects of the air, the appearance of 
mahogany; it is not tough, but durable when not ex- 
posed to the weather. 


413 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


It is very probable that in no group of the Pacific 
islands is there a greater variety in the kinds of this 
valuable fruit than in the South Sea Islands. The 
several varieties ripen at different seasons, and the 
same kinds also come to perfection at an earlier period 
in one part of Tahiti than in another; so that there 
are but few months in the year in which ripe fruit is not 
to be found in the several parts of this island. The 
missionaries are acquainted with nearly fifty varieties, 
for which the natives have distinct names — these I have 
by me, but it is unnecessary to insert them — the princi- 
pal are, the paea^ artocarpus incisa, and the uru maohe, 
artocarpus integrifolia/' Polynesian Researches.” 
By William Ellis. London, 1829. 

Hermann Melville, from whose book, Typee,” 
much valuable information concerning the products of 
the Marquesas Islands, as well as its people, has been 
obtained, describes the method of roasting breadfruit 
taken directly from the tree. 

Referring to the breadfruit which has been exposed 
to the action of fire, he says : 

Sometimes after having been roasted in the fire, 
the natives snatch it briskly from the embers and, per- 
mitting it to slip out of the yielding rind into a vessel 
of cold water, stir up the mixture, which they call bo-a- 
shoe. I never could endure this compound, and, in- 
deed, the preparation is not greatly in vogue among the 
more polite Typees. 

There is one form, however, in which the fruit is 
414 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


occasionally served, that renders it a dish fit for a king. 
As soon as it is taken from the fire the exterior is re- 
moved, the core extracted, and the remaining part is 
placed in a sort of shallow stone mortar and briskly 
worked with a pestle of the same substance. While 
one person is performing this operation, another takes 
a ripe cocoanut and, breaking it in half, which they 
also do very cleverly, proceeds to grate the juicy meat 
into fine particles. This is done by means of a piece of 
mother-of-pearl shell lashed firmly to the extreme end 
of a heavy stick, with its straight side accurately 
notched like a saw. The stick is sometimes a gro- 
tesquely formed limb of a tree, with three or four 
branches twisting from its body like shapeless legs, and 
sustaining it two or three feet from the ground. 

The natives, first placing a calabash beneath the 
nose, as it were, of his curious-looking log steed, for the 
purpose of receiving the grated fragments as they fall, 
mounts astride of it as if it were a hobby-horse, and - 
twirling the inside of one of his hemispheres of cocoa- 
nut around the sharp teeth of the mother-of-pearl shell, 
the pure white meat falls in showers into the receptacle 
provided. Having obtained a quantity sufficient for 
his purpose, he places it in a bag made of the netlike 
fibrous substance attached to all cocoanut trees, and 
compressing it over the breadfruit, which being now 
sufficiently pounded, is put into a wooden bowl — ex- 
tracts a thick creamy milk. The delicious liquid soon 
bubbles round the fruit, and leaves it at last just 
peeping above its surface. 

41S 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


“ This preparation is called kokoo, and a most deli- 
cious preparation it is.” ‘‘ Typee.” By Hermann Mel- 
ville. 

Cook thus describes a preparation of the breadfruit 
called mahie which, since it can be kept for a long 
while, is employed during the parts of the year when 
no fruit is borne by the tree : 

“ The fruit is gathered just before it is perfectly ripe 
and, being laid in heaps, is closely covered with leaves ; 
in this state it undergoes a fermentation and becomes 
disagreeably sweet. The core is then taken out entire, 
which is done by gently pulling the stalk, and the rest 
of the fruit is thrown into a hole, which is dug for that 
purpose, generally in the houses, and neatly lined in the 
bottom and sides with grass. The hole is then covered 
with leaves, and heavy stones laid upon them. In this 
state it undergoes a second fermentation and becomes 
sour, after which it will sirffer no change for many 
months. It is taken out of the hole as it is wanted for 
use and, being made into balls, is wrapped up in leaves 
and baked. After it is dressed it will keep five or six 
weeks. It is eaten both cold and hot. The natives sel- 
dom make a meal without it, though to us the taste is as 
disagreeable as that of a pickled olive generally is the 
first time it is eaten. 

As the making of this mahie depends, like brewing, 
upon fermentation, so, like brewing, it sometimes fails, 
without their being able to ascertain the cause. It is 
very natural, therefore, that the making it should be 
416 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


connected with superstitious ceremonies. It generally 
falls to the lot of the old women, who will suffer no 
creature to touch anything belonging to it but those 
they employ as assistants, nor even to go into that part 
of the house where the operation is carrying on.” 
Cook, Three Famous Voyages Around the World.” 
London and New York. 

2. Yam. “ The uhi, or yam, dioscoria alata^ a most 
valuable root, appears to be indigenous in most of the 
South Sea Islands, and flourishes remarkably well. 
Several kinds grow in the mountains; their shape is 
generally long and round, and the substance rather 
fibrous, but remarkably farinaceous and sweet. The 
kind most in use is generally of a dark brown color 
with a roughish skin ; it is called by the natives obura. 

The yam is cultivated with much care, though to 
no very great extent, on account of the labor and at- 
tention required. The sides of the inferior hills and 
the sunny banks occasionally met with in the bottoms 
of the valleys are selected for its growth. Here a 
number of small terraces are formed, one above 
another, covered with a mixture of rich earth and de- 
cayed leaves. The roots intended for planting are. 
kept in baskets till they begin to sprout ; a yam is then 
taken and each eye, or sprout, cut off with a part of the 
outside of the root, an inch long and a quarter of an 
inch thick, attached to it; these pieces, sometimes con- 
taining two eyes each, are spread upon a board and left 
in some part of the house to dry ; the remainder of the 
2 B 417 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


root is baked and eaten. This mode of preparing the 
parts for planting does not appear to result from mo- 
tives of economy, as is the case in some parts where the 
Irish potato is prepared for planting in a similar man- 
ner, but because the natives imagine it is better thus to 
plant the eyes when they first begin to open, or germi- 
nate, with only a small part of the root, than to plant 
the whole yam, which they say is likely to rot. 
Whether the same plan might be adopted in planting 
the sweet potato and other roots, I am not prepared to 
say, as it is only in raising the yam that it is practised in 
the horticulture of the natives. When the pieces are 
sufficiently dry, they are carefully put in the ground 
with the sprouts uppermost, a small portion of dried 
leaves is laid upon each, and the whole lightly covered 
with mold. When the roots begin to swell, they watch 
their enlargement and keep them covered with light 
rich earth, which is generally spread over them about 
an inch in thickness. 

‘‘ The yam is one of the best flavored and most nutri- 
tive roots which the islands produce. The natives usu- 
ally bake them ; they are, however, equally good when 
boiled ; and, as they may be preserved longer out of the 
ground than any other, they are the most valuable sea- 
stock to be procured ; and it is to be regretted that they 
are not more generally cultivated. Few are reared in 
the Georgian Islands; more perhaps in the Society 
cluster; but Sir Charles Sander’s Island is more cele- 
brated for its yams than any other of the group.” Ellis, 
“ Polynesian Researches.” 

418 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


3. Chestnuts. “ In certain seasons of the year, if 
the breadfruit be scarce, the natives supply the defi- 
ciency thus occasioned with the fruit of the niape or 
rata, a native chestnut {Tuscarpus edulis). Like other 
chestnut trees, the mape is of stately growth and 
splendid foliage. It is occasionally seen in the high 
grounds, but flourishes only in the rich bottoms of the 
valleys, and seldom appears in greater perfection than 
on the margin of a stream. From the top of a moun- 
tain I have often been able to mark the course of a 
river by the winding and almost unbroken line of chest- 
nuts that have towered in majesty above the trees of 
humbler growth. The mape is branching, but the 
trunk, which is the most singular part of it, usually 
rises ten or twelve feet without a branch, after which 
the arms are large and spreading. 

‘‘ During the first seven or eight years of its growth 
the stem is tolerably round, but after that period, as it 
enlarges, instead of continuing cylindrical, it assumes a 
different shape altogether. In four or five places round 
the trunk small projections appear, extending in nearly 
straight lines from the root to the branches. The cen- 
ter of the tree seems to remain stationary; while these 
projections, increasing at length, seem like so many 
planks covered with bark, and fixed round the tree, or 
like a number of natural buttresses for its support. The 
center of the tree often continues many years with per- 
haps not more than two or three inches of wood round 
the medula, or pith; while the buttresses, though only 
about two inches thick, extend two, three, and four 
419 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


feet, being widest at the bottom. I have observed but- 
tresses, not more than two inches in thickness, project- 
ing four feet from the tree, and forming between each 
buttress natural recesses, in which I have often taken 
shelter from the rain. When the tree becomes old its 
form is still more picturesque, as a number of knots 
and contortions are formed on the buttress and 
branches, which render the outlines more broken and 
fantastic. 

“ The wood of the rata has a fine straight grain, but 
being remarkably perishable is seldom used, excepting 
for fire-wood. Occasionally, however, they cut off one 
of the buttresses, and thus obtain a good natural plank, 
with which they make the long paddles for their canoes 
or axe-handles. The leaf is large and beautiful, six or 
eight inches in length, oblong in shape, of a dark green 
color and, though an evergreen, exceedingly light and 
delicate in its structure. The tree bears a small, white 
racimated panicle flower, esteemed by the natives on ac- 
count of its fragrance. The fruit, which hangs singly 
or in small clusters from the slender twigs, is flat and 
somewhat kidney-shaped. The same term is also used 
by the natives for this fruit and the kidney of an 
animal. The nut is a single kernel, in a hard, tough, 
fibrous shell, covered with a thin, compact, fibrous husk. 
It is not eaten in a raw state; but, though rather hard 
when fully ripe, it is, when roasted in a green state, 
soft and pleasant to the taste.” Ellis, ‘‘ Polynesian Re- 
searches.” 


420 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


4. Taro. “ Next to the breadfruit the taro, or 
arum, is the most serviceable article of food the natives 
possess, and its culture receives a considerable share of 
their attention. It has a large, solid, tuberous root, of 
an oblong shape, sometimes nine or twelve inches in 
length, and five or six in diameter. The plant has no 
stalk; the broad heart-shaped leaves rise from the up- 
per end of the root, and the flower is contained in a 
sheath or spathe. There are several varieties; for 
thirty-three of which the natives have distinct names; 
and it is cultvated in low marshy parts, as the plant is 
found to thrive best in moist situations. A large kind, 
called ape, arum costatum, which is frequently planted 
in the dry grounds, is also used in some seasons, but 
is considered inferior to the taro. 

‘‘ All the varieties are so exceedingly acrid and pun- 
gent in their raw state as to cause the greatest pain, if 
not excoriation, should they be applied to the tongue or 
palate. They are always baked in the same manner as 
breadfruit is dressed; the rind, or skin, being first 
scraped off with a shell. The roots are solid, and 
generally of a mottled green or gray color, and when 
baked are palatable, farinaceous, and nutritive, resem- 
bling the Irish potato more than any other root in the 
islands. 

“ The different varieties of arum are propagated 
either by transplanting the small tubers, which they call 
pohiri, that grow round the principal root, or setting 
the top or crown of those roots used for food. When 
destitute of foreign supplies, we have attempted to 
421 


IN CAPTIVITY IN THE PACIFIC 


make flour with both the breadfruit and the taro by 
employing the natives to scrape the root and fruit into a 
kind of pulpy paste, then drying it in the sun, and 
grinding it in a handmill. The taro in this state was 
sometimes rather improved, but the breadfruit seldom 
is so good as when dressed immediately after it has 
been gathered.’' Ellis, “ Polynesian Researches.” 


89 

422 


H 18 
















I 


( ' • .' a i' ' I ■ ■ ' h '■ ' ' ' ' • ■ ■ > ' a - \ > a ‘ ' ' a ; ■ 

- I * M ' ? w i ■ * ‘ ^ i • ‘ I > 5 ^ ' i ' « ‘ ‘ y ‘ I 

f * i ; I » . t > . < ( I ' ' ■ • . - • 4 S' ' » ! 

*1 I *. ' * <*» .» • 4 1. L V'l4 l‘ * ■ • I 

S ; ; S • 1 S • ^ ' j J 4 [ . •■ j I ■ ‘ ! s ? . . • • S I > 

s ' * ■ * j ' ■ t ' I » * • ’ » • ‘ I ! * ■ , ' I t' ■ 

■- -I ‘ Sf ' '1 ■' s 'v *\ ' 

‘i, '’a 

, I •. • ' l • ‘ t ' i ^ I * ^ ' * • * I , J ' ' • * 4 '>> « .1 

* } V r : . : i * < i • 1 • V T i •:• » 1 : 1 


i; c.- ■ '>' ;■ i ' 

»;!■*’ * i > f ) S* ;■■ S ‘ ‘ ' .’ ‘ 

> .' ' ' S • i ■ S ' 1 •• ‘ • ‘ ' ^ 

jiafaaa-J 

S Sli;; 

» ’i| - !>' ^ I- *■) J f 

•'•S''* * * ^ i' - j - ' f > • . ' I • • - f j * ^ ' I < 

! I S J ' ■ f ' » S ■ ‘ ! i ^ i ' i M S' • ■ 


' • . ■ f ' ■ ■ ’ : » • ' ' S ! 

» ! • • ‘ * } ' > ■ • ' f ' S ; I > ' ' . ’ i ; S ' i 

' < ■ 1 : S ' ' * - < ; i : *f ' ' ' f 

/ f 1 » * i ■ ' • s • ' i ' 4 ' 1 ‘ ' S ■' 

f r • • J • ' ‘ ' S - • ‘ ' . ' • ,' * ' I • I ' ' I 

. 'f W * 1 1 • ‘ ‘ ' ' . ' . ’ . J ’ . ' ; . 

■ ■' I , 'v ! ' 1 1 . 

! ■ I ' ■ ■ ' ‘ 

, I . ■ 1 * • I I ‘ • I * ’ • ' ' ’ 

i ; ' i> i’J ;i ,: : a? ‘ , ■!!;•■. • ' ' 


I';/, 

i ' i ' ' ‘ ‘ * ■■'■''•;* ' ■ ■ , ‘ • ' • • ■ ; 

^ S ’ ■ * ' • ^ ' ''S' f • ' ■ i • ^ • • < • ' 4 • • 

' ri • s : . s . ^ ‘ . * • - , , . • / 

• • t I « . • • • • . * . ' I ' . ■ . . 

' ; / 5 : • ^ • i . 

» V* * j , f » 

.* f ? ■ I W 1 ? ' / ♦ • 4 . ! . ■ ? • . . » 

’/O: ;;f . M i. • ; ^ 

!•. ji.l'*!*.}*' i.r*’*' • 

! • ' . I . . . f ’ • t 1 t ^ . 4 ; - * J 

' * * 1 - J • ' , J /•■•■•.•, 

} : • M ‘ r ■• ■ ; • , W ■ ■ ■ ' ^ • 'S'-.'. 

> s * J ’ ■ ‘ i n * * • ' . • ' ■ ' 

M , , * I • ‘ S • * : ' . ' ■ - ' i 

• I. S « ■ ' ■ ' ( *'•'»' ‘ ' ' ' ' ■ > • { 

•i ‘ J ' • • . < ) * . 

I ' t ' • < ' 1 > l• -*• . 

J - . * 

’ i! ’■■!<!! :i’ I. :■:'■■ ■■ . , ■ 

• 7 i t .>•*:* f . . ... . : 


e 




